Terra​model TML List (including commands) compiled by Geocomp Systems

Commands and TMLs

This TMLList describes the commands in the British English and US English installations of Trimble Terramodel 10.61J (which includes the Geocomp Update), is compiled by Geocomp Systems and was last updated on 17 September 2014.

French and Spanish command names have been aliased to English command names on this list.

Commands can be entered at the Terramodel command line and selected by menus, toolbars, workspaces, macros or function keys. To use some of these commands, you will need relevant modules secured by a hardware security key.

This list includes all standard Terramodel commands and hundreds of other commands (TMLs) from Trimble, Geocomp Systems and other sources. Continuous development means that this list can never be entirely complete, accurate or current.

The easiest way to find words in this list is by Ctrl F.

The colour-coded Summary table below lists each command in alphabetical order with a summary and a category. Follow the links for more detail on the command in the details table.

The current version of this TML List is on the web. If you have installed Terramodel 10.61J, and you open the local version of the TML List, you can follow links in the details table to installed Guides.

 

These colours indicate how each command is supplied. More info...
Standard Trimble command
Geocomp Update adds new command
Geocomp Update modifies Trimble command
Install separately
New or recently modified; contact Geocomp Systems for the latest release

 NAME SUMMARY CATEGORY
 3D Compute points offset from a selected alignment alignment
 3DFILTER Filter superfluous points from DTM dtm
 3DMCOUT Export to Topcon 3D-MC MCA file export
 3DPIPE Report 3D lengths and angles for a set pipe general
 ABBREVSET Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display set
 ABOUT Report Terramodel version number and modules. report, config
 ACADCONV Convert DWG or DXF files to R2000 DWG files convert
 ACTIVE Set active alignment alignment
 ACTIVE​CHAINAGE Set the active chainage alignment
 ACTIVE​STATION Set the active station alignment
 ADD2NAME Add a prefix or suffix to names of points, plines and sets name
 ADD2PTNO Add a prefix or suffix to point numbers point
 ADD2TXT Add a prefix or suffix to text text
 ADDIMAGE Add an image to selected plotboxes image
 ADDISO Add an isopach layer to a DTM layer dtm
 ADDTIDES Add tide heights to depths hdms
 ADJAREA Adjust a lot to an nominated area set
 ADJUST​AREA Same as ADJAREA set
 AIRVALVE Label a pipe with airvalve blocks pipe general
 ALIAS Create and edit aliases config
 ALIGNIMP Import an alignment from an ASCII file alignment
 ALIGNOFF Import alignment offsets from an ASCII file alignment
 ALIGNTXT Align text to HAL align, text
 ALL Display all visible objects in the active view view
 ALT Enable menus for entry by keyboard menu
 ANG Report angle-right between points report
 ARC Draw pline arcs from any three parameters set
 ARC2P Create a pline arc using two points and a radius set
 ARC2PSET Create a set arc using two points and a radius set
 ARCBL Create breaklines along all arcs on a layer dtm, set
 ARCBREAK Replace set arcs with points and chords set
 ARCENTRE Toggle visibility of set arc centre points toggle
 ARCS Replaced by ARC set
 AREA Report the area of a closed figure report
 AREA2SET Replaced by TRACEBDY set
 ARRANGE Arrange icons of minimised views view
 ASAPIMAG Add mastersheet images to plotboxes image
 ASHIN Import an Ashtech points file import
 ASM01 Renumber points in chainage (or station) order points
 AUSGEOID Import an AUSGeoid DAT file or AusGeoid09 TXT import
 AUTO​DRAFT Create line, block and text features from field codes survey
 AUTOSAVE Enable automatic saving of project files config
 AUTOSET Create a clockwise set from points set
 AVGEND Compute volumes by end-area report
 BASIN Create, enter and edit basin attributes for a point hydrology
 BBEAR Create a point at the intersection of two bearings point
 BDIST Create a point at the intersection of a bearing and an arc point
 BDYRELAY Relayer within boundary and bandwidth layer
 BEARTEXT Adds a datum angle to bearing text text
 BENCH Create a bench string set
 BESTFITA Draw a curve or plane of best fit pline
 BESTFIT Replaced by BESTFITA pline
 BFITCURV Draw an arc of best fit pline
 BFITLINE Draw a line of best fit pline
 BGELEV Copy points into an elevation view view
 BHOLE01 Import boreholes from a CSV import
 BIGXMLIN Import LandXML points without new lines import
 BIN2IMG Create a coloured image from depths hdms
 BL Create breaklines set
 BLDG Create plines with corners at right angles set
 BLFILTER Filter excess points from breaklines dtm, set
 BLINECHK Check for crossing breaklines set
 BLKPTS Place blocks at points based upon BLOCK.MAP file block
 BLKREAD Replace an internal block with an external block block
 BLOCK Create, place, list or purge blocks block
 BLOCKLST Create an array of blocks for a legend block
 BLUETOP Bluetop report report
 BMAP Replaced by BLKPTS block
 BOREHOLE Import boreholes import
 BOX Create a pline box pline
 BREAK Break a pline or set into two parts pline, set
 BUILDING Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides pline
 CAGDRL_X Report Compute-​A-​Grade ditches report
 CALLOUT Label objects with callout text text
 CAROUSEL Configure plotter pen carousels plot
 CASCADE Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible view
 CASE Replaced by TEXTCASE text
 CAT Create a catenary curve in the profile view pline
 CDSPROF Create initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return alignment
 CENVIEW Re-centre views based on chainage display
 CF2SUPER Compute super­elevation from existing crossfall alignment
 CHAINAGE Set the start chainage of a HAL alignment
 CHEKROAD Check and correct roadway alignment registration alignment
 CHNGATTR Replace selected attributes based on a dictionary attribute
 CHNGCOLR Change colour ByLayer to colour by colour number colour
 CHNGHEIG Change elevation by point name elevation
 CHNGNAME Replace selected characters in names based on a dictionary name
 CHNGTEXT Replace selected text based on a dictionary text
 CHOSDIFF Report chainage, offset and height difference from DTM report
 CHTXT Convert stationing text to chainage text text
 CIRCLE Create a circular pline pline
 CLEANSET Remove unnecessary points from sets set
 CLEARMESS Clear text from the message scroll display display
 CLIP Clip plines or sets at closed boundaries. pline, set
 CLIP_OUT Clip objects outside multiple boundaries. pline, set
 CLOSE Close the current project file
 CLOSEFIG Close selected lines set
 CLS See CLEARMESS display
 COLOR Modify the color of selected objects colour
 COLOR​CODE Color points relative to the current roadway colour
 COLORCON Colour contours by contour interval colour
 COLORPT Colour points by contour interval colour
 COLOUR Modify the colour of selected objects colour
 COLOUR​CODE Colour points relative to the current roadway colour
 COLOUR​CON See COLORCON colour
 COLRLINE Modify colours and linetypes by layer mapping file colour
 COMMAND Bring up a command line command
 Command​Toggle Toggle the visibility of the command line command
 COMPASS Place a compass rose block
 COMPGRID Compactor grid settings compactor
 CONFORM Road thickness conformation report report
 CONNECT Connect two sets of the same type, forming a single set set
 CONTENTS Same as HELP help
 CONTOUR Extract contour plines from a DTM dtm
 Contour​At​Elev Create plines at a specified contour elevation dtm
 CONTOUR​SET Configure contour interval dtm
 CONTOUR​VOL Compute volumes from contours dtm
 CONVERT Convert plines to sets or sets to plines set, pline
 CONVSET Slope Convention settings config
 CONV_DMS Convert degrees, minutes and seconds to decimal degrees. transform
 COORDCON Transform coordinates of points by projection transform
 COORDS Coordinate scroll display display
 COPY Copy selected objects sets, plines
 COPYROAD Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob road
 COPYRWAY Copy a roadway to a different roadjob road
 COPYTEMP Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name road
 CORDSCRL Recover lost coordinate scroll display
 COUNT Count the number of objects of each type in each view report
 CRDTABLE Create a linked coordinate table report
 CREATELL Import layer lists and layers import, layer
 CROSSCHK Check for crossing lines set
 CROWFOOT Toggle arrow heads on segment text leader lines toggle
 CSMAN Coordinate System Manager config
 CSTAKE Print the slope staking reports report
 CSTAKING Same as CSTAKE report
 CSV2ADC Create AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file from .CSV config
 CTAB Replaced by CRDTABLE report
 CULDESAC Create and draw a Cul-de-Sac set
 CURSOR Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement display
 CURVE Insert or edit pline curve alignment
 CURVESOL Solve a curve pline, set
 CUTFILL Balance cut and fill volumes dtm
 CUTFILLA Replaced by CUTFILL dtm
 CVD5EXPT Export to Civilcad 5 AS5 export
 CVD5IMPT Import from Civilcad 5 AS5 import
 CVDEXPT Export to Civilcad 4 ASC export
 CVDIMPT Import from Civilcad 4 ASC import
 DATAMINE Import a Datamine binary file import
 DCEDIT Trimble DC File Editor import/​export
 DDIST Create a point at the intersection of two arcs or distances point
 DEFANG Display angle between two bearings report
 DELBLKS Delete missing external blocks block
 DELCROSS Delete objects between two locations. delete
 DELETE Delete record delete
 DELETE​SEGMENT Delete segment delete
 DESC Change numeric names to alphanumeric text
 DESCAD Change numeric names to alphanumeric using multi and global codes text
 DESIGN Project batters from a design DTM dtm
 DESIGNELEV Modify elevation to design roadway elevation road
 DESIGNSET Configure design settings config
 DESPIKE Removes spikes from a DTM dtm
 DFEDIT Data Format Editor import/​export
 DIAG Trimble diagnostic report report
 DIM Dimension sets and plines text
 DISJOIN Break sets and plines into segments set
 DISPFEAT Display feature attributes attribute
 DISPLAY​SET Control object display view
 DISTANCE Display the distance between two locations report
 DIVIDE Divide a line into intervals points
 DLGDOIN Import USGS DLG-O file import
 DLGDOOUT Export USGS DLG-O file export
 DLINE Dimension between two locations text
 DOCU​MENTS List Terramodel documents help
 DPAD Replaced by MOVEPAD set
 DRAFTSET Drafting settings config
 DRAPE Create sets where selected plines cross DTM links dtm
 DRAGHDIN Import Drag Head log file import
 DRAINRPT Drainage detail report report
 DRILL01 Label a drill hole text
 DRNGRADE Label segment with grade and direction text
 DTM2LDBX Export a DTM as Leica 1200 DBX database export
 DTM2XML Export a DTM as LandXML export
 DTMALL Relink all DTM layers and refresh dtm
 DTMAREA Report the planimetric and surface areas of a DTM layer dtm
 DTMBYLL Replaced by GCCOPY dtm
 DTMCH Select the current DTM layer dtm
 DTMCONE Create a cone from a point to a DTM set
 DTMDRAIN Create sets around drainage areas hydrology
 DTMEDGE Create a set around a DTM edge dtm
 DTMGRID Interpolate a grid of points over a DTM dtm
 DTMINFO Report which layers are linked for DTMs dtm
 DTMMATCH Match overlapping DTMs dtm
 DTMMATH Create points by comparison with two DTMs dtm
 DTMPTS Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM dtm
 DTMSET Create sets of triangle sides on a DTM dtm
 DTMSHOT Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing dtm
 DTMSTATS Display the highest and lowest elevations of points in a layer report
 DTMUPDT Relink the current DTM layer and refresh dtm
 DUMPATT Report the attribute records stored for a selected object report
 DUPLTRIS Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets set
 DXFCHANG Relayer all layers in a DXF file according to a map file export
 DYNAVIEW Create a dynaview plot
 EARTHWORK Compute volume of cut and fill between two DTMs report
 EARTHWRK Roadway volume report report
 EDIT Edit object object
 ELBLK Replaced by PTBLKS point
 ELE2NAME Change name of objects to match their elevations. name
 ELEV​ALONG​SET Set the elevation of points along a set set
 ELEVATION Replaced by GCELEV elevation
 ELEVOBJS Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from DTM DTM
 ELEV​REF​PLANE Modify elevation of points by reference plane elevation
 ELEV​REF​PT Modify elevation of points to reference point elevation
 ELFS Elevation and grade from chainage profile
 ELLIPSE Create an ellipse pline
 ELTXT Elevation from text point
 ELVPLINE Average contour elevations plines
 EMXSALIGN Import a Geopak alignment import
 ERR_ELIP Add error ellipse attributes attribute
 EVALDTM Report invalid points and sets in a DTM layer dtm
 EXEC Execute an external program config
 EXIT Exit Terramodel save
 EXPLODE Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes. set
 EXPLORE Open Windows Explorer exec
 EXPORT Export data using scripts export
 EXPORTGC Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format export
 EXPORT​SMGR Export script manager export
 EXPORTXS Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format export
 EXTEND Extend a line pline, set
 FAVORITES Favorite (or favourite) commands config
 FACTZ Replaced by SCALEELV points
 FBLOCK Import ASCII points file in rectangular blocks import
 FILLET Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two segments pline, set
 FILTER Filter vertices in plines pline
 FIXCURVE Move three-​point-​arc points onto tangents set
 FIXDTM Fix breaklines connected to layer 0 dtm
 FIXDYNA Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records plot
 FIXLAYERS Fix layers that do not compute end-area volumes dtm
 FLIPDOWN Copy points and sets from an elevation view to a plan view view
 FLIPUP Copy points and sets from a plan view into an elevation view view
 FONTCHNG List or change fonts used by selected text text
 FORESTRD Apply horizontal design criteria to a road alignment road
 FORESTTB Report offsets for a forest road. road
 FRGOUT Export Fastmap 700 Full Road Geometry file export
 FTCODEIN Replaced by FY_ATBIN attribute
 FY_ATBED Edit feature attributes attribute
 FY_ATBEP Export feature attributes to CSV attribute
 FY_ATBIN Import feature attributes from Trimble DC file attribute
 FY_ATBOU Export feature attributes to Mapinfo attribute
 F7 Toggle point number display on/off point label
 F8 Toggle circle symbol on/off point label
 F8C Toggle preset symbol on/off point label
 F8T Place markers on points mark
 F9 Toggle elevation display on/off point label
 F11 Toggle name display on/off point label
 GARMININ Import Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) File import
 GARMINOU Export Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) File export
 GC01 Truncate the name of selected objects text
 GC02 Change name to the chainage & offset from HAL text
 GC03 Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL report
 GC03A Report chainage and offset from master HAL report
 GC03DRN Report chainage (horizontal), offset and design offset from HAL and VAL report
 GC03DUAL Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs report
 GC04 Create mid-points on short plines point
 GC05 Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs report
 GC06 Round elevations in project file point
 GC07 Helmert transformation transform
 GC08 Part of RDX_GC and XSHEETGC plot
 GC09 Place blocks and symbols by group blocks
 GC10 List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length for printing report
 GC10CSV List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length for spreadsheet report
 GC100 Report thickness between two DTMs report
 GC10CSV List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length for spreadsheet report
 GC12DIN Import 12D Model ASCII file import
 GC12DOUT Export 12D Model ASCII file export
 GC14 Report chainage (along slope) and offset from HAL and VAL report
 GC14S Report sorted chainage (along slope) and offset from HAL and VAL report
 GC14SET Report chainage (along slope) and offset from set report
 GC14R Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format report
 GC15 Delete selected lines with specified total length pline, set
 GC16 Change line colour and linetype using GEOCOMP.CLT colour
 GC16ADC Change line colour and linetype using AutoDraft report colour
 GC17 Calculate intersection with DTM given bearing and slope from set point
 GC18 Report chainage and elevation along a VAL report
 GC20 Compute and check cut/fill volumes within boundaries report
 GC21 Change the default callout style text
 GC22 Check DTM edge and design boundaries sets
 GC23 Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM sets
 GC24 Adjust a lot or traverse by Bowditch survey
 GC25 Compute a single isopach or cut/fill line between two DTMs dtm
 GC25MULT Compute multiple isopachs between two DTMs. dtm
 GC26 Create an attribute record for an object attribute
 GC26GIS Create an attribute record in MS Access for an object attribute
 GC27 Place chainage labels parallel to xlines text
 GC28 Create 3D points along HAL & VAL with name = ch alignment
 GC28A Create 3D points along HAL & VAL alignment
 GC29 Compute distance & direction with 3D components report
 GC29UTM Compute ellipsoidal distance & direction report
 GC30 Report coordinates and elevation difference to DTM report
 GC30A Report coordinates and elevation difference to DTM with alignment report
 GC30PERP Report coordinates and elevation difference perpendicular to DTM report
 GC31 Remove duplicate points on a layer with tolerances point
 GC32 Report visible layers in LayerLists report
 GC33 Create a DTM from the upper or lower of two DTMs dtm
 GC33MULT Create a DTM from the upper or lower of multiple DTMs dtm
 GC34 Find and report a point by number mark
 GC35 Create points at centroids of a plines or sets point
 GC36 Move points onto a HAL or line point
 GC37 Create and report cross sections at strings intersecting xlines export
 GC37CSV Create cross sections as .CSV at strings intersecting xlines export
 GC38 Affine transformation transform
 GC383D Replaced by GC3DADJ point
 GC39 Move a HAL IP and update Xlines road
 GC3DADJ 3D conformal transformation transform
 GC3DROT Rotate in 3D around 0,0,0 transform
 GC3DSETS Find the closest 3D distance between two sets set
 GC3PTARC Create a two-arc set through three points set
 GC40 Compare points in two layers by coordinate report
 GC40A Compare points in two layers by coordinate using search ranges report
 GC40M Compare points in two layers by coordinate using alignment report
 GC40PILE Compare pile points in two layers report
 GC40RAKE Report pile rake by comparing points at top and bottom report
 GC40TEXT Label points in two layers with differences text
 GC41 Show obstructions in profile view road
 GC42 Report elevation minus roadway elevation report
 GC42AB Compare as-built points within tolerance with roadway design report
 GC42ABS Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design select
 GC42DTM Compare DTM with roadway design report
 GC42HAL Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway report
 GC42KB Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set report
 GC42VAL Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway report
 GC43 Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob report
 GC43CSV Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob to CSV report
 GC43MCSV Report multiple surface areas of shapes in a roadjob to CSV report
 GC43S Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob within a material report
 GC43SCSV Report surface areas of shapes in a roadjob within a material to a CSV file report
 GC44 Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage report
 GC44CSV Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage to CSV report
 GC44S Report surface areas of a DTM by slope and chainage within a material report
 GC45 Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances point
 GC46 Compute cut volumes between surfaces within blocks report
 GC47 Road resheet profiles road
 GC48 Extract profiles from roadway shapes road
 GC49 Create a point on a line given elevation point
 GC50 Grade a set from known points set
 GC51 Intersection design road
 GC52 Change group of selected objects group
 GC53 Create, list or highlight non-​contourable points dtm
 GC54 Apply geoid-​spheroid correction from a DTM transform
 GC55 Extrapolate heights from two 3D sets perpendicular onto a set point
 GC55HAL Extrapolate heights from two 3D sets perpendicular to HAL onto a set point
 GC56 Swap in X, Y or Z point
 GC57 Create points from cross sections road
 GC58 Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from a layer sets, plines, text
 GC58S Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from selected objects sets, plines, text
 GC59 Quality Assurance report from Geodimeter as-built survey report
 GC60 Radial setout report report
 GC61 Create a point at a distance between two points point
 GC62 Replaced by ELFS alignment
 GC63 Intersect batter defined by two sets with DTM road
 GC64 Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets road
 GC64BIT Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows config
 GC65 Create point at chainage, offset and elevation along alignment alignment
 GC65FILE Import points by chainage, offset and elevation alignment
 GC66 Create breaklines at ridges, valleys or changes of grade sets
 GC67 Move points onto perpendicular Xlines alignment
 GC67A Move points onto skewed Xlines alignment
 GC68 Add points into sets based on maximum horizontal distance sets
 GC682SET Add points into two sets with linking breaklines sets
 GC69 Change zero elevations to no elevation points
 GC70 Combine elevation of point and DTM dtm
 GC71 Solid hatch along lines hatch
 GC72 Report satellite horizon curtain report
 GC73 Interpolate elevation from VAL alignment
 GC74 Set the start chainage of multiple sets or plines alignment
 GC75 Report distance and slope between sets or plines report
 GC76 Report on Geodimeter job file report
 GC77 Change elevation of text to match elevation of subject text
 GC78 Import profiles into profile view profile
 GC79 Renumber points match their point names point
 GC80 Compare sum of lot areas against boundary report
 GC81 Report alignment report
 GC82 Compute DTM slope areas within a boundary report
 GC83 Select objects less than or greater than specified length config
 GC84 Join multiple plines pline
 GC85 Replaced by CLEANSET set
 GC86 Move points relative to alignment alignment
 GC87 Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM alignment
 GC88 Clip or extend a pline to a defined length pline
 GC89 Create a DTM perpendicular to another DTM dtm
 GC90 Extend DTM to point dtm
 GC91 Extend DTM by distance dtm
 GC92 Report or move duplicate points dtm
 GC93 Mirror or rotate point label point label
 GC94 Report crossfall between two sets report
 GC95 Delete set segments greater than a nominated length set
 GC96 Select points between two DTM layers dtm
 GC99 Create parallel strings at offsets from alignment sets
 GC100 See GC100 report
 GCABOUT See GCHELP config, report
 GCACTIVE Select active alignment from registered alignments alignment
 GCADDLAY Prefix name with first 4 characters from layer name name
 GCADJANT Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna survey
 GCADJDES Adjust points for new vertical alignment alignment
 GCANG Report and label angle-right between points text
 GCARC Create arc pline or set by three parameters set
 GCARCBL Create invisible breaklines along all arcs on a layer dtm, set
 GCBADEAT Delete or select text containing Bad Rec EAT codes text
 GCBLKPTS Create points at the insertion points of blocks block
 GCBOUND Match extents of boundaries dtm
 GCCHRLIN Import profile from file of chainage and elevation profile
 GCCL Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file alignment
 GCCLIP Create new DTM surfaces clipped to boundaries dtm
 GCCOLCON Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative contours pline
 GCCONCHK Change elevation of 2D points to match others in set set
 GCCONIN Import Geocomp contour file import
 GCCONOUT Export Geocomp contour file export
 GCCONTXT Set elevations of labelled contours pline
 GCCONVRT Convert plines to sets or sets to plines set, pline
 GCCOORD Transform coordinates of points, plines, text and blocks transform
 GCCOPY Copy objects onto a layer point, set, pline, block, text
 GCCSVIN Import comma-​separated ASCII coordinate files import
 GCDAMVOL Compute dam volumes with increments dtm
 GCDCOUT Export alignments to Trimble DC files alignment
 GCDELSET Delete sets and points in sets set
 GCDESC Replaced by F11 toggle
 GCDESCRL Replaced by F11 toggle
 GCDIMLOT Label lots with dimension text text
 GCDTM Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .dtp file dtm
 GCDTMALL Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh dtm
 GCDTMGDE Interpolate supe​relevation profiles from DTM alignment
 GCDTMDIF Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor dtm
 GCDTMIN Import a Geocomp .DTM file import
 GCDTMOUT Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file export
 GCEARTH Roadway volume report in columns report
 GCEDTABL Replaced by FY_ATBED attribute
 GCEDTATB Replaced by FY_ATBED attribute
 GCELEV Modify the elevation of selected objects elevation
 GCESRIIN Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC DEM grid files import
 GCEXPLOD Explode blocks and text retaining layers, names and elevations block
 GCFALL Create a pline indicating fall from a location dtm, pline
 GCFILTER Filter excess points from straights and arcs in 2D sets set
 GCGENGRD Create points on a grid pattern points
 GCGEOIN Import Leica .GEO coordinate file import
 GCGPXIN Import GPS data in .GPX format import
 GCGRDVOL Compute cut and fill volumes for regions in a grid or between Xlines report
 GCGSIOUT Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format export
 GCGT7IN Import alignment in Topcon Civilcad GT7/GTS format import
 GCGTSOUT Export alignment in Topcon Civilcad GC7/GTS format export
 GCHALADJ Adjust registered hal to use offsets alignment
 GCHALDEL Delete selected registered HALs alignment
 GCHALEDT Edit a registered horizontal alignment graphically alignment
 GCHALIN Import Geocomp Horizontal Alignment import
 GCHALOFF Create a pline from a registered HAL with offsets alignment
 GCHALOUT Export Geocomp Horizontal Alignment export
 GCHAULMN Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file masshaul
 GCHELP Report configuration status and help links report
 GCIDCHN Display chainage and offset at cursor alignment
 GCIMPORT Import Geocomp or survey data import
 GCINCTXT Create text incrementing by multiples text
 GCINSBLK Replace circles with trees blocks
 GCIN2SET Insert points into multiple sets set
 GCJOINMP Join points with gaps survey
 GCJOINPT Join points based on feature-coded name survey
 GCKMLIN Import placemarks and paths from Google Earth (KML) import
 GCKMLOUT Link to Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles export
 GCLABGRD Label and draw grids inside polygons draft
 GCLABIP Label intersection points text
 GCLABLOT Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text text
 GCLABPEG Label pipeline with peg labels pipe general
 GCLABPNT Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border text
 GCLFAOUT Export linear features for Quantm Alignment Planning Export
 GCLINPTS List points with invalid coordinates point
 GCLLGRID Draw latitude and longitude grid pline
 GCLNGIN Import Geocomp long section import
 GCLOTCNR Label lot corners with two elevations text
 GCLPOINTS Replaced by GCLPTS report
 GCLPTS List the coordinates and group of the selected points report
 GCMAPOUT Create a map file of object and layer names export
 GCMATCH Close gaps in contours pline
 GCMATIN Import road materials road
 GCMATOUT Export road materials road
 GCMERGE Merge multiple regions or DTMs dtm
 GCMFI Import multiple ASCII PTS or CSV files import
 GCMOSSIN Replaced by MOSSIN and MOSSTRI import
 GCMOSSOU Replaced by MOSSOUT export
 GCMULCON Assign contour elevations to multiple plines pline
 GCMULTDC Export multiple alignments to a Trimble DC file alignment
 GCMULTGD Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .rln files alignment
 GCMULVOL Compute cut/fill volumes between pairs of dtm surfaces dtm
 GCMULXML Export multiple alignments to Leica 1200 LandXML files alignment
 GCNAMEPT Name points sequentially along a set import
 GCNEDIN Import Quantm Grid (NED) .asc file import
 GCNMEAIN Import NMEA strings from GPS receivers import
 GCNOELEV Select points with no elevations (2D) point
 GCOFFELV Create plines or sets offset from a set sets
 GCOFLINE Select points of multiple selected sets. set
 GCONECON Assign contour elevations to selected plines pline
 GCOUT Export data to Geocomp SDS (.PTS & .STR) export
 GCP39 Replaced by GCRLNOUT export
 GCPAD Place building pads at nominated height within a lot set
 GCPAN Pan by numeric keypad with 8 = north plot
 GCPANEL Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points roadway
 GCPAVSET Create a PaveSet paving machine setout file export
 GCPILE Create pile points using HAL & VAL alignment
 GCPLDICE Replaced by GC71 hatch
 GCPLFIN Import HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT, .000) plot file import
 GCPLTIN Import Geocomp .PLT plot file import
 GCPRFEDT Edit profile IPs graphically profile
 GCPROFIL Create profiles from multiple DTMs in a layerlist profile
 GCPTAIN Import data from TPSetout/​TPStakeout .PTA survey points file import
 GCPTDIST Check minimum distances between points on sets report
 GCPTRLDS Replaced by F11 toggle
 GCPTSIN Import point data from an ASCII file import
 GCPTSOUT Export points to various ASCII formats export
 GCPTSTXT Change elevation or name of points by nearest text point
 GCQA Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM report
 GCQP Interactive quick profile profile
 GCQV Move a HAL IP and recompute roadway volume report
 GCREDRAW Redraw all views and reset scale for point labels view
 GCRELAY Replaced by GCCOPY layer
 GCREPORT Open P3Pad report editor report
 GCRENUM Renumber points in set order point
 GCREVIEW Move or copy objects from one view to another view
 GCRIVER Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river set
 GCRLNOUT Export Geodimeter Roadline alignments from strings export
 GCSDROUT Export Sokkia SDR alignment files export
 GCSKIPMN Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes alignment
 GCSPELL Check spelling text
 GCSTRATA Create points at strata from table of depths DTM
 GCSUBDTM Create a subgrade DTM from depth boundaries DTM
 GCSUBGDE Create plines to transition subgrade templates alignment
 GCSURFAR Replaced by XSURAREA report
 GCSZAOUT Export special zones for Quantm Alignment Planning export
 GCTADPOL Label batter with block showing direction of slope block
 GCTMAIN Import Quantm DTM import
 GCTMAOUT Export DTM for Quantm Alignment Planning export
 GCTRACE Define a boundary by tracing inside multiple selected plines or sets. set, pline, hatch, report
 GCTSP Add Geocomp module to Terramodel Search Path config
 GCTSTYLE Set the current text style text
 GCTTAOUT Export a set to Trimble .tta and .ttx export
 GCTUNNEL Export LandXML for Leica RoadRunner Tunnel export
 GCTURN Compute the swept path of a vehicle road
 GCTXTFIT Adjust text aspect to align on right text
 GCUMC3D Export to Leica Universal Machine Control 3D export
 GCUNJOIN Break sets and plines into segments set
 GCUPDATE Replaced by GCUPJ config
 GCUPJ Part of the 10.61J Geocomp Update config
 GCVALDEL Delete selected registered VALs alignment
 GCVALEDT Replaced by GCPRFEDT profile
 GCVALOFF Create a pline from a registered VAL with offsets profile
 GCVERIN Import Geocomp vertical alignment import, profile
 GCVEROUT Export Geocomp vertical alignment export, profile
 GCWRAP Change tunnel wrap status of a layer dtm
 GCXLINES Create or replace labelled xlines for a roadway road
 GCXMLIN Import LandXML points within boundaries import
 GCXMLOUT Export roadway strings to LandXML road
 GDACONV Replaced by GCCOORD transform
 GDMDIR List Geodimeter directory and delete files survey
 GEOC_PAL Add GeoNav palettes hdms
 GEOMINQ Measure bearing, distance and vertical angle. report
 GEOMRPTS Report Bearings and Distances report
 GEONAV Replaced by HDMS hdms
 GEOSYS Establish GPS geodetic system config
 GFE Geodimeter file editor survey
 GM1 Change slopes of triangles to within slope limit point
 GNCSTEXP Part of HDMS export
 GNCSTIMP Part of HDMS import
 GNDWEED Replaced by HDMS hdms
 GNHLAB Replaced by HDMS hdms
 GNIMPORT Replaced by HDMS hdms
 GNSETUP Replaced by HDMS hdms
 GOLFAREA Report golf course areas report
 GPSSYS Replaced by GEOSYS config
 GPXOUT Export Topografix GPX points for GPS export
 GRADESMT Export files to Leica Geosystems GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders export
 GRDPTS Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid export
 GRIDELEV Create a grid of points and interpolates elevations dtm
 GRIDEXPT Export a grid of points interpolated from a DTM export
 GRIDMAKE Create points or plines using grid settings points
 GRIDSET Set the current grid settings config
 GRIDVOL Compute cut and fill volumes on a grid report
 GRP2NAME Change the name of each object to match its group group
 GSIDTMOU Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format export
 GSSWP Geocomp Systems Support web page report
 GST Geodimeter Software Tools survey
 HALDATA Create horizontal alignment by table entry alignment
 HAL​MANAGER Register horizontal alignments alignment
 HALVALRP Report horizontal and vertical alignments report
 HAREAB Basin area hydrology
 HATCH Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries hatch
 HATCHENC Hatch the region enclosed by selected objects hatch
 HATCH​_IT Replaced by HATCH​ENC hatch
 HATCH​PAT Hatch regions with a selected hatch pattern hatch
 HATCH​USER Hatch regions with a user-​defined pattern hatch
 HBLIST List basin hydrograph hydrology
 HCCN Calculate curve number hydrology
 HCOVER Hydrology cover sheet hydrology
 HDEFS Hydrology defaults hydrology
 HDMS Hydrographic Data Management System hdms
 HDMSBABT Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSBIN Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSCOL Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSCSL Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMS​DCL​BLK Create hatching coloured by depth hdms
 HDMSDLAB Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSDW Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSEVT Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSRLAB Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSRTR Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSTC Part of HDMS hdms
 HDMSTLAB Part of HDMS hdms
 HDRAW Draw hydrographs hydrology
 HECIN Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file import
 HECOUT Replaced by HECOUTGC export
 HECOUTGC Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file export
 HECX Replaced by HECOUTGC export
 HELP Open the Terramodel Help help
 HGNIMP Part of HDMS hdms
 HGEN Compute Basin hydrographs hydrology
 HIDE Hide a set segment toggle
 HILO Replaced by DTMSTATS report
 HLIST List hydrographs hydrology
 HORIZ​ALIGN Register one horizontal alignment road
 HRLIST List reach hydrograph hydrology
 HROUT Route hydrographs through a pond hydrology
 HROUTR Route hydrographs through a reach hydrology
 HYDRO Replaced by HDMS hdms
 HYDROIMP Part of HDMS hdms
 ID Identify object report
 IDANGLE Report the angle between two lines or three points report
 ID​CHAINAGE See IDSTATION alignment
 ID​STATION Identify chainage and offset alignment
 IGRP Display only objects in the same group group
 ILINE Create points at intersections of selected lines point
 IMAGE Image manager image
 IMAGEPTH Change image file locations for Image manager image
 IMANAGER Island manager alignment
 IMPORT Import data using scripts import
 IMPORTGC Import Geocomp .CES cross sections import
 IMPORT​SMGR Import script manager import
 IMPORTXS Import various cross section formats into a roadway import
 INCHOFRL Replaced by GC65FILE import
 INCRTEXT Create text incrementing by one text
 INSALT Import GeoNav Salt Harvester log files import
 INT3DSET Create sets with elevations interpolated from known points set
 INTERP3D Update elevations interpolated using INT3DSET point
 INTOSET Insert points into a set set
 INVRPTS Replaced by GEOMRPTS report
 IR_BAY Design flood irrigation bays irrigation
 IR_BENT Enter irrigation bay grid point elevations irrigation
 IR_BGRID Generate a grid of irrigation bay points irrigation
 IR_BTAB Create an irrigation bay design results table irrigation
 IR_CDTAB Report drain or channel grades, widths and flow rates irrigation
 IR_CHFLO Compute parameters for trapezoidal channel flow irrigation
 IR_DTMS Generate a single DTM from multiple irrigation bays irrigation
 IR_HAUL Compute truck haul distance for an irrigation bay design irrigation
 IR_PUTAT Set or edit irrigation bay text attributes irrigation, attribute
 IR_STRUC Generate irrigation bay tables and reports irrigation
 IR_SUMTX Recalculate totals in irrigation bay results table irrigation
 ISLAND Traffic island editor alignment
 ITXT Replaced by INCRTEXT text
 JOB2AGA Convert a Geodimeter job file to a Geodimeter raw data file survey
 JOBOUT Export a Geodimeter job file from points export
 JOIN Join sets with common end points set
 KEAYSIN Import data from Keays import
 KEAYSOUT Export data to Keays TR1 export
 KORKDTM Export DTM layer to Kork format export
 LABELANG Label the angle-right at each point of a set text
 LABELARC Label segment with radius as text along text
 LABEL​CONTOURS Label contour plines with text text
 LABEL​GRID Label a grid within a box text
 LABELHAL Label horizontal alignment intersection points alignment
 LABELINE Label alignments with names in plotboxes alignment
 LABELLOT Change lot area labels to show alternative area set, text
 LABELPI Label Intersection Point Chainage alignment
 LABEL​POINT Label points with point labels and symbols point label
 LABEL​ROAD​HAL Label a registered horizontal alignment alignment
 LABEL​ROAD​VAL Label a registered vertical alignment alignment
 LABELSEG Label sets with bearings and distances text
 LABELSETS Label sets with lot numbers and areas text
 LABELSTA Label chainage using text leader lines text
 LABEL​TABLE Create table of short lines and curve details table
 LABELVAL Label vertical alignment intersection points alignment
 LABGRADE Label grade between two points text
 LABPT Label points with EAT text text
 LABPTQ Label points with number, elevation or name text
 LANDFILL Create a herringbone floor sets
 LAY2NAME Change the name of each object to match its layer layer
 LAYER Select current layer from a list layer
 LAYERMAP Rename layers based on .map file layer
 LAYERNXT Change the current layer to the next layer in alphabetical order layer
 LAYERSET Create, edit and delete layers layer
 LAYINFO List summary information by layer about selected points layer
 LAYLSET Make only selected layerlist visible layer
 LAYOUT Create parallel sets for subdivisions sets
 LAYUSTN Relayer and colour objects for Microstation export layer
 LBLANG Replaced by LABELANG text
 LC Locate coordinate point
 LEVEL3W Add or edit three-​wire level (stadia) points survey
 LEVELLST Report of all the level points report
 LEVELS Add or edit single-wire level information survey
 LFILL Replaced by LANDFILL sets
 LIDARGRD Import LIDAR data in a grid import
 LIDARIN Import LIDAR data import
 LINEINT Evenly space points where X and Y is wrong hdms
 LINETYPE Modify the linetypes of selected sets and plines plot
 LINETYPE​SET Load or purge linetypes plot
 Linetype​Toggle Toggle on or off the linetype selector on the toolbar display
 LINETYPS Plot all loaded linetypes in the sheet view plot
 LINEZERO Modify linetype to By Layer linetype
 LINKSET Configure DTM links dtm
 Link​Toggle Toggle on and off DTM link display dtm
 LIST List information about selected types of objects report
 LISTFONT List and create a table of available fonts text
 LISTGRP List groups used by selected objects group
 LISTLOTS List geometry of lots report
 LISTPIPE List as-constructed pipe data pipe general
 LISTTEXT List text objects report
 LLAYER Report all the layers and the number of objects on each layer layer
 LLGRID Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels pline, hdms
 LLIST Modify the layer list of multiple dynaviews dynaview
 LLISTSET Layer list settings dynaview
 LLOTS Create a chart showing block, lot, area and % area plot
 LLRPT Layer and layer list report layer
 LLTABLE Create a linked coordinate table including latitude and longitude report
 LLTYPE Change the linetype of the current layer layer
 LOADATT Load or reload the specified attribute definition file attribute
 LOBJCOLOR Change the line colour of the current layer layer
 LOBJS List objects and details report
 LOTJOIN Create closed sets around text lot
 LOTPTRLS Label points with existing and finished surface elevations text
 LPI Replaced by LABELPI alignment
 LPLINES List alignment details of a pline report
 LPOINTS List the coordinates of the selected points report
 LPTCOLOR Change the points colour of the current layer layer
 LPTSRAD List coordinates and radiations report
 LSEC1 Label long sections in Geocomp-style plot
 LSEC_UK Label long sections in United Kingdom-​style plot
 LSETS List name and point numbers of sets report
 LSTA Replaced by LABELSTA text
 LUNUSED List the unused point numbers report
 LVC Label points along a vertical curve plot
 LYR Replaced by QUIKLSET layer
 LYRPROP Edit layer properties layer
 Macro​Play Play a macro command
 Macro​Record Record a keystroke macro command
 MACRO​SAVE See MACRORECORD command
 MAG600IN Import Magellan Explorist 600 GPS UPT file import
 MAGELLIN Import Magellan GPS UPT file import
 MAGELOUT Export Magellan GPS Waypoint UPT file export
 MAGNIFY Magnify view scale by a factor view
 MAPIIN Import MapInfo MIF data import
 MAPINFO​IN Replaced by MAPIIN import
 MAPINFO​OUT Replaced by MAPIOUT export
 MAPIOUT Export MapInfo MIF data export
 MAPPOINTS Create sets and plines from point names survey
 MASSDIAG Scale an exploded masshaul diagram masshaul
 MASSHAUL Create a masshaul diagram masshaul
 MASS​IMPORT Masshaul import and export locations masshaul
 MATCH Modify objects by matching properties of another object config
 MATCHOBJ Modify objects by matching properties of another object config
 MATERIALS Material manager road
 MATRIX Create a matrix of copies copy
 MDLIN Import MDL autoscanning laser system *.CDU data import
 MEASUNIT Configure measurement units config
 MENUCFG Configure menu config
 MERGE Merge DTMs dtm
 Message​Scroll Toggle the visibility of the message scroll area. display
 MG1 Label triangle with slope point
 MHIMPORT Add a volume report for masshaul analysis masshaul
 MINMAPIN Import a MineMap file. import
 MIRROR Copy objects to a mirror image pline, set
 MIRRORDY Mirror dynaviews view
 MKBLK Create a 1, 2, or 3 point unit block blocks
 MKBLKINT Convert selected external blocks to internal blocks blocks
 MKV Place a temporary marker at each vertex mark
 MOSSEXPT Replaced by MOSSOUT export
 MOSSIN Import Survey, Design and Triangles from Moss GENIO data import
 MOSSMIN Create a .MIN file from Moss GENIO features import
 MOSSOUT Export Moss GENIO data export
 MOSSTRI Replaced by MOSSIN import
 MOSSX Replaced by MOSSOUT export
 MOVE Move objects to another location move
 MOVEPAD Move a pad DTM and display volumes report
 MSCAPEIN Import Mincom Minescape grid data import
 MULTCODE Insert multiple-code separators into names before field codes survey
 MULTICOPY Create multiple copies of selected objects copy
 Multilayer​DTM Create a DTM from multiple layers dtm
 MULTIPIN Import MultiPlane RTK survey file. import
 MVIEW Create multiple dynaviews view
 MXVALIN Import VAL from MX report import
 NAME Modify the name of selected objects name
 NAME2LAY Change layer to match object name layer
 NAMESETS Rename unnamed sets to match point names set
 NEW Start a new project file
 NEARMJGW Import .JPG image from Nearmap image
 NEXTVIEW Change the current view to the next open view display
 NFS Change name to the chainage from HAL name
 NODE Pipe node properties pipe design
 NPSCHART Draw a table of details of set or pline plot
 NS95 Nikon NS-95 Database Utility survey
 OBJREG Register Object to Sheet for ASAP plot
 OBJSNAP Enable running object snap modes config
 OBSDIFF Report vertical differences between obstructions report
 OFF Turn off selected objects view
 OFFALL Turn off all objects in the current view view
 OFFELEV Create plines or sets offset from a set set
 OFFELEVM Create plines or sets offset from multiple sets set
 OFFPERP Create set vertically offset from selected set set
 OFFSEG Create pline or set at a horizontal offset from a segment set
 OFFSET​DIST Create pline or set at a horizontal offset set
 OFFSET​POINT Create pline or set at a horizontal offset and location set
 OLIST Count the number of objects of each type in each view report
 OLIST2 Count the number of objects of each type in each view to P3Pad report
 ON Turn on selected objects view
 ONALL Turn on all objects in the current view view
 ONGRP Turn on all objects of nominated group plot
 OPEN Open and existing project file
 ORDER​FORM Email a report of the dongle. help
 ORDER​PRINT Print a report of the dongle. help
 P29 Roadline 2D export to Geodimeter export
 P39 Geodimeter Roadline 3D file export
 P3PAD See GCREPORT report
 PAD Create a rectangular set at an elevation set
 PADDOWN Lower all points in a pad by an increment set
 PADSHIFT Set the shift value used by PADDOWN and PADUP set
 PADUP Raise all points in a pad by an increment set
 PALETTE Configure palette and colourmap config
 PAN Move the display to a new location view
 PARABOLA Create a parabola set
 PARKING Create parking bays set
 PCHAINAGE Same as PSTATION alignment
 PCOPY Copy from a reverence project file
 PHASE Phase editor road
 PHASEMAN Phase manager road
 PHASE​NAMES Phase names road
 PHOTOCSV Import photo coordinates import
 PINSET Insert point at intersection of two lines point
 PIPE Pipe properties pipe design
 PIPEAIN Import pipe attributes pipe survey
 PIPEBREK Break pipe segment with Asset_ID pipe survey
 PIPEBYCR Edit pipe and node elevations pipe design
 PIPECHRT Create a pipe chart pipe design
 PIPEDALL Draw all pipes pipe design
 PIPEDEF Edit default pipe and node settings pipe design
 PIPEDELS Delete pipe segment with Asset_ID pipe survey
 PIPEDESN Design pipe branch pipe design
 PIPEDRAW Draw single pipe pipe design
 PIPEDUMP List pipe attributes pipe design
 PIPEINFO Report pipe dimensions and cover pipe general
 PIPELBR List pipe branches pipe design
 PIPELL Pipe and node label settings pipe design
 PIPEMAXV List large velocity pipes pipe design
 PIPEMINV List small velocity pipes pipe design
 PIPEQ Enter the flow rate for a pipe pipe design
 PIPERSLT Display results for pipe or node pipe design
 PIPESCLQ Scale pipe flow rate pipe design
 PIPESOLV Solve the pipe branch design pipe design
 PIPESUM Pipe summary report pipe design
 PIPESWAP Swap pipe Asset_ID attribute with String_No pipe survey
 PIPEV Modify pipe velocity pipe design
 PIPEWSP List pipe water surface profile pipe design
 PIPEWELD Compute the final location of pipe welds from alignment and survey pipe survey
 PIPEXING Draw pipes crossing the alignment pipe design
 PLAN2DBX Export sets to Leica 1200 series DBX database export
 PLANPROF Display the plan and profile views display
 PLANSET Automatic Sheet Assembly and Production (ASAP) Plan Settings plot
 PLANSHEET Display the plan and sheet views display
 PLAY Replaced by PTLAYCOL colour
 PLINE Create a pline pline
 PLNNONAM Isolate plines with no names pline
 PLOT Plot plan to a printer plot
 PLOTBOX Create a pline box using sheet units plot, pline
 PLOTSET Plot parameter settings plot, smooth
 PLOTTER​SET Plotter configuration settings plot
 PLTO3D Set elevations of plines pline
 POINT Create a point point
 POLY Replaced by POLYGON set
 POLYGON Create n-sided polygon set
 PONDDEF Define pond outlet devices hydrology
 PONDLIST List pond data hydrology
 PONDOUT Define pond outlet devices hydrology
 PONDSUM Pond summary report hydrology
 PONDVOL Enter pond volume hydrology
 PORTSC1 List points showing heights as depths hdms
 POWERGDE Export to Leica PowerGrade 3D export
 PPS Display the Plan, Profile and Sheet views display
 PPSX Display the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views display
 PPX Display the Plan, Profile and Xsect views display
 PPXS Display the Plan, Profile Xsect and Super views display
 PREDAREA Divide lots into predetermined areas sets
 PREVIOUS Display the previous view view
 PRJCLNT ASAP Project Data Management - Client plot
 PRJINFO ASAP Project Data Management - General Information plot
 PRJLOC ASAP Project Data Management - Location plot
 PRJLTEXT ASAP Project Data Management - Link text to data plot
 PRJSTAFF ASAP Project Data Management - Staff plot
 PRODUCTS Display the serial number and modules help
 PROFILE Create profile alignment
 PROJDATA ASAP Project Data Management - Data plot
 PROJECTV List and edit all project variables config
 PROJINFO Enter and display user information about a project file config
 PROJVARS Enter and display survey information about a project file config
 PSBOX Edit ASAP PLANSET plot boxes plot
 PSINDEX Place an ASAP PLANSET index of drawings and symbols plot
 PSMAN ASAP PLANSET manager plot
 PSSET Configure ASAP PLANSET plot
 PSSHEET ASAP PLANSET sheet assembly plot
 PSTATION Create points relative to a HAL alignment
 PSTYPE Select ASAP PLANSET sheet type plot
 PTBLKS Create points at the insertion point of 3D blocks point
 PTDRAIN Create a catchment boundary around a point hydrology
 PTJOIN Join points by sequential point number or name sets
 PTLAB Edit point label blocks blocks
 PTLAYCOL Relayer and colour points using name layer
 PTS2NAME Rename points to match their point numbers point
 PTS2PROF Copy points to profile view alignment
 PTS2TEXT Export a coordinate list export
 PTS2TRV Export a .TRV file from the selected points export
 PTSIN Import point data from various ASCII file formats import
 PTSITE Change elevation by elevation difference from a point point
 PTSITE2 Change elevation by slope and distance from a point point
 PTSOUT Output point data to various ASCII formats export
 PXPS Display the Plan, Xsect, Profile and Super views display
 QISOLATE Isolate or unisolate current layer display
 QPROFILE Display profiles between two locations profile
 QSET Create a set by bearing and distance set
 QSGRIDIN Import Qsurv grid file import
 QSGRIDOU Export to Qsurv grid file format export
 QSURVOUT Export to Qsurv format export
 QUIKLSET Quickly control the visibility of layers layer
 QV Quick volumes by changing roadway HAL IP report
 RAILCANT Compute railway cant alignment
 RAILWAY Apply railway cant alignment
 RAIN List rain database hydrology
 RAINT List rainfall report totals hydrology
 RANGE Report elevation range within a boundary or along a set report
 RCLTABLE Create a table of arc properties report
 RD​DESIGN​CRIT Select road design criteria alignment
 RD​DESIGN​SET Road design settings road, config
 RDE Raw data editor survey
 RDGUIDE Road job workflow guide road
 RDSCACALN Import a Caice alignment import
 RDSDTMSET Road DTM settings road
 RDSECHO Report entered roadway data report
 RDSGP​ALIGN Import a Geopak alignment import
 RDSUTL Road design utility road
 RD​VALDES​CRT Select vertical alignment design criteria alignment
 RDVALEDIT Edit a vertical alignment using design criteria alignment
 RDX Create Cross Section plots plot
 RDX_GC Create cross section plots with labels in a table plot
 RDXLINES Create xlines on a roadway road
 REACH Define reach parameters hydrology
 READATTB Add ATTRIB values from a Trimble DC file and add to point names survey
 REARLOTL Make a rear lot line a single segment sets
 RECENTER Pick a new location for the centre of the display view
 REDO Restore the most recent changes made by Undo 49
 REDRAW Refresh the display of the current view view
 REFER Refer selected objects to a parent alignment alignment
 REF​ERENCE Same as REFER alignment
 REFERPTH Change the path of reference files file
 REFILE Reference file manager file
 REGALIGN Register multiple alignments alignment
 REGROUP Change the group of each object to match its layer layer
 RELAYER Relayer selected objects layer
 RELAYER​SETS Relayer selected sets to current layer layer
 RELAYFIG Relayer selected figures if they are closed layer
 Remove​Links Remove DTM links from a project dtm
 REMTRIS Remove triangle segments joining a square grid of points. set
 RENUM Renumber individual points point
 RENUMBER Renumber selected points point
 RENUMLOT Renumber lots by adding an increment set
 RENUMREC Renumber records record
 REPORT​NEW Replaced by GCREPORT report
 REPORTLT Report bearings and distances of set segments report
 REPORTS User defined reports report
 RESECT Solve a 3-point resection problem point
 RESONIN Part of HDMS hdms
 RETTABLE Create a table of arc properties report
 RETURNS Create a kerb return elevation table report
 REVERSE Reverse the direction of selected objects sets
 REVIEW Move objects from one view to another view
 RGRAPH Graph rainfall database hydrology
 RMGC Link points to photos and text config
 ROADDTM Create a DTM layer from Road cross sections road
 ROADGRID Road design editor display grid road
 ROADJOB Road Job Manager road
 ROADMAT Road Job Materials road
 ROADRPT Print a Road report report
 ROAD_RUN Export alignment or roadway to Leica RoadRunner export
 ROADSETS Create a DTM layer from Road cross sections road
 ROAD​SIG​POINT Roadway masshaul significant points masshaul
 ROADSPOT Report roadway details at a location report
 ROTATE Rotate objects about a specified point objects
 ROT3D Rotate points in 3D using 3 point pairs points
 SIDEVIEW Replaced by FLIPUP view
 RPAN Replaced by RECENTER view
 RTSCALE Rotate, translate and scale points
 RUN Execute an external file config
 RUNLINE Part of HDMS hdms
 SAVE Save the current project save
 SAVEAS Save the current project with another name save
 SCALE Multiply easting and northing by a scale factor points
 SCALEELV Multiply elevations by a scale factor points
 SCALEGRID Mass haul diagram grid settings masshaul
 SCLBLKS Scale blocks by a factor block
 SCLPLOTB Scale closed plines by a factor dynaview
 SCS900IN Import Trimble SCS900 txt file import
 SCURVE Create or edit a set curve set
 SEARCH Search settings config
 SEGEDIT Segment editor set
 SELECTGP Select by group number group
 SET Create a set set
 SET2PROF Create a profile from a set set
 SET2PRFL Create profiles representing a pipe pile general
 SET2ROAD Create road jobs from sets alignment
 SET2TRV Export a TRV file from the selected set set
 SETAREA Draw a set enclosing two sets. set
 SETCH Same as SETSTA alignment
 SETCURL Set the current layer by picking an object layer
 SETFILT Filter excess points from straights in a 2D set set
 SETGRP Set the group to the next group group
 SETLABEL Label sets with name text
 SETNONAM Display sets with no name set
 SETSMOOTH Change the smoothness and dead regions dtm
 SETSTA Set the beginning chainage to any point on an alignment road
 SEW_BC Compute sewer block controls sewer
 SFLOOR Create a DTM surface in between two DTMs dtm
 SGRP Set the group for selected objects group
 SHADEDTM Shade DTM by elevation ranges dtm
 SHADEISO Shade two DTMs by isopach ranges dtm
 SHADESLP Shade DTMs by slope ranges dtm
 SHADETRI Replaced by SHADESLP dtm
 SHAPE Shape Editor road
 SHAPECLASS Shape class manager road
 SHAPEMAN Shape library manager road
 SHAPESET Create sets from roadway shapes road
 SHOWDIR Show direction of selected object report
 SHOWDIRN Show direction with option to reverse report
 SIDESLOPE Project side slopes from alignment dtm
 SIDEVIEW Replaced by FLIPUP view
 SIGHTDST Compute vehicular sight lines alignment
 SKIP Skip manager alignment
 SLICE Interpolate batter points from HAL, VAL and side slope points
 SLL Splined leader lines plines
 SLOPE Identify DTM triangles within a slope range dtm
 SLOPE​MANAGER Register slope alignments road
 SMANAGER Subgrade manager road
 SMANAGER Subgrade manager road
 SMPROAD Create simple one-template roads or channels road
 SMPTMPL Create simple road or channel template road
 SNAPLYR Toggle the snapability of a layer toggle
 SNAPSET Configure the cursor snap interval and direction config
 SNR Search and replace text, name
 SOILNAIL set set
 SPLAY Cuts splay corners into lots sets
 SPLINE Spline plines pline
 SPLITSET Split lots into smaller lots sets
 SPOT Display DTM elevation of a location dtm
 STAKE Report angles, distances and coordinates for setout. report
 STAKED Compare staked (as-built) points to design report
 STAKING Configure the contents of a roadway staking report config
 STARNET Import a STAR*NET .TER file. config
 STATION Set the beginning station of a HAL alignment
 STATUSBAR Status bar toggle. Display
 STEXT Create single line text text
 STREAM Create plines or sets from a stream of locations pline, set
 STYLESET Text style settings text
 SUBGRADE Subgrade editor road
 SUNSTAR Create an azimuth based on star or sun shots survey
 SUPERELV super­elevation editor alignment
 SUPERPLOT super­elevation diagram alignment
 SUPERVIS Display your GPS location survey
 SURFACE Surface manager road
 SURFAREA Create a report of the cut/fill surface area using average end area report
 SURPEXPT Export a Surpac string file export
 SURPIMPT Import a Surpac string file import
 SURVCEXP Export roadway to Carlson SurvCE CL, PRO and SCT files export
 SURVCONT Export Moss GENIO to Trimble Survey Controller export
 SVIEW Open or change the state of a view view
 SW1 Identify points on steep triangle edges dtm
 SYSTEM Configure Terramodel system variables config
 TABLET Configure a digitizer tablet config
 TAKEOFF Replaced by INT3DSET sets
 TANCIRCLE Create a set tangent to two circles set
 TC* Drill hole and blast pattern layout application
 TDIR Set the bearing of selected text text
 TDS Tripod Data Systems Survey Link DC survey
 TEMPLATE Template editor road
 TEXT Create text objects text
 TEXT2PNT Create points at multiple insertion points of text or blocks point, text
 TEXT2PT Create a point at the insertion point of text point, text
 TEXT​ALIGN Align text objects in X or Y text
 TEXT​ALONG Create a text object along a selected line. text
 TEXTARRO Draw an arrow with text inside text
 TEXTCASE Change the case of selected text text
 TEXTFIT Adjust the aspect ratio of text text
 TEXT​METRICS Change the font, rotation, orientation, height, justification, slant and aspect ratio of text text
 TEXTRND Round selected bearings and distances for cadastral plans text
 TEXT​ROTATE Changes the rotation angle of text text
 TEXTSCALE Changes the scale of selected text text
 TEXTSWAP Swap the text of two records text
 THREEPC Two point arc from Three points set
 TILE​CENTRED Tile views centred by chainage display
 TILE​HORIZ Tile views horizontally display
 TILE​VERT Tile views vertically display
 TLYR Replaced by VISLYR layer
 TMANAGER Template manager road
 TMGIS Link Terramodel with a Microsoft Access database report, import
 TMLINK Replaced by EXPORT and IMPORT survey
 TMLLIST Display the latest TML list on the web report
 TMLLISTL Display a local TML list on your computer report
 TMRUN See RUN alias
 TMXIN Import Terramodel data import
 TMXOUT Export Terramodel data export
 TOGLINKS Toggle DTM links display DTM
 TOGQUICK Toggle quick contours display DTM
 TOGSLOPE Toggle triangle slope display DTM
 TOOLBOX Create or edit toolboxes config
 TOWER Replaced by DTMCONE set
 TP01 Pipeline project variables pipe optimisation
 TP02 Create HAL and VAL sets from HAL and VAL plines pipe optimisation
 TP03 Create 3D pipes using HAL and VAL sets pipe optimisation
 TP10 Generate 3D reports on pipes pipe optimisation
 TP40 Place airvalve and scour blocks pipe optimisation
 TP41 Create obstructions in profile view pipe optimisation
 TP99 Display and edit pipe node design information pipe optimisation
 TP99 Recentre plan and profile view by chainage pipe optimisation
 TPLSEC Create plong section plot for pipeline pipe optimisation
 TPSETOUT Export to TPSetout export
 TPSTKOUT Export to TPStakeout export
 TRACE Same as TRACEBDY set
 TRACEBDY Create a set bounded by selected lines set
 TRACKPLOT Part of HDMS hdms
 TRANXSEC Interpolate tunnel profile .PDT from cross sections tunnel
 TRAV2D Traverse and radiation entry set
 TRAVERSE 3D Traverse and radiation entry set
 TRIM Trim a line or arc pline, set
 TRISOL Triangle solutions report
 TRMBGRID Export a Trimble gridded DTM (.DTX) file. dtm
 TRMBROAD Export a roadway to Trimble .tta or .ttx export
 TRMBTIN Replaced by EXPORT Trimble DTM (TTM) export
 TRMBUTIL Part of TRMBGRID dtm
 TRUEDIST Report a segment length with an applied scale factor report
 TSP Terramodel Search Path Browser setup
 TTMIN Replaced by IMPORT Trimble DTM (TTM) import
 TTXOUT Replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading DC export
 TUNNEL​DTM Unwrap a tunnel dtm
 TVLITE 3D Visualiser dtm
 TWOPL Curve from two points and a line set
 TXTFIT Replaced by TEXTFIT text
 TXTIN Import text from a file text
 TXTOUT Export text to a file text
 TXTREFEL Match elevation of text to point text
 TXTSW Replaced by TEXTSWAP text
 UNDER Create a profile of a pipe conduit under a road profile
 UNDO Undo changes edit
 UNHIDE Make visible all segments of selected sets set
 UNITBLK Place a block graphically using 1, 2 or 3 points block
 UNITSSET Configure dimension mode, precision and labelling config
 USTN2MOS Modify objects from Microstation to look like objects from GENIO. import
 UPGRADE Enter an upgrade code to enable new Terramodel modules help
 UPTAKE Replaced by INTERP3D point
 USER See REPORTS report
 VALDATA Enter a vertical alignment by a curve table alignment
 VALEDIT Shift intersection points in a vertical alignment road
 VAL​MANAGER Register vertical alignments alignment
 VARIOFF Insert points of constantly varying offset from a selected alignment road
 VCLOSE Close the active view view
 VERT​ALIGN Register one vertical alignment road
 VICRDSEC Create cross sections from cross section plots road
 VIEW​ROTATE Rotate the display of the plan view view
 VIEWSCAL Specify the plan view scale view
 VCLOSE Configure the view settings view
 VISLYR Toggle the visibility of a layer toggle
 VMAX Maximize the active view view
 VMIN Minimize the active view view
 VNEW Open a new view view
 VOLUME Renamed and aliased to EARTHWORK report
 VPAN Pan by numeric keypad with 1 = North plot
 VRECALL Recall a saved view view
 VRESTORE Restore a view view
 VRMLIN Import Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) data import
 VRMLOUT Export Virtual Reality Markup Language (VRML) data export
 VSAVE Save a view view
 WALK Create a pline given a DTM, a slope and a starting location road
 WESCOMIN Import data from Wescom import
 WORDPAD Open the Wordpad Editor exec
 XLINES Create Xlines along plines road
 XLIN_PTS Create Xlines of points near HAL road
 XSECTION Export cross section from DTM DTM
 XSECTION​DIGI Digitize cross sections road
 XSECTION​EDT Edit cross sections road
 XSECTION​MAN Manage cross sections road
 XSECTRPT Report 3D length of cross sections report
 XSHEET Create cross section plots in sheet view plot
 XSHEETGC Create cross section plots in Geocomp-style plot
 XSLABEL Add obstructions to cross section plots plot
 XSOUT Export cross sections from points export
 XSURAREA Report volume of road job surface areas to a spreadsheet report
 XTIE Compute a line at the intersection of slopes from two segments sets
 XTOCL Create walls for use in Terramodel Visualizer visualizer
 XVOLUMES Report volume of all road job materials to a spreadsheet report
 ZI Zoom in 2x view
 ZO Zoom out 2x view
 ZOOM Zoom in by window view
 ZOOMSCAL Zoom active view to a scale view

Detailed Description

The table below describes the operation and scope of each command summarised in the summary table above.

These details refer to Terramodel 10.61J with British English language and Geocomp Update, so the terminology and operation may vary from your release. Click on the command name to return to the summary table.

At the end of each description, a short table shows the following information where available:

Command, TML, alias or executable dateGuideMenuSourceGC
The approximate date of the last released version, in dd/mm/yy format A guide, manual with a page number or a help file (More info...), with a link, if Terramodel has been installed Where to find the command in the geocomp.m or geocomp+.m menus installed with the Geocomp Update Where to obtain the command (More info... The most similar command in GEOCOMP 10.2

 

NAME DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EACH COMMAND AND TML
 3D

Create a set offset from a selected alignment.

Create a set in the current layer connecting points at offsets from an alignment.

The default horizontal and vertical offsets may be set to non-zero values.

If a VAL is also selected from the Profile View, points are created with elevations interpolated from the VAL, adjusted by the vertical offset, otherwise the points are 2D.

The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. The default VAL is a profile with the same name as the HAL, or a profile which refers to the HAL, if possible.

See also GC28, GC99 and SIDESLOPE.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
20/06/13 RG 569 Cogo\​Streets\​3D S 77
 3DFILTER

Filter superfluous points from a DTM.

This is useful for filtering point clouds generated by laser scanners, hydrographic surveys and other large DTMs where much of the data is not significant.

Filter points on spikes, on similar grade and where removal would make insignificant changes to the volume. The filtered points be made moved to layer 0 or made non-​contourable, and the point colour is also modified.

Max Triangle Grade
Filter out spikes and troughs. If all triangles about a point exceed the enter value and all are either sloping away (peak) or sloping toward (trough) then the point is removed.
Max Common Side Grade Diff
Filter out points where the triangles about the point have a Common Side grade range within the value entered. Look at all the triangles about a point and check to see if or grades are within the entered range. If so the point is removed. This filters large triangles of similar grades.
Max Volume Diff
Filter points that make a difference to the volume less than the value entered. The volume down to a datum is worked out using just the triangles about a point. The volume is then worked out with the point tested removed. If the volume difference is less than the stated value the point is removed. Filters small triangles with little change to the volume, even with large slope variations.
Max Effective Area
Filter points where the total area of all the triangles around the point is less than the value stated. This leaves large triangles unchanged.
Max Number of iterations
Reform the DTM and filter again until the maximum number of iterations. If zero, continue until less than 10% is removed in the last iteration.
Colour of Removed Points
Set the colour of the filtered points. Points can be then deleted by colour.
Move Filtered Points to layer zero.
Filtered points are either moved to layer 0 or made non-​contourable.
Keep Points on Breaklines.
Protect points that lie on a breakline.
Keep Points on DTM Edge.
Protect remove points on the DTM Edge.
Keep Points > 3 Standard Deviations.
Protect points that are outside 3 standard deviations from the newly formed DTM surface.
Generate Report.
Report to P3Pad.

See also FILTER to filter plines, BLFILTER to filter along sets, GC31 to remove duplicate points and GC53 which changes and identifies non-​contourable points. GCGEOCODE is a separate application, which can quickly filter points not close to an average surface model.

TML date  Source 
21/01/14     POA  
 3DMCOUT

Create MCA file for Topcon 3D-MC Machine Control.

Compute cross sections where xlines intersect selected 3D sets, then export hal, val and sections to a single MCA file and report to P3Pad.

MCA files are the input files for the Topcon 3D-MC machine control system. Newer Topcon 3D machine control systems usually use DWG instead. Check with your Topcon dealer.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 3DPIPE

Report 3D lengths and angles of a set.

Report the record number and name of a set, then the following values for each point: Back Point Number, Intersection Point Number, Forward Point Number, True 3D Angle, 3D Chainage of Intersection Point, Horizontal Deflection Angle, Vertical Deflection Angle, Bearing In, Bearing Out, 3D Distance In, 3D Distance Out, Zenith Angle In, Zenith Angle Out, Slope In and Slope Out.

This information is especially useful for designing and laying out long pipe networks.

The report can also be written as a CSV file.

See also PIPEINFO and TP10.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Pipe lengths Geocomp Update or $200  
 ABBREVSET

Set prefix abbreviations for labelling and display.

Abbreviations are used in display, reports, and labelling. They apply to both attribute text and text objects created while labeling. Once you have made changes to the abbreviations, attribute text will be updated when the display is redrawn, but text objects created by labeling must be re-labeled to be updated.

Curve
Abbreviations for circular curves. Each label can have a maximum of eight characters. You can use any ASCII character in a prefix label by entering "\" and the number of the character. For example, enter \131 for the delta symbol in TMODELF.FNT.
Spiral
Abbreviations for spiral curves. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
Vertical
Abbreviations for vertical curves. Each curve prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters.
Table
Line and curve table headings for LABELTABLE. Each label can have a maximum of 16 characters.
Point
Abbreviations for point names. Each prefix label can have a maximum of eight characters. These abbreviations are only used by commands that create points along an alignment at positions where IP or curve information are listed.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Abbreviations S  
 ABOUT

Report Terramodel version number and modules.

Report Terramodel version number, Terramodel Toolpak version, copyright details, and list Modules.

If there is no Products button, the Terramodel key cannot be found and Field data is the only module. If you were expecting other modules, including CAD, see www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​dongle.html.

Click on the Modules button to see the list of modules:

Family
List modules for families of Trimble products other than Terramodel
Serial Number
The serial number is also the licence number written on the key. The - extension indicates the number of times the key has been updated with different modules.
Lock version
The lock version enables certain versions of Terramodel.
Days of trial
The number of days remaining on any trial period
Order form
Report the modules and purchase code details to printer or email
Upgrade
Enter Upgrade codes when requested by a Trimble dealer.

See also GCHELP.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Help\About S  
 ACADCONV

Convert DWG and DXF files to R2000 DWG files.

Use Teigha File Converter to convert every DWG and DXF file in a specified folder to DWG files in R2000 format.

Teigha File Converter (TFC) is a conversion utility published by the Open Design Alliance which can convert almost all DWG or DXF files and export them as DWG or DXF files of any version from R9 to R2013. You can download TFC for free.

If you get an error message when you try to import a DWG or DXF file into Terramodel using the usual AutoCAD DWG import script, this could mean that you do not have Terramodel 10.61J installed (Terramodel 10.61J can IMPORT DWG and DXF files in formats up and including R2013). It could also mean that you have DWG file that is not supported by the import script.

ACADCONV command provides a simple interface in Terramodel so you can easily convert all DWG or DXF files in a specified folder to R2000 DWG files in another specified folder. R2000 format is usually the best format for importing into Terramodel.

To prepare

  1. Download the latest Windows version of the Teigha File Converter
  2. Install onto a computer with Terramodel
  3. Create a dedicated Input data folder
  4. Create a dedicated Output data folder
  5. Start Terramodel
  6. Run ACADCONV Settings to specify the paths of TFC and data. For example:
    • C:\Program Files\​ODA\​Teigha File Converter 3.8.1\​TeighaFileConverter.exe
    • X:\TMData\Project1\In
    • X:\TMData\Project1\Out

To convert

  1. Place only the DWG or DXF files that you want to convert into the Input folder.
  2. Click Convert
  3. Import each DWG file from the Output folder into Terramodel using the AutoCAD (dwg _i) import script or view with some other application such TeighaViewer .
TML dateGuide Source 
20/06/13 built-in   Geocomp Update or $100  
 ACTIVE

Set, clear or list the current active alignment.

Active alignment
Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Set
Make the set or pline the active alignment
Clear
Clear the active alignment

Active alignments are used for four main purposes:

  • Select alignments quickly
  • Reference objects to the alignment so that they can derive their chainage properties from the alignment
  • Reference objects to the alignment so that during labeling the referenced objects can be replaced automatically
  • Control the display visibility of referenced objects

See also GCACTIVE which selects the active alignment from alignments registered in HALMANAGER.

See also REFER which refers objects to an alignment.

PROFILE refers the profile it creates to the selected alignment. Objects in the profile are invisible if they refer to alignments other than the active alignment. If the selected alignment refers to another alignment, PROFILE will use the chainages of that other alignment.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09UG 125 Settings\​Active alignment S 415
 ACTIVE​CHAINAGE

Set active chainage (station).

Set, clear or list the current active alignment and chainage.

ACTIVE​CHAINAGE is an alias to ACTIVE​STATION.

When cross sections are drawn in the cross section view mode using RDX, RDX_GC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC, this command controls which chainage will be displayed. When these commands create the cross sections each object is referenced to the alignment and given the chainage of the cross section as the elevation of the object. Only those objects that are referenced to the active alignment and chainage will be shown. If there is no active alignment or chainage then all cross sections will be displayed, generally on top of each other.

When any command creates objects in the cross section view the current active alignment and active chainage are used to make these objects a part of the cross section. If there is no active chainage or active alignment then any objects created will be displayed in any cross section.

These simple rules enable all cross sections to be created in the same coordinate system (on top of each other) and then viewed one cross section at a time. This allows you to use coordinates of offset and elevation to draw, edit, inverse and so on.

Options

Align
Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Chainage
Select the chainage along the alignment to be the current active chainage
Next
Make the next xline with a larger chainage, along the current active alignment, the current active chainage
Previous
Make the previous xline with a smaller chainage, along the current active alignment, the current active chainage
Set
Make the selected set or pline the active alignment, make the specified chainage the active chainage and exit the command
Clear
Clear the active alignment and active chainage

If the US English language version is installed, Terramodel dialogs and menus refer to Station. If British English, the dialogs refer to Chainage. The Terramodel Help refers to Station. This TML List refers to Chainage.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Active chainage or Settings\​Active station S 410
 ACTIVE​STATION

Set the active station.

Set, clear or list the current active alignment and station.

ACTIVE​CHAINAGE is an alias to ACTIVE​STATION.

When cross sections are drawn in the cross section view mode using RDX, RDX_GC, XSHEET or XSHEETGC, this command controls which station will be displayed. When these commands create the cross sections each object is referenced to the alignment and given the station of the cross section as the elevation of the object. Only those objects that are referenced to the active alignment and station will be shown. If there is no active alignment or station then all cross sections will be displayed, generally on top of each other.

When any command creates objects in the cross section view the current active alignment and active station are used to make these objects a part of the cross section. If there is no active station or active alignment then any objects created will be displayed in any cross section.

These simple rules enable all cross sections to be created in the same coordinate system (on top of each other) and then viewed one cross section at a time. This allows you to use coordinates of offset and elevation to draw, edit, measure and so on.

Options

Alignment
Select the set or pline to be the active alignment
Station
Select the station along the alignment to be the current active station
Next
Make the next xline with a larger station, along the current active alignment, the current active station
Previous
Make the previous xline with a smaller station, along the current active alignment, the current active station
Set
Make the selected set or pline the active alignment, make the specified station the active station exit the command
Clear
Clear the active alignment and active station

If the US English language version is installed, Terramodel dialogs and menus refer to Station. If British English, the dialogs refer to Chainage. The Terramodel Help refers to Station. This TML List refers to Chainage.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Active chainage or Settings\​Active station S 410
 ADD2NAME

Add prefix or suffix to names of selected points, sets or plines.

Change the names of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 ADD2PTNO

Add prefix or suffix to selected point numbers.

Change the point numbers of selected points to add a common prefix or suffix.

If you are adding alpha characters, or any modified point number will exceed the "Max integer pn" in POINTSET, ensure that SYSTEM has sufficient "Max Alpha pts".

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     U  
 ADD2TXT

Add prefix or suffix to selected text.

A common use is to add parentheses around text.

Extended text objects with more than 255 characters are not supported.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Modify\​Text\​Prefix or suffix Geocomp Update or $100  
 ADDIMAGE

Add an image located by multiple plotboxes.

Add one image to multiple plot boxes.

The same image is added to image manager at the lower left and upper right extents of each selected plotbox.

These plotboxes may be evenly spaced using MATRIX.

If all the plotboxes are the same size and refer to a mastersheet, use ASAPIMAG.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 ADDISO

Add the depth indicated by an isopach layer to the points contained within a DTM layer.

Determine the depth of the isopach at the location of each point on a DTM surface, and then add that depth to the elevation of selected points.

If the DTM point is beyond the limits of the isopach layer's DTM edge, the point's elevation is unchanged.

See also GC54 and GC87.

TML date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   DTM\Add isopach thickness S 240
 ADDTIDES

Add tide corrections to depth records.

Apply or reapply tide corrections from a tide file to selected depth records within a time period.

The tide file must in the format dd/mm/yyyy,hh:mm:ss,t.ttt where t.ttt is the tide value in metres and correctly sorted by increasing date and time.

Depth records are points with negative elevations when deeper than tide datum or positive when drying heights (above water). The point name must have been formatted by HDMS.

Restore any HDMSRTR-rounded depths prior to running ADDTIDES. Relabel depths after running ADDTIDES.

TML dateGuide Source 
20/06/13 built-in help   POA  
 ADJAREA

Adjust a lot to match a specified area.

See also PREDAREA.

In Terramodel 10 help, this TML is also called Adjust​Area.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 Adjarea.pdf Cogo\​Lots\​Adjust area S  
 AIRVALVE

Label a pipe with airvalve blocks.

Place blocks on a HAL and VAL to show the location of airvalves.

The blocks must be named AirValvePlan and AirValveProfile.

The blocks are placed at high points, such as airvalves, and low points, such as scour valves.

See also TP40.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 ALIAS

Create and edit command aliases.

Use command aliases to call commands by command line, menu, toolbar or toolbox button, workspace using names and arguments of your choice.

ALIAS command edits the current aliases. Changes take effect when you click OK or, if you use a text editor, when Terramodel is restarted.

ALIAS enables you to substitute for commands which need command line arguments or are unfamiliar, renamed, misspelled or replaced. You can make your own for a local language, dialect, idiom or standard. For example:

User action Result Example of
Type UNITSET Execute UNITSSET Common misspelling
Type FAVOURITE Execute FAVORITES Alternative spelling
Type FAVORITOS Execute FAVORITES Spanish language
Type COUNT Count objects with OLIST Rename obscure command
Type VOLUME Execute EARTHWORK Keep Terramodel 9.8 command
Execute THREEPC command Execute GC3PTARC command Substitute alternative command
Click on  profile view toolbar button in Views toolbox Open Profile view using SVIEW Command line argument and toolbox
Click on  vpan toolbox left arrow button in VPAN toolbox Pan left by one screen Command line argument and toolbox
Type Z or W ZOOM using a window Like AutoCAD
Type MOOZ MAGNIFY the view scale by 0.5 to zoom out Like SDRMap
Type DXFOUT or DWGOUT Execute the AutoCAD (dwg or dxf) EXPORT script Like AutoCAD
Type 17 Measure 3D vector using GC29 Like Geocomp
Type DCEDIT Launch the Trimble DC File Editor Launch an external application
Type CASCADE Cascade views by "MACROPLAY Cascade" Execute a macro

Aliases should be defined in an ALIAS.INI file in the Terramodel Search Path (TSP). The alias.ini installed by the Geocomp Update (C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp\​ALIAS.INI) has over 2000 aliases including French and Spanish commands.

If Terramodel is not finding your aliases, check the search path. If the correct ALIAS.INI is shown in TSP, then check whether there is a list of aliases in TMODWIN.INI. If so, these take precedence, so remove them and restart Terramodel.

Use EXEC in an alias to execute an external command. The maximum argument is 66 characters. If you need to exceed this, see RUN.

You can't alias to an alias, but you can copy the command and arguments using ALIAS command.

To add comments to alias.ini, start the line with a semi-colon ";" so it is hidden in the Alias Editor.

See also TMLLIST and GCSPELL.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\​System Configuration\​Command alias S  
 ALIGNIMP

Import alignments from an ASCII text file.

Import HAL, VAL or SLOPE alignments with horizontal curve radii or vertical curve lengths from a comma-​delimited file.

Browse or enter the filename.

The Settings control the Name, Colour, and Linetype for the alignment created.

The check box "Adjust for HAL Equations", allows you to select the registered HAL from which to extract chainage equations.

The current view determines how the file is interpreted. Where there is no curve, omit the value in [ ].

Plan (Y before X in View Settings OFF)
East,North,[,Radius]
Plan (with Y before X in View Settings ON)
North,East[,Radius]
Profile
Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]
XSect
Offset, Elevation[,Radius]
Super
Chainage, Elevation[,Vertical Curve Length]

See also GC65FILE.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     U  
 ALIGNOFF

Import alignments offsets from a text file.

Import chainages and offsets for a horizontal or vertical alignment.

These are added to the Alignment Offsets in the HAL or VAL Manager.

  • Browse to select the comma-​delimited file.
  • The format is assumed to be: Chainage, Offset.
  • Pick the Pline or Set that you want to use for the registered HAL.
  • Enter a name for the HAL to be registered. The default is the filename.

This will overwrite any already-registered HAL with the same name.

See also GC65FILE.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     U  
 ALIGNTXT

Make text perpendicular to alignment.

Rotate selected text to be perpendicular to alignment.

See also TEXTALIGN.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Modify\​Text\​Align to HAL Geocomp Update or $25  
 ALL

view all toolbar button

Function key F12

Display all visible objects in the active view.

Refresh the current view at a scale such that all visible all objects, except objects in blocks, are within the window.

Use ALL to see the effect of changes to vertical exaggeration in VIEWSET.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Toolbar and View\All S 131
 ALT

Function key F10

Enable menus for entry by keyboard.

Enable the menu for key entry so you can then select a menu by pressing the underlined character then select an item from the menu, without using the Mouse.

ALT is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ALT which simulates the standard Windows functions of pressing ALT key or F10 function key.

Macro date  Source 
15/11/12     S and User-​definable  
 ANG

Report angle-right between points.

Reports the horizontal angle at an instrument point subtended to the right from the backsight point to the foresight point.

Also reports the distance from the instrument point to the foresight point.

Uses the current Angle Units setting.

If all three of the coordinate locations are point objects, the point numbers will be displayed.

See also IDANGLE, GCANG, GCLABIP and LABELANG.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     U  
 ARC

Draw a pline arc from any three parameters.

Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Center, End" or "3 Point".

ARC defaults to the last Type used.

If you need Sets, use CONVERT or GCCONVRT command to change the Plines to Sets, or use GCARC.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point.

If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.

The Terramodel Help, this is called ARCS.

See also ARC2P and ARC2PSET.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Pline\Arc S 21
  ARC2P

Create an arc pline by two locations and a radius.

The arc is drawn anti-clockwise to the left of the locations.

Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also ARC, ARC2PSET and GCARC.

See also ARC2P and ARC2PSET.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Arc\Pline by 2 points Geocomp Update or $25 21
 ARC2PSET

Create an arc set by two points and the radius.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the second point.

Use a negative radius to draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also ARC, ARC2P and GCARC.

See also ARC2P and ARC2PSET.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Arc\Set by 2 points Geocomp Update or $25 21
  ARCBL

Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.

Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord.

The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.

The new sets are named "SETARCBL", and given the current line colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.

See also GCARCBL to make the chords invisible and BLFILTER to filters out excess breakline points.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
20/06/13 RG 1217 DTM\Arc breaklines S  
 ARC​BREAK

Replace arc segments in sets with points and arcs or chords.

Replace all arcs in selected sets with additional segments by number of points, chords or an arc-to-chord tolerance.

Points
Create the specified number of additional points per arc and replace the arc segments with new arcs.
Chords
Create the specified number of additional points per arc and replace the arc segments with chords.
Arc to chord
Create additional points and replace the arc segments with chords at the specified maximum distance from the arc to the chord.

The smoothness of the set is not changed so closed breaklines with dead smoothness still define dead areas for contours.

The maximum arc-to-chord is reported to indicate whether sufficient points were created.

See also GCARCBL which creates additional chords.

TML date MenuSourceGeocomp
20/06/13   Draw\Arc\Break into chords Geocomp Update or $25 39
 ARCENTRE

Toggle visibility of set arc centres.

 

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Modify\​On/Off\​Arc centres Geocomp Update or $25  
 AREA

Report the area inside plines or sets.

Report the area and perimeter if closed and length if open.

Line
Report to message scroll the area of a single figure and the accumulated area after subsequent selections.
Multiple
Report to P3pad for each selected figure including the sum.
Digitiser
Report area inside selected locations, without creating having to create a new object.

The unit labelling is configured by UNITSSET.

The message "Unable to get record's area" usually means that the figure crosses itself somewhere. If you cannot find where the set or pline crosses itself, you can get the area using GC10 and User Defined REPORTS such as Closure Report and Geometry Report. With GC10 and REPORTS the area inside the enclosed part is subtracted from the larger part, not added, and figures with spirals are not valid.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Reports\​Area/Perimeter S 63
 ARRANGE

Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.

Arrange icons of minimised views at the bottom left of the display.

Arrange is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY ARRANGEICONS which simulates the Arrange icons command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
01/09/11   Window\Arrange icons S and User-​definable  
 ASAPIMAG

Add mastersheet images to plotboxes.

Add to each plotbox the same images that are in the mastersheet.

After you have used PLANSET to create plotboxes, place each logo image once in the mastersheet using IMAGE Manager then use ASAPIMAG to copy the logos in IMAGE Manager so they appear on each sheet.

The plotboxes don't have to have been created by PLANSET, they just need to all be the same size and shape and all refer to the same plotbox (which PLANSET calls a "mastersheet").

See also ADDIMAGE.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 ASHIN

Import an Ashtech points file

Import an Ashtech formatted points file (.PTS).

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     S  
 ASM01

Renumber points in chainage/​station order.

Renumber selected points to increase in the direction of a selected alignment.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 AUSGEOID

Import an AusGeoid DAT or TXT file

Import N-values as decimal latitude and longitude into the current layer.

Use GCCOORD to convert to Easting Northing coordinates.

Use GC54 to subtract the N-value from ellipse height points.

For more information, go to Geoscience Australia.

For AusGeoid in Coordinate System manager, see CSMAN.

TML date  Source 
25/05/12     Geocomp Update or $100  
 AUTO​DRAFT

Create line, block and text features based on field codes.

Create pline, sets, blocks and text to names of selected points according to field codes defined in an AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file.

AutoDraft is a powerful tool for processing surveys where standard survey coding procedures have been followed and the ADC has been defined to match using the AutoDraft Configuration File Editor.

Browse to select a predefined ADC file such as Geocomp Field Codes Revised.ADC, USStandard.ADC or UKStandard.ADC, or Edit to modify or create your own.

AutoDraft can accomodate many survey conventions. Survey your points so that the point name is coded to start with a field code (also known as a feature code) which can be followed immediately by a string code then comments, global codes or parameters separated by spaces.

Global Settings
Specify a multiple field code separator, the processing order, where to expect the string number (e.g. to the right) and the layer for radius points.
Global code
Specify codes which can apply to any feature, for example CLOSE to close a string or POC for the mid point of an arc.
Unknown codes
Optionally, define specific characters to indicate lines and arcs.
Feature Category
Define Categories such as Vegetation or Electricity
Feature
Within each category, define features as Points or Lines
Field Code
For each Feature, define one or more Field codes, e.g. TOP or 102 for Top of Bank
Point Display
For each feature, specify the new point layer and colour
Line definition
Specify the name, layer, colour, linetype, type, smoothness, direction and offsets of any new lines.
Block association
Specify the block name, layer, colour, scaling parameter numbers, rotation and number of points of any new blocks
Text label
Specify the text, EAT codes, layer, style, colour, leader line, border and offsets of any new text
Unknown features
If any point names don't match a field code, you can add them to the ADC. If you do, identify the discrepancy, undo the AutoDrafting, correct the survey or the ADC, delete the unknown features from the ADC and then rerun AutoDraft on the survey until you are no longer prompted.
Reports
The Editor can report the various codes in the ADC.

All new objects are given the same new group number which is one more than the previous largest group number.

See also BLKPTS, GC16ADC, GCIMPORT, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, MAPPOINTS, MULTCODE, PTJOIN, PTLAYCOL, RELAYER and SURPIMPT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 FDM UG Draft\​Automated drafting from points S 125
 AUTOSAVE

Enable automatic saving of project files.

AutoSave attempts to back up the current project file at a user-​specified time interval so it may help you recover from unexpected power failures or computer crashes. It does not help you recover from closing without saving, overwriting backups, and so on. The project file is autosaved with a randomly generated name in a randomly generation subfolder of the folder you specify in the AutoSave Configuration dialog box.

To use AutoSave

  1. Click FILE, Config System, and AutoSave [AutoSave].
  2. To turn AutoSave on or off, click the AutoSave On check box.
  3. To set the time interval for each autosave, type the time (in minutes) between autosaves into the Check Every box.
  4. To change the directory for autosave files:
    1. Turn off AutoSave (see step 2), and click Browse. The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
    2. Find and click on the folder for the autosave files.
    3. Click OK. The new folder name appears in the Directory for AutoSave Files area.
    4. Turn on AutoSave if desired.
  5. Click OK.

Recommendations:

  • Do not rely on AutoSave
  • Look for files in the project folder with extensions .~pr or .pr~. These are recent backups.
  • Check to see if you have enough disk space.
  • Check to see a directory used by Terramodel was deleted.
  • Make sure your network server is working properly if your computer is on a network.
  • If your AutoSave path is on a network, you may be opening someone else's file.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\​System Configuration\​AutoSave S  
 AUTOSET

Create a clockwise set joining points.

See also QSET, GCTRACE, TRACEBDY and LOTJOIN.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Set\​Autoset S  
 AVGEND

Compute volumes by end-area given an alignment, Xlines and two dtm layers

Use this command to compute volumes if you do not have the Site Design or Roadway modules.

Create XLINES along an alignment first. Smaller intervals give more accurate volumes.

Options

ALIGN
Enter the alignment (pline or set object) along which Terramodel will compute volumes. Select the same alignment you used to create the xlines.
OUTSIDE
Select the first DTM layer from which you will calculate volumes. This layer should completely encompass the second, or inside, layer and must contain 3D points.
INSIDE
Use this layer control to select the second DTM layer. Make sure that, within the limits of the xlines, the points on this layer lie within the extents of the outside layer and have elevations.
CALC
Specify the chainage limits of the volumes and whether to send the report to the screen or to an external file.

See also VOLUME to compute cut and fill volumes between surfaces, GRIDVOL, GCGRDVOL and GC20 to compute volumes between surfaces within multiple boundaries.

GCGRDVOL can also report volumes within chainage ranges so it can give a similar report to AVGEND but with more accurate volumes.

EARTHWRK, GCEARTH and XVOLUMES report volumes of roadways.

If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
20/06/13 RG 402 DTM\Volumes from Xsections S 471
 BASIN

Create, enter and edit basin attributes for a point.

Create, enter and edit basin attributes for a point.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Basin\​Define basin S  
 BBEAR

Create a point at the intersection of two bearings or two lines.

Select a point or line to indicate the starting and second point and bearings. If you select a point, enter a bearing to indicate the direction from the point.

For each solution, BBEAR creates a new point at the intersection of the two bearings on the current layer.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Cogo\​Lines\​Bearing-​bearing intersection S 23
 BDIST

Create a point at the intersection of a line and an arc.

Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.

Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Cogo\​Lines\​Bearing-​distance intersection S 12
 BDYRELAY

Relayer within boundary and bandwidth.

Relayer objects on layer list layers that are within a bandwidth of selected objects.

See also GCOFLINE.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 BEARTEXT

Add a datum angle to bearing text.

Add a specified datum angle in DMS (e.g. 125.30451 for 125°30'45.1") to strings in selected text.

Explode any EAT text first.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 8
 BENCH

Create a bench string.

Create a bench string beside an existing set.

There are settings for chainage range, batter slopes, whether to batter to DTM, datum or offsets, side, current layer, interval and corner tidying.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 BESTFITA

Draw a curve or plane of best fit through selected points.

Create points and a set on a specified layer by fitting an equation to selected points.

Create points and a set on a specified layer by fitting an equation to selected points.

For each curve type, enter Settings for the result layer and other parameters as required.

Curve types

2D Line
Create a set between new two points with no elevations. See also BFITLINE.
Plane
Create a centre point and a rectangular set on a 3D plane. See also ELEVREFPLANE and IR_BAY.
2D Circle
Create a 2D pline circle and centre point. See also CIRCLE and BFITCURV.
3D Circle
Create a set with a specified number of straight segments joining points on an ellipse which represents a circle in 3D space observed from above. See also ELLIPSE.
Parabola
Create a pline with a parabolic vertical curve. You can edit the vertical curve with CURVE if the pline is in a view mode with vertical exaggeration such as Profile or Xsect. See also PLINE, GCPRFEDT and PARABOLA.
Catenary
Create a pline of segments on a catenary through three points. See also CAT.
TML date  Source 
10/02/14     Geocomp Update or $250  
 BFITCURV

Draw an arc of best fit through selected points.

Create a pline arc fitted through three or more points using the Least Squares method.

Best-fit curve options

SELECT POINTS
Select the points through which a curve will be fitted.
OPTIONS
Select layers for the points and curves, set the location method and vary the weight of each point in the computations.
LAYER
Store points on
Specify the layer on which the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
Store curve on
Specify the layer on which the set arc that connects the PC, PT and radius points will be stored when using the Create option.
LOCATION METHOD
Auto select/User select
Auto automatically calculates the beginning point. User lets you enter a beginning point. When you select User, you can enter a trial location for the centre of the radius and the radius length. BFITCURV uses the first three points to determine an initial radius and location for the radius point, and then uses an iterative process to find the solution. If, with the Auto option, BFITCURV suggests an arc in the opposite direction than desired, try again with the User option. Guessing a radius point and radius close to the true answer will speed the calculation process.
Radius center
Select a trial position for the calculation of the true radius center.
Radius length
Select a trial radius for the calculation of the true radius.
NUMBER
Lists the points you selected and through which a curve will be fit. From this box, you can select a point and edit its weight of importance. When you highlight a row in this list box, its corresponding weight will appear in the Weight box for you to change.
POINT
Display the selected point numbers.
WEIGHT
Set the weight of importance of each point through which the curve will pass. Bfitcurv will ignore any points having a weight of zero. A high weight will force the arc to go through the point. If fewer than three points are given a high weight of importance, Bfitcurv will not find a valid solution. When three points are given a high weight, an arc is passed through the three points.
LOCATE
Show the solution by creating a pline circle with the computed radius point and radius distance. In some situations, it may take several minutes to calculate the solution.
CREATE
Create a set arc, PC point, PT point and radius point.
REPORT
List the points used to calculate the arc, the weight of importance of each point, their distances from the arc and their coordinates on the arc perpendicular to their position.
DELETE
Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
20/06/13 RG 558 Cogo\​Curves\​Best-fit curve S  
 BFITLINE

Create a line of best fit through selected points.

Create a pline fitted through two or more points using the Least Squares computation method.

Best-Fit Line Options

SELECT POINTS
Select the points through which a line will be fitted.
OPTIONS
Assign independent layers for the new objects, and vary the weight of importance of each point in the computations.
LAYER
Store points on
Specify the layer on which points will be stored.
Store line on
Specify the layer on which the set line will be stored.
NUMBER
List the points you selected and through which a line will be fit. When you highlight a row in this list box, its corresponding weight of importance will appear in the Weight box for you to change.
POINT
Display the point numbers of the points whose weight will be edited.
WEIGHT
Set the weight of importance of each point through which the line will pass. A weight of zero will force the line to go through the point. When two points are given a weight of zero, a line is passed through the two points. To ignore a point remove it from the selection. Higher weights pull the line towards the point.
CREATE
Create a set line and two points showing the solution.
REPORT
List the points used to calculate the line, their weight, their distance to the line and their coordinates on the line perpendicular to their position.
DELETE
Delete the last set and points created with the Create option.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
20/06/13 RG 567 Cogo\​Lines\​Best-fit line S  
 BGELEV

Create an elevation view of points.

Copy selected points into an "Elevation" drawing in View 6.

The position of the point along the selected Baseline determines the horizontal position in View 6, while the Z coordinate of the Point determines the vertical position in View 6.

The points in View 6 are placed on the same layer that the points were originally placed on in the Plan View.

The points in View 6 are given an alphanumeric identifier (point number). If the baseline has a Name, then this name and the original identifier are combined to create the identifier for the point in View 6. If the baseline does not have a name, a (2) is combined with the original identifier to create the identifier for the point in View 6.

Max Alpha Points must be set in SYSTEM to a large enough number.

See also FLIPUP which is similar but has more features.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     S  
 BHOLE01

Import boreholes from a CSV.

Import points from a CSV file of bore hole data with elevations below a specified Top DTM layer.

The CSV file format is similar to this example:

First line HEADERHoleName, East, North, Layer01 name, Layer02 name, Layer03 name, Layer04 name, etc., etc., .....
Additional linesHoleName, E, N, depth to Layer01, depth to Layer02, depth to Layer03, ....
ExampleBH3A , 318128.00, 7345997.30, 0.5, 1.4, , 6.1, 9.8

See also BOREHOLE.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 BIGXMLIN

Import LandXML points within boundaries without new lines.

Import points from a LandXML file that fall within a closed pline or within an offset from an open pline, when the XML file has long lines of data without new lines. BIGXMLIN is slower than GCXMLIN because it reads one character at a time.

See also LandXML IMPORT script and GCPTSIN.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 BIN2IMG

Create a coloured image from depths.

Create a coordinated image file of colours representing the elevation from hydrographic data created using HDMS.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 BL

Create a breakline set.

Create a set that is also a breakline.

Create set between points that have elevations and are on the same layer as the first selected point. The set is created on the same layer.

See also SET.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Set\​Breakline S 15
 BLDG

Create a pline with right angles.

Specify an origin, enter a bearing and distance and then click OK to enter the first wall segment.

Then enter a positive distance to create a segment to the right, a negative distance for a segment to the left, New for a new building, Undo to undo the last segment or OK to complete the command.

See also BUILDING, QSET, TRAVERSE.

TML date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   Draw\​Pline\​Building or Cogo\​Traverse\​Simple building S 4
 BLFILTER

Filter excess points from breaklines.

Replace sets on the selected layer with sets made up of straight segments within a filter "tube". This will usually reduce the number of vertices for sets containing straights and increase the vertices for arcs.

The initial filter tube is of the specified length and orientated to the first segment on the set with width perpendicular to the segment and height measured vertically.

You can limit by multiple boundaries.

BLFILTER checks for additional vertices that are contained within the limits of the filter tube. Any vertices inside the tube are discarded. The first vertex Terramodel finds outside of the tube is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the tube is added back to the set. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated.

Filtering is similar to FILTER command, except that BLFILTER also tests for elevation tolerance.

SETFILT and GCFILTER filter by 2D offset tolerance instead.

See also ARCBL which adds points and breaklines points into arcs and 3DFILTER which filters insignificant points from a DTM.

TML date MenuSourceGC
15/11/13   Modify\​More...\​Filter breaklines Geocomp Update or $100 127
 BLINECHK

Check for crossing sets on a layer.

Wherever sets on the selected layer cross, create a point with the name "bl-cross" on layer CROSSING and labelled with symbol 40 (circle).

These points give an indication of crossing breaklines.

Some points may be created at set segments which are not breaklines, such as arc segments or sets with points that are 2D, non-​contourable or on different layers.

Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.

As each set is checked against all the other sets, the count will appear slower at first then speed up.

Use CROSSCHK to check all selected sets or plines.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\​Mark\​Crossing breaklines Geocomp Update or $25 43
 BLKPTS

Place blocks at points based upon names in the BLOCK.MAP file.

Replaced by AUTODRAFT or GCLABPNT for most purposes.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 1217 Draft\​Blocks\​Symbols on points S 125
 BLKREAD

Reread a block

Replace an internal block with a different external block with the same name.

See also MKBLKINT.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Draw\​Block\​Reread block S  
 BLOCK

Create, place, list or purge blocks.

Combine objects into a single object that can be manipulated as a block.

Blocks can consist of points, 3DFaces, plines, dynaviews, text and other blocks. Objects in blocks do not retain layer names.

The block can be inserted multiple times into projects, shared between projects, scaled, rotated and otherwise edited.

You can create both internal blocks (which can only be used within a single project file) and external blocks (which can be referenced by any Terramodel project file). If you specify an External block, Terramodel will use the first block with that name on the Terramodel Search Path.

Points included in blocks lose point numbers. Sets are stored as plines when they are included in blocks.

Blocks imported from DWG or DXF files can include 3DFaces. These become points and sets when the block is exploded in Terramodel. To create a block with 3DFaces of a Terramodel DTM, export that DTM surface as 3DFaces to DWG, block that layer in some CAD program then import as DWG into Terramodel.

Block Options

CREATE
Create a block definition, given a group of objects and the origin of the block. Use the Name button to enter a block name of up to 15 characters, a description, and define it as an internal block or external block with .BLK file extension.
SETTINGS
Establish default parameters used when inserting blocks. These block settings apply to all subsequently created blocks.
SCALE
Enter a scale factor for the X, Y, and Z dimensions of all inserted blocks. The factors are measured in relation to the sizes of the original objects. For example, if you want to place a block 2.5 metres in diameter, and the block you are placing is 1 unit in diameter, use a scale factor of 2.5.
ROTATION
Establish the amount of clockwise rotation for the X, Y, and Z ordinates of each inserted block, rotated about the insertion point.
INTERNAL/​EXTERNAL radio buttons
Specify whether all blocks are to be created as internal or external.
AUTO SCALE
Apply the current drawing scale of the active view to the block insert. Use this feature when you want to keep the plotted size of the block the same regardless of the current drawing scale. One example would be a north arrow that you always want plotted 4 inches high regardless of the drawing scale.
AUTO ROTATE
Cause blocks to rotate automatically through a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. This should not be used with a north arrow but could be used with other symbols to keep them oriented upright on the final plotted sheets.
CLIP
Clip the block to the limits of rectangular dynaviews, even if the insertion point falls outside the dynaview. Clipping complex blocks such as hatch patterns can cause the screen redraw speed to decrease.
MAP COLOUR
When a block is inserted, it is assigned the line colour of the current layer. This block colour is retained if the block is later relayered.
ON
All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
OFF
The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER.
EDIT
Edit the attributes of an inserted block.
LAYER
Lists the available layers, where you choose one on which to place the block.
COLOUR
Modify the colour of the inserted block.
ATTRIBUTE
List any attributes that have been attached to the block. Any attributes must be edited using specific commands.
GROUP
Modify the integer group number. Set 0 for no group.
REF. OBJ
Specify record number of a parent object to which the blocked is referenced.
OBJ
This area displays the record number of the block.
NAME
Modify the name of the block to match another available block. For example, if you change the name of a block named CIRCLE to TREE1, the circle block will be replaced with a tree canopy block of different size.
DESCRIPTION
Displays the description you assigned to the block definition when you created it.
ORIGIN
Modify the X and Y of the origin of the block.
ELEV
Modify the elevation of the block. See PN below.
SCALE
Modify the X, Y or Z scale of the block.
ROTATION
Modify the X, Y, and/or Z rotation angles of the block.
AUTO SCALE
Apply the current view scale so the block is always the same size on the plot. Auto scale is off by default. Use SCLBLKS to turn Auto scale on.
MAP COLOUR
ON
All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
OFF
The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER
AUTO ROTATION
Cause block objects to rotate automatically through a dynaview as the dynaview is rotated. This should not be used with a north arrow but could be used with blocks that oriented to the top of final plotted sheets.
PN
When a subject point number is specified the block origin is computed relative to the coordinates of the point. When the point is deleted any attached block will also be deleted. EAT text in the block can refer to the subject point.
INSERT
Insert a block into a project file.
Block name
Specify the name of the block you want to insert. Pick from a list of blocks already inserted in the project, or type in the name of a block in the Terramodel Search Path.
LOC
Locate the origin of the block.
SCALE
Set the size of the block relative to the size of the block definition. Most blocks are defined as one unit high so the scale you enter becomes the height of the inserted block in the units of the view. Note that the CIRCLE block is one unit in radius, and point label blocks vary in height as specified.
ROT
Enter the rotation of the block around the origin.
MAP COLOUR
When a block is inserted, it is assigned the line colour of the current layer. This block colour is retained if the block is later relayered.
ON
All objects within the block are drawn with the colour of the block.
OFF
The objects in the block are drawn with their original colours. Blocks which contain block objects with colour 0 are drawn with the colour BYLAYER
INSERT
Insert the block once you have set the location, etc.
LIST
List the internal and external blocks contained in your project file. The list includes the block name, whether it is an internal or external block, the view in which the block was created, the number of lines (polylines or sets) contained in the block definition, the number of text objects contained in the block definition, the number of inserted blocks of that block definition, and the description of the block.
SAVE
Save a block definition as an external BLK file.
NAME
Select the block definition you want to save to an external file from this drop-down list box of blocks you have created.
FILE
Enter up to 8 characters for the name of an external .BLK file.
SAVE
Save the block definition as an external block.
MODIFY
Select one block from a list of external blocks that have been inserted and modify it to an internal block. See also MKBLKINT.
MULTIPLE
Place multiple identical blocks on selected points.
Name
Specify the name of the block you want to insert. Pick from a list of blocks already inserted in the project, or type in the name of a block in the Terramodel Search Path.
Pts
Select the points.
SCALE
Set the size of the block relative to the size of the block definition. Most blocks are defined as one unit high so the scale you enter becomes the height of the inserted block in the units of the view. Note that the CIRCLE block is one unit in radius, and point label blocks vary in height as specified. Also enter the rotation of the block around the origin.
MULTIPLE
Insert the blocks on each selected point.
PURGE
Delete unused unblock definitions in the project file. Use DELBLKS to delete missing external blocks.

See also AUTODRAFT, BLKREAD, BLKPTS, DELBLKS, GCEXPLOD, GC09, GCINSBLK, HATCH, MKBLK, SCLBLKS, TEXT2PNT and UNITBLK.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\Block S 189
 BLOCKLST

Create an array of blocks for a legend.

Create an array of labelled blocks from all internal or external blocks listed in a text file.

First create a text file called BLOCKSPT.LST and place it anywhere in the Terramodel Search Path, for example in the current project folder. The file format is one block name per line. Put " characters around block names with spaces in them. Then run BLOCKLST to create the array in the Sheet view.

For example, see the project file C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp\​Docs\​BLOCKSALL.PRO created from all our blocks (as of 2009) using BLOCKSPT.LST (also found in C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp\​Docs). (We created this BLOCKSPT.LST with ZTree using Ctrl-Batch and %4). If you are looking to see what our blocks look like, go to DOC​UMENTS for our block charts as PDF files.

See also LINETYPS to create a chart of linetypes and MKBLKINT to make the external blocks internal.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 148
 BLUETOP

Bluetop report.

Create a bluetop report for a roadjob.

Bluetops are pegs with a blue-painted top surface and blue whiskers placed in the ground to the elevation of the finish course.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 BOREHOLE

Import boreholes from a file.

Import points from a file of bore hole data.

Specify whether the Z values are elevations or depths.

The file format is similar to this example:

First line Info and Layer Names ID,E,N,FILL 1,ALV 1,NONCO 1,COHES 1,MUD 1,SNDSTN 1,SNDGRV 1,NONCO 2,COHES 2
Example data lineOXBN15, 32624.26, 151422, 15.78, 13.6, 11.9, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, 9.1, -8.66,
Example data lineOXBN16, 32553.86, 151409, 14.033, 12, 12, 12, 9.3, 9.3, 9.3, 9.3, 8.1, 6.5, -8.66, -8.66

See also BHOLE01.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 BOX

Draw a pline box.

Draw a rectangular pline at specified opposite corners.

See also POLYGON, PLOTBOX and PAD.

If the box is to be used for a DYNAVIEW, we suggest that you adopt the convention of locating the first corner in the bottom left so that the insertion point of any rectangular dynaview can always be found at the bottom left.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Pline\​Box S  
 BREAK

Break a pline or set into two parts.

Break a pline or set into two parts at location.

Select a pline or set, then a break location. The pline or set is broken into two parts at the location.

Repeat
Enable this checkbox if you want the command to stay open until Cancel is clicked.
Set or pline
Select the set or polyline you wish to break.
Break
Enter a location along the line where you want to break it.

A polyline cannot be broken within a spiral or vertical curve.

To break a pline or set by removing a segment, use DELETE​SEGMENT.

In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deletes set segments like DELETE​SEGMENT does now.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Break S 276
 BUILDING

Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides.

Construct a building with perpendicular or angled sides based on positive (right) and negative (left) offsets. Close the building by direct closure to the beginning point or close on a perpendicular to the beginning line. The beginning line can be cut or extended to match the closing line.

See also BLDG, QSET and TRAVERSE.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
20/06/13 building.txt Cogo\​Traverse\​Complex building Wencomp 4
 CAGDRL_X

Report Compute-A-Grade ditches.

Report Compute-A-Grade ditches

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 CALLOUT

Label objects with predefined callout text.

Create, edit, store and use predefined callout styles to label common features.

Quickly label common point and line features, such as kerb inlets, without having to type the text each time.

Stored callout styles define text in the label and may also define leader lines and text borders.

Predefined the callout styles save time, look consistent and reduce typing errors.

Callout styles are stored in multiple external .COS libraries in the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​\Terramodel\Locale\English and C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​\Terramodel\Geocomp folders in categories. The loaded styles are recorded in tmodwin.ini and therefore independent of the project. The Geocomp Update loads the geocomp01.cos callout style library.

Callout Options

CALLOUT
Create or edit a callout style, load and clear the styles contained within an external callout style library (.COS) file, and select the callout style to be used.
HAL
If the callout style contains EAT codes for chainage and offset, refer the callout text a horizontal alignment.
LDR / SUBJ
If the callout style contains EAT codes for a subject, refer to that subject. If the callout style includes a leader line, pick the leader line location.
LOC
Enter the insertion point of the callout text. Once you have entered the insertion point location, the coordinates will appear in the Loc box. If you pick a location graphically, the text will be placed. If you enter the coordinates in this control, click on the Text control to place the text.
ROT
Enter a bearing or an angle of rotation (measured from due north) at which the text is to be placed. Valid rotation angles range from 0° to 360° and can include negative angles. The default rotation is 90° which generates horizontal text.
PROPS
Designate a leader line style and a border style and their properties. You can also edit the text object's subject record and its subject HAL record from within this dialog box.
TEXT
Place the text once you have typed it and set the other text parameters to your liking.

See also GC21 which sets the active callout style and GCLABPNT which labels multiple points with EAT text.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Text\​Callout text... S 92
 CAROUSEL

Configure plotter carousels.

Select and edit plotter pen carousel definitions.

Each carousel defines the colour, in RGB, and width in mm, for "pens" to be used when plotting.

Use PLOTSET, to map the object colour to a pen number and PLOTTER​SET to assign the default carousel for each Plotter Configuration.

To copy a carousel, manually copy a pen carousel definition (PENDEF) within TMODWIN.INI.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Palettes, Colourmaps, Penmaps and Carousels in Terramodel File\Plot setup\Carousel setup S PU3
 CASCADE

Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.

Arrange all open views so that all the view names are visible.

Cascade is an ALIAS to MACROPLAY CASCADE which simulates the Cascade command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
Macro   Window\Cascade S and User-​definable  
 CAT

Create a catenary.

Create a segmented pline, between two attachment locations in the profile view, following the path of a cable suspended between two points.

You can set the weight, tension and horizontal increment.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 CDSPROF

Create an initial design profile for a cul-de-sac or kerb return.

To create a kerb return,

  • Select the kerb return horizontal alignment at Cul-de-sac.
  • Click Begin info and select the centreline hal of one road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the start of the kerb and the design profile of that road.
  • Click End info and select the centreline hal of the other road, the vertical offset of the kerb alignment at the end of the kerb and the design profile of the other road.
  • Click Create to create a profile pline with chainages from the culdesac alignment and four segments containing vertical curves end matching the grades and elevations of the design alignment profiles.

The kerb return has four segments with vertical curves.

See also GC51 and GCPRFEDT.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
20/06/13 RG 572 Cogo\​Streets\​CdsProf S  
 CENVIEW

Recentre views based on chainage.

Tile the Plan, Profile, Super and Xsect views and centre by chainage from a selected roadjob alignment.

Ideal for working along a long narrow alignment such as a road, rail or pipe.

For any selected roadjob, nominate a chainage by selecting a location in the plan, profile, super or xsect views. The plan, profile and super views, if open, are recentred on the horizontal or vertical alignment at the selected chainage. The active chainage is set to the nearest cross section, and the Xsect view is fitted to the data.

If the selected view is the Xsect, the active chainage is used, if set.

The match button uses the centre of the active plan, profile or super view to recentre the other views. If the profile view is active, the plan and super views are scaled to fit the chainage range.

There are buttons to zoom in or out by 25%, to fit data in all four views, and to move to the next or previous chainage then making it active.

On starting this option, the views are horizontally tiled.

See also TPCENVIE.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Windows\Tile centred by chainage Geocomp Update or $500  
 CF2SUPER

Compute super­elevation from existing crossfall.

For every point in a centreline set, compute the crossfall perpendicular to the HAL from the centreline to left and right edge-of-road sets. These crossfalls are placed in the Super view on the current layer so you can design to match existing super­elevation.

Xlines are ignored as these are not interpolated linearly.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHAINAGE

Set the start chainage of a horizontal alignment pline.

Set the start chainage (also known as beginning station) of a horizontal alignment pline.

CHAINAGE is an alias to STATION command.

Sets and plines are always chained from the first point created to the last point created. Chainage equations assigned by HALMANAGER are used in registered alignments only.

If the US English language version is installed, Terramodel dialogs and menus refer to Station. If British English, the dialogs refer to Chainage. The Terramodel Help refers to Station. This TML List refers to Chainage.

See also ACTIVECHAINAGE, SETSTA, REVERSE and GC74.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Chainage or Edit\Station S 84
 CHEKROAD

Check and correct roadway alignment registration.

See also GCSUBGDE and GCDTMGDE.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHNGATTR

Replace selected attributes based on a dictionary.

Replace attributes of selected objects according to a dictionary file.

 

TML date  Source 
20/01/14     Geocomp Update or $100  
 CHNGCOLR

Change colour bylayer to colour by colour number.

For every selected object that has colour number = 0 (= BYLAYER), change the colour number to the colour of the layer.

The displayed colour will not appear to change until you change the layer of the object or the colour in the layer settings.

For example, select all objects by view to change to from a colour by layer convention to a colour by object convention. To change all from colour by object to colour by layer, COLOUR by view to colour 0.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 CHNGHEIG

Change elevation by point name

Change the elevation of all selected points to match the numeric value of the name.

All digits and the last decimal point in the name are considered; all other characters are ignored, for example:

point name new elevation
123.456 123.456
R.L.=123.456 123.456
123.456 I.L. 123456.00
90301 90301.00
TOP01 1.00
RCP dia. 225 class Y1 0.2251
give way sign *
  *

You may need to tidy up the names with GC01, SNR or CHNGNAME first.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 CHNGNAME

Replace characters in names based on a dictionary.

Replace characters in names of selected records according to a selected dictionary file.

Change the name of selected objects by replacing any string of characters in the name that matches the left-hand field from the list with the corresponding string of characters in the right-hand field.

You can limit the start and end character positions.

The name of a text object has the same value as the text, so use CHNGTEXT instead to change multiple text objects.

Matches are found by working down the dictionary file in order. You can stop after the first match or allow multiple changes to the name. See CHNGTEXT for an example.

Create your dictionary in a text editor or edit a copy of CHNGNAME.DIC. Use ' and , for delimiters.

This is an example of a dictionary for substituting CGRDVOL grid labels.

'Row   1 Col   1','A1'  
'Row   1 Col   2','B1'
'Row   1 Col   3','C1'
'Row   1 Col   4','D1'
'Row   1 Col   5','E1'
'Row   2 Col   6','A2'
'Row   2 Col   7','B2'
'Row   2 Col   8','C2'
'Row   2 Col   9','D2'
'Row   2 Col  10','E2'

See also SNR (Search and Replace), and CHTXT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 RDES
 CHNGTEXT

Replace selected text based on a dictionary.

Replace characters in selected text records according to a selected dictionary file.

Change selected text objects by replacing any string of characters in the text that matches the left-hand field from the list with the corresponding string of characters in the right-hand field.

If the new text is a different length, you can match the text width attributes to suit.

Matches are found by working down the dictionary file in order. You can stop after the first match or allow multiple changes to the text. In the example below 'CHAINAGE' is listed above 'CH'. If instead 'CH' is listed before 'CHAINAGE', and "Stop after 1st match" is not been selected, you get 'PKAINAGE', not 'PK'.

You can refer to characters by their three-​digit decimal ASCII value. For example, \010 for new line and \176 for degree (°) sign. What you see depends on the font. Not all fonts contain all characters. For example, in some fonts degree sign is \127. In fonts such as symbol.fnt, you can specify a symbol by this method.

Create your dictionary in a text editor or edit a copy of CHNGTEXT.DIC. Use ' and , for delimiters.

These are examples of using a dictionary to change the presentation language.

#Dictionary file format
# Lines with first char as # are ignored
#  use ' character as limiter
#'Current Text','New Text'
#
#'English',​'Espanol'
'Feasibility Study',​'Estudio de factibilidad'
'Road design',​'D seño decarretera'
'North',​'Norte'
'Cross-Section',​'Corte'
#
#'English',​'Francais'
'CHAINAGE',​'PK'
'CH',​'PK'
'SCALES',​'ECHELLE'
'SCALE',​'ECHELLE'
'Scale',​'Echelle'
'LONGITUDINAL SECTION',​'Profil en Long'
'CROSS SECTIONS',​'Profil en Travers'
'OFFSET',​'Distance du centre'
  

See also SNR (Search and Replace), CHNGNAME and CHTXT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 514
 CHOSDIFF

Report chainage, offset and height difference from DTM.

Report the Point Number, Chainage, Offset, Point Elevation, Design DTM Elevation, Elevation Difference and Name in a table, given a HAL, a Design DTM, and some points.

If CSV, is selected, the report includes commas, so you can then save the report as a text file to CSV. No separate CSV file is created.

TML date  Source
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50
 CHTXT

Convert stationing text to chainage text.

Convert text objects representing distance along an alignment from USA stationing format, for example nn+nnn.nn, to UK/AUST chainage format, for example CH nnnnn.nn.

See also CHNGTEXT and SNR.

TML date  Source
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50
 CIRCLE

Create a circular pline.

Create a closed pline of four equal arcs centred on a specified location, with a specified radius.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Pline\​Circle S 29
 CLEANSET

Remove unnecessary points from sets.

  • Remove each point in selected sets with the same point number as the previous point,
  • Relayer to layer 0 points in a set with no elevation at the same location as a point with an elevation, and
  • Remove zero-length arc segments.

Any such accidental points can cause commands to behave in unexpected ways.

See also DUPLTRIS.

TML date  SourceGC
29/10/13     Geocomp Update or $50 30
 CLEARMESS

Clear text from the message scroll window.

See also MESSAGESCROLL.

Command dateGuideMenuSource146
12/03/09Terramodel Help Windows\Clear message scroll S 146
 CLIP

Clip plines and sets to boundaries.

Clip plines or sets where they cross selected closed boundaries.

Mode

Inside
Break all objects crossing the boundaries then delete any part of any selected object inside any of the boundaries.
Outside
Break all objects crossing the boundaries then delete any part of any selected object which is not inside all of the boundaries.
Break
Break all objects at the boundaries without deleting any parts
The objects are clipped to remove that part wholly Inside or Outside any of the boundaries, or to Break at the boundaries.

The boundaries can be closed plines or text objects. The clipping boundary of text objects is at the extent of the text scaled by the text clip margin defined in DRAFTSET. The location of the insertion point of text determines whether the text is inside or outside.

  • To clip all objects outside all selected boundaries, see CLIP_OUT.
  • To clip a pline or set to boundaries, see TRIM
  • To clip to a length, see GC88.
  • To clip hatching, EXPLODE to plines first.
  • To clip DTMs, see GCCLIP.
  • To clip and merge DTMs, see DTMMATCH, GC33, GC33MULT, GCCLIP or GCMERGE.
  • To automatically clip contours, profiles and cross sections from dead regions, see SETSMOOTH.
  • To clip Xlines, see GCXLINES.
  • To clip a block to a dynaview, see BLOCK and SCLBLKS.
  • To clip an image, see IMAGE.
  • To clip subsurface lines in cross sections, see RDDESIGNSET.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Clip S 254
 CLIP_OUT

Clip objects outside multiple boundaries.

Clip all objects outside all selected boundaries.

Break selected objects at selected boundaries then delete all parts of the selected objects outside any of the boundaries.

CLIP_OUT may be aliased to CLIPOUT.

For any other variation on clipping, see CLIP.

TML date  Source 
07/10/13    Geocomp Update or $50  
 CLOSE

Close the current project without exiting Terramodel.

Close the current project file (.PRO) and the corresponding project lock (.PLK) file that was opened with the project.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\Close project S 255
 CLOSEFIG

Close selected sets and plines.

For selected sets and plines, create a segment from the end to the start.

Optionally, use name masks from a file.

TML date MenuSourceGeocomp
29/10/08   Edit\Close lines S 126
 COLOR

Modify the color of selected objects.

Change the color number of selected objects to a single specified color number in the range 0 to 255.

Objects with color 0 are reported as having color BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line color of their layer.

Blocks with Map Color flag turned ON are displayed in the color of the block. Blocks with Map Color flag turned OFF are displayed in the color of the objects in the block.

Since Terramodel 10.40, with US English installation this command is spelled COLOR. To use COLOR with the British English installation, alias COLOR to the command COLOUR.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Modify\Color S 40
 COLORCODE

Change the colour of points relative to the current roadway.

Since the ranges are by 3D distances from the current roadway, this works best with approximately circular shapes such as those used in tunnels.

Select points from those on a selected DTM layer.

The Settings button allows you to assign colour numbers for use within distance ranges.

Choose whether to change the colour of the existing points or create new points on a new layer with the desired colour at the same location.

If you choose to create new points, you can set the elevations of the new points to the ("offsets" (difference in 3D distance) between the points and the current roadway. This can be modelled to create a difference DTM and determine the zero ("offsets" line.

The 3D distances are interpolated from cross sections extracted at the specified interpolation spacing.

See also COLORPT and HDMS.

Since Terramodel 10.40, with US English installation this command is spelled COLORCODE. To use COLORCODE with the British English installation, alias COLORCODE to the command COLOURCODE.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Tunnel Training Guide Tunnels\​Modify Colour codes S 342
 COLORCON

Change the colour of plines by contour interval.

Increment the colour number of selected pline contours based on elevation.

Change the colour of plines, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.

Examples

Bands of colour
To colour isopachs at 0.1m intervals in 1.0m bands,
  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.1 and Index interval to 1.
  2. CONTOUR the isopach surface.
  3. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 1.0.
  4. COLORCON with number of colours large enough so the colours don't start repeating.
  5. Modify COLOUR by colour as required.
Reduce the number of contours
To remove every second contour pline supplied at an interval of 0.25,
  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25.
  2. COLORCON with number of colours = 2.
  3. DELETE the contour plines with elevations ending in .25 or .75 by colour.
Ribbon effect
With the contour interval set to 1 and the number of colours set to 10, contours with an elevation ending in 1 will be coloured 1, those ending in 2 will be coloured 2, and so on. Contours with an elevation ending in zero (0) will have colour 15 as the colour, since zero is reserved to designate colour by layer.
Change Index contour
To change the index contour of supplied contour plines from 0.25 to 1.0.
  1. CONTOURSET the normal interval to 0.25.
  2. COLORCON with number of colours = 4.
  3. RELAYER the 1.0 interval contour plines by colour.
  4. COLOUR the contours by layer.

The normal contour interval is set by CONTOURSET.

If your contour interval is less than 1.0m, use the COLORCON installed with the Geocomp Update.

COLOURCON is aliased to COLORCON. See also COLORPT.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\Colour code contours Geocomp Update or $50 156
 COLORPT

Change the colour of points by contour interval.

Increment the colour number of selected points based on elevation.

Change the colour of points, with elevations, within each normal contour interval, to the next colour number. The colour numbers increment by 1 and repeat when the specified number of colours is reached.

The normal contour interval is set by CONTOURSET.

See also COLORCON and COLORCODE

TML dateGuide SourceGC
20/06/13 Tunnel Training Guide   S 156
 COLOUR

Modify the colour of selected objects.

Change the colour number of selected objects to a single specified colour number in the range 0 to 255.

Objects with colour 0 are reported as having colour BYLAYER, and are displayed in the point or line colour of their layer.

Blocks with Map Colour flag turned ON are displayed in the colour of the block. Blocks with Map Colour flag turned OFF are displayed in the colour of the objects in the block.

Since Terramodel 10.40, with British English installation this command is spelled COLOUR. To use COLOUR with the US English installation, alias COLOUR to the command COLOR.

Command date MenuSourceGC
12/03/09   Modify\Colour S 40
 COLOURCODE

Change the colour of points relative to the current roadway.

Since the ranges are by 3D distances from the current roadway, this works best with approximately circular shapes such as those used in tunnels.

Select points from those on a selected DTM layer.

The Settings button allows you to assign colour numbers for use within distance ranges.

Choose whether to change the colour of the existing points or create new points on a new layer with the desired colour at the same location.

If you choose to create new points, you can set the elevations of the new points to the ("offsets" (difference in 3D distance) between the points and the current roadway. This can be modelled to create a difference DTM and determine the zero ("offsets" line.

The 3D distances are interpolated from cross sections extracted at the specified interpolation spacing.

See also COLORPT and HDMS.

Since Terramodel 10.40, with British English installation this command is spelled COLOURCODE. To use COLOURCODE with the US English installation, alias COLOURCODE to the command COLORCODE.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Tunnel Training Guide Tunnels\​Modify Colour codes S 342
 COLRLINE

Modify colours and linetype of selected objects by layer.

Modify the colours and linetypes of selected objects according the layer of the object and a mapping file. The file format is

layer,colour,linetype

See geocomp.lcl for an example.

COLORLINE and COLOURLINE are aliased to COLRLINE. See also GC16 and GC16ADC.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help   Geocomp Update or $50  
 COMMAND

Command line.

Open a new command line.

Open a new command line so that a command can be entered from the keyboard while another command is still active.

To start a new command line, select Command from the File menu or press Ctrl+Shift+C.

If you open a new command line while you are still in a command, when this command is complete, control is returned to the previous command.

If the command line has disappeared, see Command​Toggle.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\Command line S  
 Command​Toggle

Toggle on or off the visibility of the command line.

Toggle an invisible command line on, select Command line from the Window menu.

The command line toggle only controls visibility, unlike COMMAND in the File menu which opens a new command line on top of the current command.

Command​Toggle is an ALIAS to MACRO​PLAY COMMANDTOGGLE which simulates the Command line command in the Window menu.

Macro date MenuSource 
01/09/11   Window\​Command line S and User-​definable  
 COMPASS

Place a compass rose.

Place a compass rose block with true north and optional magnetic deviation and date of survey.

Requires comp-tn.blk and comp-mn.blk which are supplied with the TML.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 616
 COMPGRID

Compactor Grid Settings.

Compactor Grid Settings.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 CONFORM

Road thickness conformation report.

Report whether a road design and subgrade have been constructed within tolerance.

Compare selected as-built survey points with a roadway.

In the Settings, you can specify a bottom DTM for thickness calculations, a chainage grouping distance, a depth from design, upper and lower tolerances and maximum and minimum thicknesses.

The report shows, for each as-built point within the roadway, the chainage, horizontal offset, point elevation, roadway elevation, point conformance and pavement thickness.

The point conformance is determined by comparing the elevation of the surveyed point with the design subgrade elevation (design roadway minus depth from design). The thickness is determined by comparing the elevation of the surveyed point with the bottom DTM.

The report also includes a summary with tolerance percentages, maxima, minima and standard deviation.

TML date  Source 
11/02/14     Geocomp Update or $500  
 CONNECT

Connect two lines of the same type, forming a single line.

Similar to JOIN, except that if the lines do not have to have coincidental end points a connecting line segment is added.

The resulting line will retain the record number of the first line selected, and all of its properties and attributes. Any objects that previously referenced either the first or second line will thereafter reference the resulting line.

In selecting the lines you can pick anywhere on the line. However, you must pick nearest the end that you wish to be connected to the other line.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 149 Edit\Connect S 15
 CONTOUR

Extract pline contours from a DTM.

Create plines interpolated from a DTM at elevation intervals.

The intervals, labelling, linetypes and layers are controlled by CONTOUR​SET.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\Contour S 289
 Contour​AtElev

Create plines at a specified contour elevation.

Create contour plines everywhere a specified elevation intersects a specified DTM layer.

The labelling and minimum length are controlled by CONTOUR​SET.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\Generate contours at elev S DTM 4
 CONTOUR​SET

Configure contour settings.

Set the contour values uses by commands such as CONTOUR, LINKSET, COLORPT and COLORCON.

Normal interval
Contour elevation increment
Index interval
The number of normal intervals per index contour
Label nth contour
The number of normal intervals per labelled contour which is usually the same as the index interval
Splining
B-Splines pass inside the contour control points (IPs) and Overhauser curves pass through the control points.
Layer Assignment
If the contour and index contours layer names include *, the * is substituted by the DTM layer name.
Exponential
Create contours of exponential surfaces such as bacterial concentration or corrosivity.
Depression contours
Create the lowest contour line using "Depression" linetype.

See also CONTOUR​ATELEV.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Contour settings S 43
 CONTOUR​VOL

Compute volumes from contour plines.

Computes volumes for individual mounds or depressions based on contour plines.

The volumes are obtained by using the average-end-area method, where the area of a closed contour is determined, then averaged with an adjacent contour, and multiplied by the contour interval to obtain an incremental volume. Incremental volumes are then added together to obtain a total volume.

This method is less accurate than that of the EARTHWORK command, but can provide an alternative approximation of mound and depression volumes.

You can use the ContourVol command in two different modes:

Line
Select a series of closed contour plines representing a mound or depression. Click the Volume button to display the accumulated volume in the message scroll area. If you wish to display a more detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer, click the Report button.
Digitizer
Digitize closed contours representing a mound or depression.
  1. Input the elevation of the first contour using the Elev elevation control.
  2. Digitize a series of points for the first contour using the Loc point control. You must provide a minimum of three points for each contour.
  3. If you select points by typing coordinates in the Loc point control, click the Pt. button to enter the point and proceed to the next point.
  4. When you are done digitising points, click the End button to close the contour.
  5. Repeat for successive contours until you have defined the mound or depression.
  6. Click the Report button to display a detailed report that can be saved or sent to a printer.

The selected contours must be closed, assigned an elevation, and form a continuously rising mound or a continuously falling depression. If the contours are open due to labels, use GCMATCH to create plines across the gaps, then JOIN the contours.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\Volumes from contours S DTM V
 CONVERT

Convert sets to plines or plines to sets.

Any combination of sets and plines can be converted to a single type of object. New lines are assigned the colour and linetype of the original line and placed on the layer of the original. Names, start chainage and other attributes are not retained. You have the choice of keeping or deleting the original objects.

Convert Options

Lines
This select control is used to select the lines to be converted
To (Set or Pline)
These radio buttons are used to select the type of lines to be created
Del old
This check box is used to optionally delete the original lines
Dup pts ok
Turn this on the check for points with duplicate northings and eastings.
Lay
This check box lets you set up the default behaviour for placing the new entity on a layer. When this box is checked, Terramodel places new entities on the current layer. When this check box is not checked, Terramodel places new entities on the same layers as the original objects.

Tips on using Convert

GCCONVRT
GCCONVRT is usually preferred to CONVERT because GCCONVRT retains all the attributes such as Name and Layer and is much faster.
Dup pts ok
CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, especially if "Dup pts ok" is OFF.
Duplicate point removal
Use DTM formation or GC31 instead of CONVERT to remove duplicate points.
Elevation
When converting a set to a pline, the elevation of the new pline is derived from the first point in the set.
Spirals
Terramodel uses sets and plines for specific purposes. For example, sets cannot include spirals and plines do not link points and cannot be labelled with lot numbers. See the Terramodel User Guide for more information about object types.
Visibility
When converting sets to plines, hidden segments are omitted so the plines are split. To temporarily display all hidden set segments use DISPLAY​SET Ignore hide. To hide or reveal hidden set segments use HIDE. To permanently reveal all hidden set segments of selected sets, use UNHIDE.
Arcs
When converting a pline to a set line, a new point object is created for the radius point and at each PC and PT. If multiple arcs use the same arc points, duplicate points will be created at each arc point.
Design
When creating a design, it is best to begin with construction lines that can easily be changed to accommodate changes in design concept. Plines are excellent construction lines because they are very basic, two-dimensional objects having a large amount of flexibility in their use. After the initial concept has been stored and modified, you can convert the plines into set lines, then assign elevations to the endpoints. You then have a design with intelligence whose surface can be modelled and from which volumes can be calculated.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Convert S 292
 CONVSET

Set slope convention.

Define the slope convention (ratio preference) according your local practice.

Choose either Horizontal run: vertical rise (e.g. 4:1) or Vertical rise: horizontal run (e.g. 1:4).

These conventions can be overridden by Terramodel settings or report formats. Even within the one project, the convention may vary, so check in each case.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Convention settings S  
 CONV_DMS

Convert degrees, minutes and seconds to decimal degrees.

Convert X and Y coordinates of selected points from DMS to Decimal degrees.

Convert coordinates in Degrees, Minutes, Seconds to decimal degrees.

Degrees, minutes and seconds can be entered into some calculators in a psuedo-decimal format where 123°35'45.1" East, for example, would be entered as 123.35451 and 23°35'45.1" North as 23.35451. Data in this format can be imported from CSV files into Terramodel X and Y coordinates without error messages, but such coordinates will be incorrect in Terramodel until they are transformed with CONV_DMS to decimal degrees (in this case 123.595861°E,​23.595861°N).

X and Y coordinates can be swapped at the same time. To convert N to S, see SCALE.

If your ASCII data includes other characters such as °, remove them before importing into Terramodel.

TML date  Source 
24/01/14     Geocomp Update or $200  
 COORDCON

Coordinate transformation of points.

Use either seven-​parameter transformation, or where possible, the faster and more accurate NTv2 distortion grid method.

The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon.

See also our Nav notes for more background and examples of how to create, set up and use coordinate systems.

COORDCON may be aliased to GCCOORD which transforms not just points, but sets, plines and text. GCCOORD also adds Australian and New Zealand Coordinate Systems.

GCLLGRID draws Latitude and Longitude grids and labels using COORDCON settings.

GeoCalc transforms files of points, whereas COORDCON transforms points in Terramodel projects.

Both COORDCON and GCCOORD use the same COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID data files in the \Shared\​Mentor.dir.

COORDCON requires COGO module.

If you are converting between foot and metre coordinate systems, use MEASUNIT to set the project metric conversion factor for International foot (0.3048) or US Survey foot (0.304800609601).

CSMAN and GEOSYS are part of a completely separate Coordinate System Manager for Trimble devices only.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 UG 425 Cogo\​Utilities\​Coordinate conversion S GeoCalc
 COORDS

Toggle and configure the Coordinate Scroll display dialog.

Coordinate Scroll tracks the cursor. The data displayed varies depending on the current command, the current control type (locate, bearing, distance, offset, station, point, etc.) and the active view mode (plan, profile, sheet, cross section, etc.).

Coordinate Scroll Options

COORDINATES
When the cursor is in the plan view mode it displays its Northing and Easting. In the profile view it displays the station and elevation. In the cross section view it displays offset and elevation, and in the sheet view, X and Y.
GPS COORDINATES
Reserved for future use.
3-D DIGITIZER
Used when the digitizer responds with X, Y and Z values.
DELTA COORDINATES
Shows the change in coordinate values from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor in the current view mode units.
BEARING-​DISTANCE
Shows the bearing and distance from the anchor point to the rubber band cursor when in the plan view mode. In the profile or cross section views it shows the grade and distance.
CHAINAGE( or STATION)-​OFFSET
With a rubber band cursor and an active chainage control, the chainage and offset relative to a selected alignment is shown in the plan view mode. When the cursor is rubber banding in the plan view, a single line showing the chainage will be shown in profile view and the offset in the cross section view. When rubber banding in the profile view mode the chainage and the difference in elevation from the selected alignment to the cursor is shown.
LAYER-​ELEVATION
Shows the current DTM layer and the elevation on the DTM at the cursor location. Set the current DTM layer first using DTMCH, SPOTSPOT or some other command that requires a DTM.
SLOPE-​ASPECT
Shows the slope of the TIN on the current DTM layer at the cursor location and the direction of the surface slope. This option must be used in conjunction with the above layer-​elevation option, to establish the current DTM layer.
VISIBLE
Controls the visibility of the coordinate scroll.
SAVE
Saves the current settings to the TMODWIN.INI file and exits the command.
DONE
Keeps the current settings for the current session without updating the TMODWIN.INI file and exits the command.

Coordinate Scroll tips

  • Use the title bar to drag the scroll to a new location.
  • Minimize the scroll to an icon by clicking its minimize button.
  • Maximize the scroll by double-clicking the minimized Coordinates icon.
  • In TMODWIN.INI, Under [CoordScroll], CoordNdec=x controls number of decimals for CoordScroll display and digitizer precision of a graphically entered point.

If you have multiple displays, Terramodel, and the coordinate scroll if visible, will always open on the primary display, but it is possible to lose the scroll of the edge of the display. If you lose the scroll, check that you have turned it on. If you can't find it, type RECOVERSCROLL.

See also GC75, IDSTATION and GCDTMDIF.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Window\​Coordinate scroll S SDS
 COPY

Copy selected objects to a new location or layer.

Duplicate selected objects.

3d
If ticked, you can specify the From and To coordinates as X,Y,Z, rather than X,Y.
Lay
If ticked, copy the objects to the current layer, otherwise they remain on the original layers.
From
Specify the location from which the vector is to computed
From
Specify the location to which the vector is to computed

Tips

  • The coordinate order is controlled by VIEWSET.
  • To duplicate objects in a new location, when you know the coordinate shift, enter 0,0 (or 0,0,0 if 3D), in "From" and the relative dX,dY(,dZ) in "To".
  • To assign starting point numbers for new points, use the "Start Pn" setting of POINTSET.
  • Not all properties are retained. For example, colours, names and contourability can be modified or omitted.
  • To copy objects to another layer without changing their location, while retaining many of the properties, use GCCOPY.
  • To make multiple copies, use MULTICOPY.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Copy S 178
 COPYROAD

Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob.

Copy a roadjob to a new roadjob retaining all roadways, registered alignments and phases.

This allows you to quickly recompute a new design without having to re-enter all the values or lose the old design.

The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates, skips, super­elevations, design settings or mass haul information.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200 415
 COPYRWAY

Copy one roadjob into a different roadjob.

Copy all roadways from one road job to a different roadjob.

This allows you to merge two road jobs. To copy some roadways, copy the whole roadjob then delete the roadways you don't want.

The Settings allow you to choose whether to copy surfaces, design templates, subgrade templates or supe​relevations.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\​More...\​Copy roadjob Geocomp Update or $200 415
 COPYTEMP

Copy a roadway template to other templates with the same name.

Update all design or subgrade templates in a roadway which have the same template name by copying the design of a nominated template.

This saves having to repeat the same edits to multiple templates with the same template name or repeatedly use the Copy button in TMANAGER.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\More\Copy template Geocomp Update or $200 413
 CORDSCRL

Recover a lost coordinate scroll dialog.

If you cannot find the coordinate scroll dialog, even though you have used COORDS to confirm that it is turned on, you may have moved the dialog off the windows display. Type CORDSCRL, or RECOVERSCROLL (an alias for CORDSCRL) to recover the scroll.

The coordinate scroll should then appear next time you start Terramodel located approximately 600 pixels down and across from the top left corner of the Terramodel display. You can then move the scroll to where you prefer.

If you have multiple displays, Terramodel, and the coordinate scroll if visible, will always open on the primary display.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 SDS
 COUNT

Count the number of objects of each type in each view.

An alias to OLIST.

See also LAYINFO, DTMINFO, OLIST2 and LIST.

Command date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   Reports\Count objects user definable SDS
 CRDTABLE

Create a coordinate table of points.

Points
Select the points to be tabulated. The values in the table update as the points are moved.
Origin
Enter the location of the upper left corner of the table
Title
Enter up to 61 characters for the title of the table in this edit text control. If you checked the Use Title Box check box, Terramodel will include the title at the top of the coordinate table.
Field Number
This column displays the order in which Terramodel will include the point parameters in the table. The first column of the table is field number 1, the second column field number 2, and so on.
Width
Enter the width, in number of characters, for the column of the table entry highlighted in the list box. There is no maximum width for columns. If any entries exceed the width you specify here, Terramodel will warn you.
Heading
Enter the heading that Terramodel will place at the top of the column for the table entry highlighted in the list box. The number of characters you can include in a heading depends on the width of the column for that table entry.
Prefix
Enter up to 13 characters for a prefix that Terramodel will include with each listing for the table entry highlighted in the list box.
Value
Select the value type for the table entry highlighted in the list box from this list box of point value types. Select from Pt# (point number), North (y-value), East (x-value), Elev (elevation), Desc (point name), or None if you do not want to include a value for the column.
General Properties
This section lets you configure the general format of the table.
Lines/Page
Enter the number of lines of data for each page of the table in this integer control. Terramodel creates additional table pages for entries that cannot fit on a single table page, placing them at the same y-coordinate position and one inch apart to the right of the first page.
Layer
Select the layer on which the table will be stored from this layer control.
Text style
Select the text style in which Terramodel will draw the table entries from this style control.
Colour
Select the colour in which Terramodel will draw the table entries from this colour control. The table frame is drawn in the colour of the layer on which the table is drawn.

The points are now sorted into integer points in point number order followed by alpha points in alphabetical order.

See also LLTABLE and LABELTABLE.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
20/06/13 RG 1226 Draft/Label coord. tables S 188, 92
 CREATELL

Import lists of layers in layer lists.

Import layer lists, layers, layer colours and layer linetypes from a file

The format of the input file is layer_list,​layer_name,​line_colour,​point_colour,​linetype.

Start all comment lines with the character "#". The first line should be a comment line. Include the word "Update" anywhere after the # on the first line to update all layers in the input file, otherwise colours and linetypes apply to new layers only.

If the file contains any new layers, you are prompted whether to import new layers or import only the layer lists and retain the preexisting layers.

Only the layer list and layer name fields are required.

Use LLISTSET to check that the layer lists have been created correctly.

Use LLRPT to export a file suitable for use with CREATELL.

TML date  SourceGC
04/09/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 CROSSCHK

Check for crossing sets or plines.

Wherever selected sets or plines cross, create a point with the name "bl-cross" on layer CROSSING and labelled with symbol 40 (circle).

Any previously created points on layer CROSSING will be deleted.

You could, for example, use CROSSCHK look for crossing lines in a window on an isolated layer.

Use BLINECHK to check sets on a selected layer.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Mark\Crossing lines Geocomp Update or $25 43
 CROWFOOT

Toggle on/off arrowheads (crowfeet) from leader lines.

Select a segment label text object and toggle its configuration to either display or not display the crow's feet leader lines that point to the label from the end of the line segment.

If the label is a user-​mode label, toggling crowfeet off will restore the normal leader line established by this command's settings.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 RG 1223 Draft\Crowfoot toggle S  
 CSMAN

Coordinate System Manager.

Manage coordinate systems used by Trimble devices.

Coordinate System Manager manages the current.csd database in C:\Program Files\​Common Files\​Trimble\​GeoData\ or C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\​GeoData\.

Open Coordinate System Manager through a Terramodel alias (see below) or directly in Windows (for example Start... Programs.. Trimble Office... Utilities... Coordinate System Manager).

Coordinate System Manager is supplied with a number of Trimble surveying and mapping systems.

Use Coordinate System Manager to

  • Browse your parameters
  • Establish a new site if you are working in an area that is not adequately covered by the definitions provided
  • Create or edit a site, zone, datum, ellipsoid, or geoid
  • Duplicate records
  • Select the projection used by a zone
  • Select the ellipsoid of any datum
  • Specify vertical and horizontal adjustments to a zone and save them as a named site
  • Select a geoid model
  • Assign the files to be used by a geoid model or datum transformation

To manually add a new Geoid Grid File to Coordinate System Manager (using AusGeoid09 for an example)

  1. Open C:\Program Files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp\​Docs\​Ausgeoid09 ggf files.zip
  2. Choose the ggf file for just South East Australia or the whole of Australia
  3. Extract Ausgeo09.ggf into C:\Users\​All Users\​Trimble\​GeoData\
  4. Run CSMAN
  5. Create a new geoid record using Ausgeo09.ggf
  6. Save the Coordinate System Database file to TEMP.CSD
  7. Exit Coordinate Systems Manager
  8. Rename "C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\​GeoDB\​template.cst" to "C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\​GeoDB\​template-old.cst"
  9. Copy TEMP.CSD to "C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\GeoDB"
  10. Rename "C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\​GeoDB\​TEMP.CSD" to "C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\​GeoDB\​template.cst"

To add new geoids to current.csd using Geocomp Update

Installing the latest versions of Business Center (BC) or Pathfinder (or similar) will update CSM and its databases. Installing Terramodel 10.61 does not. To add CSM databases, such as Ausgeoid09, without installing BC or Pathfinder

  1. Install Geocomp Update 10.61J
  2. Start Terramodel
  3. Run CSMAN from the command line to open CSM
  4. From the CSM File menu, open current.csd from the menu
  5. Update the databases when prompoted to do so
  6. Save the changes to current.csd

Aliases which execute Coordinate System Manager

The aliases CSM, CSMAN and CSMANAGER execute C:\Program Files (x86)\​Common Files\​Trimble\​Geodb\​Geodbnt.exe. CSMAN2000, CSMAN32, CSMANNT and CSMANXP execute C:\Program Files\​Common Files\​Trimble\​Geodb\​Geodbnt.exe. CSMAN95, CSMAN98 and CSMANME execute C:\Program Files\​Common Files\​Trimble\​Geodb\​Geodb95.exe.

See also GEOSYS.

COORDCON and GCCOORD use completely different databases that are unrelated to CSM.

Alias dateGuide Source 
20/06/13 In-built help   S  
 CSTAKE

Create custom construction staking reports.

Create roadway staking format files which allow you to control the format and content of roadway staking reports.

Open the Construction Staking command bar.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 992 Road\​Reports\​Staking\​Construction S 41
 CSV2ADC

Create AutoDraft Configuration (.ADC) file from .CSV.

Convert a table of feature codes into an ASCII Auto​Draft Configuration (.ADC) file.

To convert your feature code list into an .ADC:

  1. Make up a table of feature codes in a spreadsheet
  2. Save that table as .CSV
  3. Use CSV2ADC to convert the .CSV to an .ADC in ASCII format
  4. Edit the .ADC in a text editor, if you want
  5. Open the .ADC in the AutoDraft Editor
  6. Add any extra information using the AutoDraft Editor
  7. Save the binary .ADC file
  8. Use the binary .ADC with AUTO​DRAFT.

Populate the fields in the CSV file following this example:

Feature Code,Layer Name,Colour,Point or LineDescription
102, 102_TOP, 0, L, 102 Top of bank

TML date  SourceGC
29/01/14     Geocomp Update or $250 339
 CULDESAC

Create a cul-de-sac at the end of a pline or set.

SELECT ALIGNMENT
Select the horizontal alignment at the end of which a cul-de-sac will be created on the same layer as the HAL.
CULDESAC TYPE
Select one of four cul-de-sac types:
Knuckle
For widening on the outside of a bend
Typical
Comprising three circular arcs
Teardrop
Including a central traffic island
Hammerhead
With a square end
PROPERTIES
Define the properties for selected type of cul-de-sac.
CREATE
Create points and sets on the current layer using the selected alignment, cul-de-sac type and defined properties.

See Terramodel Help for diagrams illustrating the four cul-de-sac types.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 Terramodel Help and RG 574 Cogo\​Streets\​Cul-de-sac S  
 CURSOR

Limit the direction and increment of cursor movement

Cursor options

None
No restriction on cursor direction
Ortho
Draw the cursor along an orthogonal line from the last point drawn, based on the azimuth in the Snap Settings
Perpendicular
Draw the cursor along a line perpendicular to the last line segment drawn

You can also change the Snap Settings using SNAPSET.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Cursor S  
 CURVE

Insert or edit a pline curve.

Insert an arc, spiral, vertical, combining or Overhauser curve into a pline.

Select the type of curve to be inserted and the IP (also known as control point, vertex or Intersection Point) by clicking on or typing in the pline:cp.

After you select the curve type and vertex, click OK to select the curve properties.

The curve types are:

Arc
A circular curve defined by Arc length, Chord length, DC (Degree of curvature), External distance, Middle ordinate, Radius, or Tangent.
Spiral
A circular curve defined by radius or DC (Degree of Curvature) with two clothoid transition spirals defined by the Back (In) and Ahead (Out) spiral lengths.
Vertical
A parabolic curve in a profile view defined by Length, K factor, Crest, Sight distance or through a point. When the sight distance option is used, the eye and object heights are taken from the DESIGNSET.
Combining
A curve combining two arcs and three spirals. Specify the three spiral lengths, two different arc radii the proportion of the first arc. The proportion can be defined by the % delta angle, but it usually easier to enter the first arc length as a negative value.
Overhauser
A spline curve where the curve passes through the vertex.
Decurve
Remove a curve

You can also enter curves while entering alignments using the PLINE, SEGEDIT and HALDATA commands.

Command dateGuideMenuSource84
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Arc\​Pline curve or Draw\​Pline\​Curve or Edit\​More...\​Curve in pline S 84
 CURVESOL

Compute curves from arc properties.

Calculate and report the properties of an arc given two arc properties. No objects are created.

CURVESOL dialog box

Radius, Chord, Arc length, Delta, Mid-Ord, External, Tangent, Deg of curvature
Select and enter the value of any two arc properties
Segment area
List the segment area of the computed arc
Sector area
List the sector area of the computed arc
Curve definition chord length
Calculate degree of curvature solutions based on the arc definition or chord definition of a curve. For the chord definition, also enter the chord length value in the real number control to the right.
Calculate
Once two arc properties have been entered, click Calculate to compute the remaining values.
Report
Report the arc properties in a P3pad report.

Curve parameters are reported to the precision established in UNITSSET.

Arc property combinationRestriction
Arc length, chord Arc length must be greater than the chord distance
Arc length, tangent Arc length must be less than 2 times the tangent length
Chord, middle ordinate Chord distance must be greater than 2 times the middle ordinate
Chord, radius Chord distance must be less than 2 times the radius
Chord, tangent Chord distance must be less than 2 times the tangent
Delta, arc length Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees
Delta, radius Delta must not be equal to 360 degrees
Delta, chord (or external, middle ordinate, or tangent) Delta must be less than 180 degrees
External, middle ordinate The external distance must be greater than the middle ordinate
Middle ordinate, radius The middle ordinate must be less than the radius.

See also CURVE, SCURVE and FILLET.

Command dateGuideMenuSource84
12/03/09Terramodel Help Cogo\​Utilities\​Curve solutions... S 84
 CUTFILL

Balance cut and fill volumes.

Raise or lower the design DTM automatically until the desired net volume to an existing DTM is reached.

Compute batters according to the design slopes of the DTM edge sets. If there are no sets on the design layer, plines on that layer can be converted to sets.

Optionally, use Shrink/Swell factors.

Any points on the design DTM with names FIX, FIX X, FIX Y, FIX Z, FIX XZ, FIX YZ, FIX XY or FIX XYZ are constrained. This means that you can fix a long pad (or water storage) at one end and drag the rest it horizontally to change the size while achieving your desired volumes.

The distance and volume units are controlled by the labelling and conversion factor settings in UNITSSET.

See also PADSHIFT and MOVEPAD.

TML date MenuSource 
18/02/14   DTM\​More... Geocomp Update or $200  
 CVD5EXPT

Export data to Civilcad ASCII5 5 (AS5).

Export point, sets and text to Civilcad AS5 file format.

Civilcad AS5 files are compatible with Civilcad versions 5 and 6 but not 4.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   File\Misc. export\Civilcad 5 AS5 Geocomp Update or $75  
 CVD5IMPT

Import data from Civilcad AS5 file.

Import data in Civilcad ASCII 5 (.AS5) file format.

Civilcad AS5 files are compatible with Civilcad versions 5 and 6 but not 4.

The point numbers are retained, with the option of adding a constant.

Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.

AS5 files can contain zero length arcs. This can result in extra circles if exported to DXF or DWG. If this happens, use CLEANSET to remove the zero length arcs.

TML date MenuSource 
02/12/13   File\Misc. import\Civilcad 5 AS5 Geocomp Update or $75  
 CVDEXPT

Export data to Civilcad Version 4 ASC.

Export pints, sets and text to Civilcad ASC file format.

Civilcad ASCII 4 (ASC) files are compatible with Civilcad versions 4 and 5 but not 6.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   File\Misc. export\Civilcad 4 ASC Geocomp Update or $75 FC C
 CVDIMPT

Import data from Civilcad Version 4 ASC.

Import data in Civilcad ASC file format.

Civilcad ASCII 4 (ASC) files are compatible with Civilcad versions 4 and 5 but not 6.

Include points, strings and text.

Layer names are retained and codes are imported as names.

Non-​contourable points in the ASC file are not included in Terramodel DTMs. EDIT and GC53 toggles this attribute.

Strings on a layer with common points are joined into sets.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   File\Misc. import\Civilcad 4 ASC Geocomp Update or $75 FC C
 DATAMINE

Import Datamine binary data.

Import a mine model in Datamine binary data file format.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $75  
 DCEDIT

DC File Editor

View or edit Trimble .DC files and Sokkia .SDR files.

You can also run the DC File Editor directly from Start... Programs... Trimble Office... Utilities... DC File Editor.

If you have a 32-bit version of Windows, type DCEDIT32 in the command line instead.

Alias date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Cogo\​Utilities\​Trimble DC file editor S  
 DDIST

Create a point at the intersection of two distances or arcs.

Solve for the intersection of two arcs or distances, and create a point object at the intersection.

DDIST uses two command bars that define the information required for the two distances (arcs) to be intersected. Each arc is defined by a centre point and distance or by selecting an arc segment to define the centre point and distance.

Distance-Distance Options

1st pt/arc
Select either a point or an arc.
Dist
If you select a point, enter a distance from the point in the distance control to the right. If you select an arc, enter a distance from the arc centre. The default distance is the radius.
OK
Click OK to display a ghosted circle to indicate the location of the first arc. Now enter a 2nd point or arc and a distance then pick a location with the mouse to indicate one of the two arc intersection solutions.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Cogo\​Lines\​Distance-​distance intersection S 11
 DEFANG

Determine the angle between two bearings.

The angle is displayed in the message area for cutting and pasting into an angle control.

TML date  SourceGC
29/10/08     S 91
 DELBLKS

Delete missing external blocks.

Delete all external blocks from the project where the external .BLK file is missing.

"Unable to find block" messages are often due to importing a DWG or DXF file containing links to missing external blocks.

If you still have "unable to find block" messages after running DELBLK, you probably have blocks that contain other blocks that are missing. You will need to EXPLODE these blocks then run DELBLKS again.

See also BLOCK List and BLOCK Purge.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Draw\Block\Delete missing Geocomp Update or $100  
 DELCROSS

Delete objects between two locations.

Delete all selected objects which cross the line anywhere between two locations.

You may want to run DUPLTRIS, GC58 or DISJOIN first.

See also DELETE​SEGMENT.

TML date  Source 
08/11/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 DELETE

Delete selected objects from a project.

Delete selected objects from a project.

You can prevent objects from being selected for deletion by Type with Search Settings and by Layer with LAYERSET.

Once you Delete the objects, it may be necessary to REDRAW your screen to view the changes.

If you Delete all of the points defining a set, the set is also deleted. If you have checked "Protect Pn in Use From Deletion" in Point Settings your points will remain intact if you have selected the points for deletion but not the attached set.

See also Delete​Segment.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Delete S 31
 DELETE​SEGMENT

Delete a selected segment from a set or pline.

Click on each segment in turn that you want to delete then click Close to close the command without deleting any other segments.

See also DELETE to delete the whole record, BREAK to break the segment at a location, HIDE to make set segments invisible and SEGEDIT to edit using a table of segments.

In Terramodel prior to 10.5, BREAK deleted set segments like DELETE​SEGMENT does now.

Possible aliases include BREAKSEG, DELETESEG, DELSEG and DS.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Delete line segment S 31
 DESC

Change numeric names to alphanumeric descriptors.

Change numeric names to alphanumeric names using a user-​defined descriptor mapping file (.pco)

See also CHNGNAME, IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.

Command date  SourceGC
29/10/08     S 76
 DESCAD

Change numeric names (point descriptors) to alphanumeric descriptors using a multi-code separator and global code identifier.

Uses a user-​defined descriptor mapping file (.pco)

See also IMPORT, DESC, GRP2NAME and LAY2NAME.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 76
 DESIGN

Project batters from a design DTM to another DTM.

Before using the Design command, make sure the entire design DTM layer is enclosed with one or more contiguous sets (such as a created by DTMEDGE).

Check or configure the slope attributes of each surrounding set with the Slopes option of EDIT.

The grade is applied in 3D from the set. This is different to simply grading to an offset and elevation. If the set has a steep longitudinal grade, the difference will be noticeable.

Whenever the Design command encounters an arc on the outside edge of the design DTM, it uses the Segments Per Arc setting of DISPLAYSET to break the curve into straight line segments. Points are created at these segments (along the curve) and are then projected to intersect with original ground. Set lines are created to connect the design curve points and the ground intersection points.

Ground intersection points, points along arcs, and sets that Terramodel creates are assigned the name of the design layer as their name. You can erase these points by selecting them by name. Name selection is case-sensitive.

See also DESIGNSET, CUTFILL, MOVEPAD and SIDESLOPE

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\Design S  
 DESIGN​ELEV

Modify elevation to design roadway elevation.

Modify the elevation of existing points so that they lie on the design surface of a designated road job.

Terramodel projects a perpendicular intersection from a location to the HAL to determine the chainage along the HAL and the offset from the HAL. The elevation of the point is interpolated by cutting a slice through the design surface at the station and offset.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Roads\​On design\​Design elev S  
 DESIGN​SET

Configure design settings

Configure the default batter slopes and smoothness assigned to new sets and vertical sight distance calculation parameters. These settings are stored with the project file.

Tie-in slopes
Cut slope/Fill slope
These vertical controls let you enter values for cut and fill slopes that will be assigned to newly created sets. The tie-in slopes are used by DESIGN to project the design DTM onto the existing ground DTM. Any change to these values will change the slope of all sets, except sets where the slopes have been fixed by EDIT.
Default set smoothness
Establish the set smoothness properties of sets as they are created. Always use Soft for the default unless you have a very good reason to change it temporarily. Smoothness can affects contour, cross section and profile plines, and surfaces in commands including TVLITE. See SETSMOOTH to change the smoothness of existing sets and for explantion of the different smoothness properties.
Vertical Curve Design Controls
Set the eye, object, and headlight distances that Terramodel will use when calculating the sight distances used for computing vertical curves based on AASHTO standards.
Eye Height
The distance from the road to the standard eye height of a driver.
Object Height, Stopping:
The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe stopping distance.
Object Height, Passing:
The distance from the road to the standard object height for computing the safe passing distance.
Headlight Height:
The distance from the road to the centre of the standard headlight beam.
Divergence Angle:
The angle of the standard headlight beam divergence.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Design settings S  
 DESPIKE

Remove spikes from a DTM.

Based on maximum grade and a boundary.

See also GC53 and GC69.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 GCGeocode
 DFEDIT

Data Format Editor

Edit logger (.lgr) files which contain the detailed data format used by the IMPORT and EXPORT script managers to interpret the data.

This editor uses DataFormatEditor.dll. If you have 32-bit Windows, type DFEDIT32 instead.

Alias date  SourceGC
20/06/13     User definable Coordf
 DIAG

Trimble diagnostic report

Report details of the computer relevant to Trimble applications including system architecture, Windows registry, Trimble applications and files.

If TrimRptU.exe does not run, install Trimble Data Transfer Utility and try again.

If you have 32-bit Windows, use or rename alias DIAG32 to DIAG.

Alias date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Cogo\​Utilities\​Trimble diagnostic report trimble.com  
 DIM

Label dimension between two points or a segment of set or pline.

You can dimension between two points or along a segment with text placed at a location.

Click Props to configure the labelling units, decimal places, and layer on which the labels will be placed.

General properties

DISTANCE TYPE (LINEAR/​HORIZONTAL/​VERTICAL)
Dimension the whole distance (Linear), or just the Horizontal or Vertical distance. In the plan view, Horizontal will dimension the change in the Easting coordinates, and Vertical will dimension the change in Northing coordinates between points or of the segment.
LAYER
Selects the layer on which to place dimension lines and text. If you select layer 0 (zero), Terramodel will use the current layer.
DIMENSION BLOCKS
Check this to store each dimension as a block. Dimension blocks are named dim n, where n is a sequential number. If you delete a dimension block object, Terramodel discards the block definition when the project is saved.
FORCE DIMENSIONS OUTSIDE
Check this box so that the arrows on the dimension lines point inward, when the text is placed outside of the extension lines. When this box is not checked, dimension line arrows point in the same direction when the dimension text is placed outside the extension lines. This option is not implemented when you locate the dimension labels within the extension lines.
FORMAT (ENGINEERING/​ARCHITECTURAL)
The Engineering format uses decimal project units (feet or metres) set by MEASUNIT. The Architectural format labels the text in feet, inches and fractional inches.
UNITS SUFFIX
Append this suffix to the end of the units labels. The number of characters you can enter in this control is dependent upon the font you are using.
SUB-UNITS SUFFIX
Append this suffix to the sub units (sheet units) portion of the label. Terramodel only uses sub units when dimensioning in the Architectural format. The number of characters is dependent upon the font.
NUMBER OF DECIMALS
Denote the precision for distance labels using the Engineering format.
Units Scale
Enter the factor for the calculated distance. For example, to convert feet to inches, enter 12.0.
FRACTIONAL INCREMENT
Select the precision of the Architectural format dimensions.

Text Properties

TEXT STYLE
Select the text style for font, height, aspect, and slant of the dimension text. The justification of the dimension text will always be Center-Middle, and the orientation will always be Legible.
TEXT COLOUR
Specify the colour for the dimension text.
DISTANCE FROM TEXT TO LINE
Enter a factor for the text height to determine the distance the text is placed away from the dimension line. If the dimension text is located to either side of the dimension line, this determines the distance from the dimension line to the beginning or the end of the text.
DRAW TEXT ABOVE DIM LINE
Place dimension text above the dimension lines or even with and between the dimension lines.

Line Properties

DRAW DIMENSION LINE
Enable dimension lines.
LINETYPE
Select the line type to be applied to the dimension line (usually a LEADER LINE).
COLOUR
Specify the colour for the dimension lines.
DRAW EXTENSION LINE 1
The Segment option creates and orders each pair of extension lines (dimension lines located outside of the dimension limits) based on the direction of the segment. Checking this box causes Terramodel to create the first extension line.
LINE TYPE
Select the line type to be applied to the first extension line.
DRAW EXTENSION LINE 2
Create the second extension line.
LINE TYPE
Select the line type for the second extension line.
COLOUR
Specify the colour for both extension lines.
LENGTH OF OUTSIDE LINES
Define the length of the outside dimension line in sheet units. This option is enabled only if you check Force Dimensions Outside and locate the dimension text outside the extension lines.
EXTENSION LINE GAP
Defines the offset (in sheet units) from the limits of the distance you are dimensioning to the beginning of the extension lines. If a dimension line begins within this gap area, the extension line at that location will be twice the gap value plus the height of the text, centred on the location.

When the dimension is created in a view with a vertical exaggeration, the dimension text will appear distorted if the view exaggeration changes.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 RG 1228 Draft\​Dimensioning S 91
 DISJOIN

Break sets and plines into segments.

This is different to EXPLODE, which explodes only sets and plines with complex linetypes.

DISJOIN does not break plines containing curves.

DISJOIN is an alias of GCUNJOIN.

See also JOIN.

TML date  Source 
15/11/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 DISPFEAT

Display feature attributes.

Report or label with text all of the selected records that have feature attributes.

Specify a layer and text style to label the records with EAT text or Report the attributes without creating the labels.

This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

See also FY_ATBED, FY_ATBEP, FY_ATBIN and FY_ATBOU.

TML date  Source 
20/01/14     Geocomp Update or $25  
 DISPLAY​SET

Control how objects are displayed.

Allows some objects to be partially displayed for quicker display redraw times.

Controls the number of pixels used to display points.

The view resolution segments per arc, spline, spiral and vertical curve controls not only the resolution on the display but also profile extraction from a DTM and similar functions.

For any curve, the maximum number of segments for all the components of a curve together is 100 otherwise the curve will not display correctly. For example, if arcs have 20 segments and spirals have 10, the total for Arc curves would be 10+20+10=40, and the total for Combining curves would be 10+20+10+20+10=70.

PLOTSET maintains an independent plotting resolution that enables you to plot curves to the plotter more smoothly than is generally required for display.

View Resolution Segments per
All curves are displayed as a series of short straight line segments, but maintain their full mathematical properties for computations. The greater the number of line segments the smoother the curve will appear, however the time it takes to draw the curves and the amount of memory required increases with the number of segments. All curves are saved with a view resolution of zero to minimize file size. The view resolution settings are also used when translating objects to other file formats.
Segments per Arc
Set the number of segments per circular curve. The 10 or above will make most arcs appear smooth unless the radius is large.
Segments per Spline
Sets the number of segments per splined pline. Splined lines are used primarily for contour lines. The recommended setting for most applications is 3. A setting of 0 displays the line as unsplined. A setting of 1 is invalid and will be drawn as a setting of 2. The maximum setting is 100.
Segments per Vertical Curve
Sets the number of segments per vertical curve. The recommended setting of 10 will make most vertical curves appear smooth.
Segments per Spiral Curve
Sets the number of segments per spiral curve. The recommended setting of 10 will make most spiral curves appear smooth.
Quick dynaviews
Toggles the display and plotting of objects through dynaviews. When toggled on, objects displayed through dynaviews will not appear within the dynaviews. Only the dynaview frame will be visible. This option speeds display and plotting when the objects drawn through the dynaview need not be viewed. This is particularly helpful when you are arranging dynaviews within the Sheet view mode.
Quick text
Toggles the way text objects are displayed and plotted. When toggled on, all text objects are displayed and plotted as text boxes. The text boxes will be drawn to the limits of the text objects and can be used to select and manipulate the text objects. When toggled off, text objects are displayed and plotted normally. The Quick Text setting does not affect the display and plotting of attribute text.
Quick EAT codes
Toggles the way embedded attribute text (EAT) codes are displayed and plotted. When toggled on, all EAT codes are displayed and plotted as the actual codes and not the interpreted value. When toggled off, EAT codes are displayed and plotted as the interpreted value.
Quick linetype
Toggles the way linetypes are displayed and plotted. When toggled on, all linetypes are displayed and plotted as solid lines, making both the display and plotting of lines faster. When toggled off, linetypes are displayed and plotted using their full definition.
Ignore hide
Toggles the way hidden set segments are displayed and plotted. When Ignore Hide is on, set segments hidden by HIDE are displayed and CONVERT converts hidden set segments to plines.
Hold DV scale
Toggles the way attribute text and the linetype scales are displayed and plotted within dynaviews. When toggled on, attribute text and linetypes are scaled within the individual dynaviews in which they are displayed, based on the scale assigned to the dynaview, as opposed to being based on the plot scale of the viewing mode in which the attribute text or line is drawn. This allows you to create multiple dynaviews showing the same object or even of the same viewport at varying scales. In this case, the attribute text and linetypes appear in accordance with their definition, regardless of subsequent alterations of the plot scale of the viewing mode in which these objects are drawn. When toggled off, attribute text and linetypes as displayed within a dynaview, are scaled based on the current plot scale of the target viewing mode, and their appearance will change as that plot scale is altered. Text objects are not affected by this setting. If a text object is smaller than the number of pixels set in the Text Box Size option of the Display Settings dialog box, it will also appear as a text box.
Drag Text Quick
Drag Text Quick sets the way text is displayed when you drag it. When its check box is checked, it distorts the text so the text can be dragged quickly. When its check box is not checked, it displays the text so you can read it when you drag it, which slows the process.
Point size
Set the size in pixels for a cross symbol for each point. For many high resolution graphics cards, point objects drawn with two or three pixels will enable you to see the points on the screen more clearly.
Text box size
This integer control sets the number of pixels used to determine when a text box will automatically be drawn. Text objects and attribute text that are smaller than the number of pixels you enter will be displayed as a text box. This setting speeds screen redraw by quickly drawing text as a box when it is too small to read on your display. If you set the text box size to 0, Terramodel will always draw the text characters. The Quick Text option displays your text as text boxes regardless of the height of the text in pixels.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Display settings S  
 DISTANCE

Display the distance between two locations.

Display the 2D distance between two locations defined by coordinates in From and To point controls.

The distance is displayed in the message scroll in both project units, and in sheet units at the view scale.

You have the option to also display the accumulative length which can be reset.

The locations can be limited by object snaps.

See also GC29 for 3D distances between points and along segments and these other commands that report distances: GC29UTM, REPORTS , GEOMINQ, GC3DSETS, GC75, GC81, LABELSEG, GCDIMLOT and GEOMRPTS.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Reports\​Distance S 17
 DIVIDE

Divide a line into intervals.

Create points along a set or pline at intervals.

You specify the number of segments, whether to divide one segment or an entire line, whether the points are moved to round number chainages, and whether to insert the points into sets.

See also 3D, GC28, PREDAREA, GC04, INTOSET, GCIN2SET and GC68.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\Point\Divide Line S 13
 DLGDOIN

Import a USGS DLG (optional format) file

Import a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format lines with elevations.

See Terramodel help for details.

Command dateGuide Source 
29/10/08 Terramodel Help   S  
 DLGDOOUT

Export a USGS DLG (optional format) file.

Export a United States Geological Survey Digital Line Graph-Optional format lines with elevations.

See Terramodel help for details.

Command dateGuide Source 
29/10/08 Terramodel Help   S  
 DLINE

Dimension between two locations.

Draw pline segments between locations and label the segments with text showing the length in metres to the specified number of decimal places.

See also LABGRADE and DIM.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 91
 DOC​UMENTS

List Terramodel documents.

List user guides, tutorials, manuals, charts, table, classes, notes, lists and help files installed with Terramodel Geocomp Update.

The associated sample data sets are installed into C:\Program files\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp\​Docs or C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp\​Docs.

These documents and data files are also on the Terramodel 10.61J distribution DVD.

See also HELP and GCHELP.

Command date Guide Menu Source  
20/06/13 Documents Help\​Documents Geocomp Update  
 DRAFTSET

Drafting settings.

Configure the text spacing, text offset distance, and other general drafting settings for the project.

Flip over angle
Configure the angle when attribute set segment labels are automatically flipped so that they can be read from left to right, from the right-hand side and the bottom of the sheet. Valid entries for this parameter are from 0° to 45°. If the value is set to 45°, the label will be upside down if read from the bottom of the sheet, but will appear correct when read from the right-hand side of the sheet. The angle should generally remain at 0° or 10°. This angle is applied to each dynaview so that the same labels can be oriented properly through multiple dynaviews.
Text clip margin
Set the amount of space around text objects, for CONTOUR, CLIP and HATCH when clipping lines to text. Typical values range from 0.3 to 0.5 times the height of the text object. This value also controls the spacing between text and its associated text border, with the exception of the Underline border style which uses the following offset distance value.
Offset distance from line/arc
Set the distance between a line or curve and its label. This value also controls the offset between the line generated by an Underline text border style and the first and second lines of text when that style is used. Typically, enter a value at least twice the diameter of your largest pen.
Space (%) between lines of text
Establish the spacing between lines of attribute text or lines of text objects. A typical value is 50% of the text height.
Fixed Detail Border Size
Configure the fixed height for all text borders with a Detail border style. Borders with other text border styles, vary in height according to the limits of the text and the above text clip margin.
Text Line Colours
Configure the colours for leader lines and borders associated with text. These global settings affect all text in the project file.
Leader Lines
The colour for text leader lines
Underlines
The colour for all text borders with Underline text border style
Margin Lines
The colour for all text borders with Margin text border styles.
Enclosed Borders
The colour for text with other text border styles.
Underline title Text Enlargement (%)
Increase the height of the first line of multi-line text with Underline text border style by this percentage (e.g. 20%). If you use PLOTSET to map the plotter pen selection to the text height, the first line use a different plotter pen.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Draft settings... S 90
 DRAPE

Create sets with 3D points where selected plines cross DTM links.

If there is no grade change at the link crossing, no point is created.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\Drape plines S 298+400+252
 DRAGHDIN

Import Drag Head log file.

 

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 DRAINRPT

Report drainage details to a CSV file.

Select drain sets and specify a lid layer.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 DGE 10
 DRILL01

Label a drill hole.

Label a drill hole with some properties of the collar point and drill hole.

The text label includes the name and coordinates of the collar point and the bearing and dip of the drill hole segment at the specified text location. The Settings button controls the text style.

The collar point does not have to be an end point of the drill hole segment.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 DRNGRADE

Label segment with grade and direction.

Label a segment with grade text parallel to the segment in two formats.

A pline with leaderline linetype showing direction is also drawn between the text and the segment.

See also LABGRADE .

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 DTM2LDBX

Export DTM layer to Leica 1200 DBX database files.

Export a DTM layer within a boundary to an XML file and convert to Leica 1200 DBX database using RoadRunnerAddOn.

The database files can be used with Road Runner or DigSmart3D on Leica 1200 instruments. The XML file can also be imported into UMC_3D for PowerGrade3D.

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH .

See also DTM2XML , ROAD_RUN, GCPTSOUT , GCMULXML, POWERGDE and PLAN2DBX .

TML date  Source 
25/09/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 DTM2XML

Export DTM layer to LandXML triangles.

Export a DTM layer to LandXML triangle.

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH.

See also DTM2LDBX , VRMLOUT and EXPORT LandXML script.

TML date  Source 
22/08/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 DTMALL

Refresh all DTMs toolbar button

Function key F12 Refresh all DTMs

Relink all DTM layers and redraw the display.

See also GCDTMALL which also creates arc breaklines, TOGLINKS which turns on and off link visibility without relinking and DTMUPDT which updates only the current DTM layer.

TML date MenuSource
20/06/13   Toolbar and DTM\​More...\​Update all DTM layers Geocomp Update or $25  
 DTMAREA

Report planimetric and surface areas of a DTM within slope ranges.

Report planimetric and surface areas of a DTM within slope ranges to the P3Pad report editor.

The slope ranges for which areas are to be reported are defined in the [Slope Table] section of the TMODWIN.INI file.

This table can be manually edited to configure a maximum of 100 slope ranges (by default 16).

To set the number of slope ranges, edit the TableSize=# variable. The lines in tmodwin.ini following TableSize define each slope range with boundaries defined by decreasing percentage slope.

The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH.

To visually check the extent of the DTM, use LINKSET to display the links.

See also SLOPE, GC44 and GC82.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\DTM area S 117
 DTMCH

Change the current DTM layer.

The current DTM layer is displayed in the Coordinate scroll box with the elevation, aspect and slope at the cursor.

To relink the current DTM layer only, use DTMUPDT.

The current DTM layer is not necessarily the current layer.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\​More...\​Change current DTM layer Geocomp Update or $25 1
 DTMCONE

Project a cone onto a DTM.

Radiate from a specified x, y location and a specified height difference from the DTM, to the specified DTM layer, in 5° increments.

Join the locations with a pline or join points at those locations with a set and radial sets to the centre point.

Enter a positive height if the centre is above the DTM; a negative height if the centre is below the DTM.

Enter a positive slope to project up; a negative slope to project down. The slope may be entered in any vertical angle mode: Z (degrees from zenith), H (degrees from horizontal), N (degrees from nadir), P or % (percent slope from horizontal), R (ratio of horizontal to vertical) or D (vertical distance).

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
20/06/13 RG 1251 DTM\Conical projection to DTM S  
 DTMDRAIN

Create set lines around drainage areas.

Create set lines along the boundaries of drainage areas of a DTM.

Options

DTM
Select the DTM for which you want drainage areas outlined with set lines.
DRAIN
Select the layer for the sets. The default layer is set in a HDEFS.
MIN HEIGHT
For very flat areas, it is possible to have small depressions that cause water to pond. Normally, DTMDRAIN would delineate them as drainage areas. This distance control lets you enter a depth to allow these areas to fill and overflow into adjacent areas. A depth greater than this minimum will cause DtmDrain to outline the area as a drainage basin. The default height is the Minimum drainage height setting in HDEFS.

The minimum height is used to eliminate small depressions and must be reviewed for the overall effect. A depression one foot deep with an area of 100 square feet can fill up quickly and overflow. A lake of many acres in area and one foot deep requires more thought as to the desired effect.

DTMDRAIN assumes that the water will drain to one side of a triangle. While mathematically the triangle would slope in one direction, the depth and velocity of the water entering onto the triangle may force the flow off an alternate side, causing portions of the water to actually drain to two or three sides. DTMDRAIN simplifies the drainage area calculations so that it can delineate areas based on edges of triangles, rather than attempting to subdivide the triangles. DTMDRAIN also assumes that each drainage area has consistent ground cover and flat triangles.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09 UG 401 Hydro\​Compute drainage S  
 DTMEDGE

Create a set around a DTM edge.

The set is on the DTM layer in the current colour.

The current link settings determine the extent of the DTM.

The DTM edge set locks the extent of the DTM, even against changes in link settings.

Multiple contiguous sets around a DTM will still function as a DTM edge, but allow DESIGN and MOVEPAD to use variable batters.

You can edit a DTM edge set using BREAK, SET and so on.

If there are any 3D points on the layer outside the DTM edge set, the DTM edge is invalid. GC22 checks for and fixes this.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\DTM edge S  
 DTMGRID

Interpolate a grid over a DTM.

Specify origin, bearing, intervals and boundary.

See also GCGENGRD, GRIDELEV, GRIDEXPT, GRIDMAKE, GRDPTS and TRMBGRID.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\Generate DTM grid S 221
 DTMINFO

List DTM information by layer for selected points.

List by layer, for the selected points, the Layer name, View names, number of records, number of points, number of 3D Points, number of 3D points not in DTM and the maximum and minimum Easting, Northing and Elevation.

The totals are summed and the ranges also computed for all the selected points.

The DTM status shows which layers have been linked and whether they are part of a Multilayer DTM.

The selected DTM layers relinked. If you want a report of duplicate points, run GC92 first.

See also LAYINFO, OLIST and LIST.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\​More...\​List DTM layers Geocomp Update or $25 290
 DTMMATCH

Match overlapping DTMs at a match line.

This process is typically required two merge two DTMs created by photogrammetry.

By matching the DTM layers, contour lines will match perfectly at the user specified match line. Alternatively the contour lines can be relayered and joined using JOIN. See also GCMATCH which matches contours only and GCMERGE which merges multiple DTMs.

DTM
Select two DTM layers to be matched
LINE
Select a pline along which the DTMs are to be matched
DEF
DTM Match Defaults dialog box
NORMAL MERGE
Specify the type of elevation adjustment to be applied to the points.
On
Each point will be adjusted by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the distance from the elevation of the point to its interpolated elevation to the other DTM layer. This method moves each point towards the other DTM. In the event the DTM layers cross in the overlap area, some points on each DTM may move up and others down. Generally this is the preferred method.
Off
Each point will be adjusted by the ratio of its offset distance from the match line to the maximum adjustment width, times the elevation from layer 1 to layer 2 on the match line perpendicular to the point being adjusted. This method moves each point based on the condition at the match line. If the DTM layers intersect in the overlap area, some points on each DTM may move away from the other DTM.
MAX ADJ WIDTH
Specify the maximum distance from the line in which points will be adjusted.

Tips on using DTMMATCH command

  • The objects on the matched layers can be relayered to the same DTM layer for relinking.
  • DTMMATCH makes significant modifications to the project data including deleting points. We strongly recommend that you keep a copy of the original data by using SAVEAS before you start.
  • If DTMMATCH is to be used several times in one project file, save your work at each step.
  • Before beginning DTMMATCH, you must have two DTM layers that overlap.
  • Along the overlap create a single-segment pline or set where two DTMs are to match. Only points that fall within the length of the segment will be erased.
  • Match lines should not be significantly longer than the limits of the DTM as this can prevent Terramodel from properly determining which points should be deleted.
  • Set lines that cross the match line are clipped. A point will be created to hold each clipped set. The DTMs will re-link if required.
  • Elevations of points that fall within the length of the line and the specified adjustment width will be adjusted according to the method specified. A set is created on each DTM along the match line through the points created. All points outside the match line for each DTM are deleted. The maximum elevation difference found along the match line, and the number of points adjusted, are reported.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\DTM Match S  
 DTMMATH

Create points by comparison with two DTMs.

Create new points on a third layer with elevations determined by a user-​defined mathematical formula which may include the elevations of the first and second specified DTMs.

In the Settings, specify the formula, whether to use the points from the first or second layers, or both and whether to report the results.

See also GC70.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     U  
 DTMPTS

Interpolate elevations of points from a DTM.

Assign elevations to 2D points from a DTM surface.

Points outside the limits of the DTM are not assigned elevations.

Only 2D points are be modified. To modify 3D points, first use GCNOELEV or ELEVATION (Absolute) to make the points 2D by giving them an absolute elevation of *.

See also ELEVOBJS which replaces elevations of point, text and blocks interpolated from a DTM.

See also GC70 which replaces elevations of both 2D and 3D points, and can also combine the point elevations with the DTM elevations.

See also GCPTSTXT which interpolates elevations from nearby text instead of a DTM.

See also DTMGRID, GRIDELEV, GC50, INT3DSET and ELVPLINE.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\DTM Pts S 236
 DTMSET

Create sets from DTM links.

Create a set for each link or triangle on a DTM layer.

Specify the new DTM layer, whether to create sets with three segments (triangles) or one segment (links) and whether to copy points to the new layer (or just the sets).

If these sets are used as breaklines in another DTM application, the resulting DTM will be similar.

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH .

If you are exporting to an application that prefers DXF or DWG 3DFaces, use the AutoCAD Export script instead.

See also GCDTMOUT, GSIDTMOU, QSGRIDOU, KORKDTM and TRMBTIN.

TML date MenuSourceGC
25/09/13   DTM\More...\Create sets from links Geocomp Update or $25 156+SDS-DXF
 DTMSHOT

Create a point on a DTM at a grade and bearing.

Create a point at the intersection of a theoretical 3D line and a DTM.

Specify a DTM layer, a start point, a bearing and a vertical angle.

The start point cannot be at the same elevation as the DTM.

The bearing and vertical angle units are controlled by UNITSSET.

See also GC23 and SLICE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\DTM shot S  
 DTMSTATS

Display the points with the highest and lowest elevations in a layer.

Display the points with highest and lowest elevations in a layer and list the point numbers, the elevation difference and the average elevation.

The highest and lowest points are marked with temporary circles; the bigger circle marks the higher point. The circles disappear on refresh.

All 3D points on the layer are considered including invisible and non-​contourable points. See also RANGE and EVALDTM.

TML date   Menu Source GC
20/06/13   DTM\DTM statistics S 169
 DTMUPDT

Relink the current DTM layer and refresh.

Use DTMCH to change the current DTM layer first.

GCARCBL creates breaklines around arcs, DTMALL relinks all layers and GCDTMALL does both.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\​More...\​Update current DTM layer Geocomp Update or $25 289
 DUMPATT

Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.

Report the attribute records stored for a selected object.

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     S  
 DUPLTRIS

Remove duplicated segments from triangular sets.

Remove segments from triangular sets which join the same points as a segment on another set.

Use DUPLTRIS to reduce the number of points and segments in an imported DTM.

To create a DTM surface with the same shape as the original used to create the triangles, create all triangle sides.

To allow the DTM to be reformed without flat triangles, only create the sets along the shortest triangle sides and enable "Remove flat triangles" in LINKSET.

Any point in a set with the same number as the previous point is removed. See also CLEANSET.

To simplify the shape of a DTM surface, see 3DFILTER.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 DXFCHANG

Relayer all layers in a DXF file according to a map file.

Relayer all layers in a DXF file according to a file which maps unique sequential numbers to layer names.

To export object names longer than 16 characters to AutoCAD or similar via DXF into layers:

  1. SAVEAS the project so you have a backup.
  2. GCMAPOUT to relayer selected objects onto layers with sequential names beginning with GC_GG and export a corresponding mapping file.
  3. Export objects to a .DXF file in Release 2000 format.
  4. DXFCHANG to create a new DXF file with layer names corresponding to the original object names according to the map file.

For object names up to 16 characters you could use NAME2LAY instead.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 DYNAVIEW

Create dynaviews.

Use a dynaview to display a portion of a view in another location.

For instance, you can create one dynaview around a part of the plan view, create a second dynaview around the same part in profile view, and combine these into a plan and profile sheet in sheet view. You can also create an enlarged view of a detailed area.

The advantage of a dynaview it that it is a dynamic view of the design, not just a copy. This saves memory, eliminates transposition errors and, when the design is updated, the dynaview is updated automatically.

Dynaview Options
BOX
Select the closed set or pline that defines the dynaview.
LOC
Enter the location of the origin for the new dynaview. The origin of a dynaview is the first vertex of the box pline.
SCALE
Set the scale at which the new dynaview is drawn. The default scale is the plot scale for the view of the selected Box. Use VIEWSET to preview or modify plot scale for any view.
ROT
Set the angle of rotation for the dynaview. The angle of rotation is measured clockwise relative to the closed polygon. The default angle rotates the dynaview so that its base aligns with the east-west axis.

See also PLANSET, MIRRORDY, FIXDYNA, MVIEW, SCLPLOTB, DISPLAYSET, LLIST and SCLBLKS.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\DynaView S 93
 EARTHWORK

Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs.

SETTINGS
Configure how volumes will be computed and reported.
ACCUMULATE VOLUMES
When checked, Terramodel adds previously calculated volumes to the volumes being calculated. You enter previous cut and fill volumes in the real number control shown. The default values will be the cut and fill totals from the last volume calculation. If the box is not checked, the Previous excavation and Previous fill options will be greyed out.
SHRINK/SWELL FACTORS
These real number controls let you enter factors which will be applied to calculated volumes to obtain excavation and fill quantities. Note: Generally, only the fill factor should be varied, leaving the excavation factor at 1.0.
COMPUTATION METHOD
VOLUMES TOTALS ONLY
When the Volume Totals Only option is selected, only the total volumes will be reported.
VOLUMES BY DEPTH INCREMENT
When the Volumes by Depth Increment option is selected, the excavation/fill volumes calculations will be reported by a depth increment. When this setting is selected, you may enter the desired reporting interval in the real number control immediately to the right.
VOLUMES BY ELEVATION RANGE
When the Volumes by Elevation Range is selected, the excavation/fill volumes calculations will be reported by elevation range. When this setting is selected, you may enter the desired reporting interval in the real number control immediately to the right. Terramodel uses the value entered in the index elevation control as a basis for calculating the intervals. For example, if the interval is 2 metres, the index elevation is 100.5 metres, and the elevation range of the excavation/fill area is 98.5 to 106.5, the volumes are calculated for 98.5-100.5, 100.5-102.5, 102.5-104.5, 104.5-106.5, etc. As you can see in this example, Terramodel automatically finds the minimum and maximum elevations for the excavation/fill volume and reports the volumes over the entire elevation range.
ISOPACH DATA CREATION
SAVE COMPUTED ISOPACH
When checked, the isopach surface will be stored on the selected layer. When not checked, the isopach surface is computed in the same manner and then automatically deleted.
ISOPACH COLOURS
Select the colours for points in areas of excavation, points in area of fill in the isopach, and breaklines.
SURFACE TO SURFACE
Compute and report cut and fill volumes between two DTM surfaces.
SURFACE TO DATUM
Compute and report cut and fill volumes between a DTM surface and a datum.
STOCKPILE
Compute and report the volume of a measured stockpile, based on an assumed underlying surface.
DEPRESSION
Compute and report the volume of a measured depression or excavation, based on an assumed original surface.
ISOPACH
Compute and report cut and fill volumes associated with a previously stored isopach surface.

Tips on using EARTHWORK command.

DTM
A Digital Terrain Model is also referred to as a Triangulated Irregular Network or TIN.
Isopach
The isopach surface is the surface representing the difference between two other surfaces. Isopachs are contours extracted from the isopach surface. CONTOUR or TVLITE the saved isopach surface to check for erroneous data in the other surfaces.
Quick isopach generation
For an accurate volume, make sure Quick isopach generation in LINKSET is OFF so that all the intersection points between the triangles are included in the isopach surface.
Pond Volumes
The volume of water displayed is the excavation volume rather than the fill volume.
Initial Surface to Design Surface Volumes
If your design surface has batters to an existing surface, project the batters using DESIGN or SIDESLOPE before calculating volumes to insure that the design sideslopes are projected. Otherwise, vertical sideslopes may be projected up or down.
Surface to Surface Computation
Surface-to-surface volumes are calculated by computing the isopach between two DTMs or between a datum and a DTM. First, each point is projected onto the other surface, the corresponding elevation interpolated, and the elevation difference is stored with the generated isopach point. The breaklines (of both surfaces are used to generate isopach breaklines. Additional points are inserted into the isopach breaklines where they cross DTM triangles.
Computation
The triangulated isopach surface is used to determine the volume by breaking the data for each triangle into the appropriate number of truncated vertical prisms. If the three points of a triangle all have positive or all have negative elevations (all fill or all cut) then a single triangular prism is present. If the isopach triangle has both positive and negative elevations (cut and fill) then the triangle is broken into a triangular prism and a quadrilateral prism. See Terramodel Help for this command for illustrations.
The volume of each prism is equal to the average height (that is isopach elevation) times the planimetric area. The total fill volume for the isopach is the sum of all positive prismoidal volumes. The total cut volume is the sum of all negative prismoidal volumes.
This method is more accurate than cross section or grid methods using average end area. The differences obtained between methods depend on the size of the grid or interval of cross sections and irregularity of the surfaces. Smooth surfaces may show differences of less than 1%. Some test cases have shown differences of as much as 10% when the cross section interval is 50 foot and the terrain is rough. As the size of the grid or cross section interval decreases to a very small value, the volumes of these methods agree with volumes computed from the isopach surface triangles.
The accuracy of the calculations is no better than the accuracy of the data and the calculated DTM. If breaklines are not properly used to form the proper TIN, good point data can produce bad volumes. If an insufficient number of points are used to describe a surface, then irregularities from the recorded data to the actual ground will produce volumes differing from field conditions.
Additional points
To roughly estimate how many extra points you must allow for when setting the maximum number of points in Terramodel, using SYSTEM command, add the number of points in the two surfaces and multiply by two. Terramodel has a limit of 8 million points. Some of these points will be duplicate. A point is duplicate if it is on the same layer and is within 1 mm. Duplicate points are often created when computing the isopach surface, especially if a boundary line is used. Duplicate points are relayered to layer 0 during the linking process. These points can then be deleted from layer 0 to save space.
Special Case: Link setting "remove flat triangles"
Normally triangles are created to be as equilateral (equal interior angles) as possible. The "remove flat triangles" setting in LINKSET changes the DTM to eliminate, as much as possible, flat areas. This technique is usually used on data from imported contours, forcing each triangle to have a slope. If the points along a set line are within a tolerance of the first point on the set line then flat triangles are removed. Adding and or removing break lines may be required to achieve the desired results. Note that "flat" lines in DXF and DWG files are automatically imported as plines, so you have to CONVERT to sets.
DTM Edge
Once you have the correct link settings for a DTM, use DTMEDGE to fix the boundary to with a bounding set. Then you can change link settings on another surface without affecting the first surface.

See also GC20, SHADEISO, GCEARTH and XVOLUMES.

EARTHWORK command was previously known as VOLUME.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help DTM\​Earthwork volumes S DTM 3
 EARTHWRK

Create an earthwork report.

See also GCEARTH and XVOLUMES.

If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

Command date Guide Menu Source GC
29/10/08 RG 1005 Roads\​Reports\​Earthwork... S 471
 EDIT

Edit any object.

Edit these properties of any object according to object type.

Sets
A set is a string of straight or arc segments joining point objects.
  • Replace a point with another point.
  • Insert a point into a set before a selected point.
  • Append a point to the end of a set.
  • Delete a selected point from the set. If the set contains only two points, the entire set is deleted.
  • Reverse the order of the points. See also REVERSE.
  • Change the set Smoothness. See SETSMOOTH.
  • Reorder the points of the set so that the selected point becomes the first point in the set, the next point becomes the second and so on.
  • Swap the first specified point with the second specified point
  • Toggle the subtended angle of an arc between > and < 180°.
  • Change cut and fill Slope values.
  • Open or close the set. A closed set connects the first point and last point with a set segment.
  • Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent) and start chainage.
Plines
A pline is a string of straight or curved segments with a single elevation.
  • Move an IP (PI, intersection point, control point, cp or vertex) from one location to another
  • Insert a vertex before the selected vertex
  • Append one or more vertices to the end of the pline
  • Delete the selected vertex
  • Reverse the order of the vertices of a selected pline.
  • Spline or desplines the pline
  • Reorder the vertices of a pline
  • Swap the first specified vertex with the second specified vertex
  • Close or open the pline
  • Undo the last change to pline
  • Change CAD properties: layer, colour, linetype, group, name, reference object (parent), start chainage, elevation
Text
  • If the text was created by LABELSEG, segment point numbers are displayed. Use LABELSEG to edit these text objects.
  • Copy text from another text object
  • Enter up to 255 characters of text
  • Origin is the text insertion location
  • Elevation
  • The bearing orients the text.
  • Open the Eat Code Insertion Aid Dialog Box
  • Leader line colours are set globally by DRAFTSET.
    • Select the leader line style, indicating the use of a leader line, or [none]. If the subject text is a segment label, you can also select the Crows Feet style (dimension arrows). Toggle crow's feet with CROWFOOT.
    • Select leader line linetype. The leader line is drawn from the subject being labeled to the text
    • Designate the location to which the leader line points. The leader line will normally point to the subject of a callout, but it can actually point anywhere you wish
    • Assign a gap in project units between the leader line point and the beginning of the leader line. If the gap is expressed as negative, the gap scales with the view scale
  • Select the border style and linetype. See also DRAFTSET
  • The attributes of a subject of the text object can be used in EAT codes
  • An alignment from which the callout's subject can be locate for EAT codes which display a chainage and offset
  • EAT Extended attribute text
  • Text Metrics. See TEXTMETRIX.
  • Change CAD Properties: layer, colour, group, reference object (parent)
Blocks
  • Change properties: layer, colour, group, reference object, name, origin, elevation, auto scale, map colour, auto rotation, and subject point number
  • The block can be scaled in X, Y and Z, and rotated about those axes.
  • If the block is tied to a point number, the point and block will move together.
  • If AutoScale is ON, the block changes size with the view scale
  • If Map Colour is ON for this block, the block is displayed in the block colour. If OFF, in the colours of the objects in the block. When a block is first created, the block colour is the same as the line colour of the layer.
  • If Auto rotation is ON, the block is rotated so that it is displayed through a dynaview so it can be read from the left or bottom of a sheet.
  • If you change the block name, the appearance will change to match the appearance of any existing block with the new name.
  • Use commands like BLOCK, UNITBLK, MKBLKINT, SCLBLKS and AUTODRAFT to control block placement.
Dynaviews
  • Change properties: layer, name, auto off, group, boundary, layer list name, scale, rotation and location.
  • If Auto off is ON, this turns off the display of objects that are referenced and not a part of the family tree.
  • The boundary is the closed pline that defines the extent of the dynaview.
  • You can limit each dynaview to display only those layers on a nominated layer list. See LLISTSET.
  • The dynaview is located at the first vertex in the boundary pline
Points
  • Change properties: point number, layer, colour, group, name, contourability, location, elevation and label.
  • See LABELPOINT for point labelling.
Tables
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Edit object S 32
 ELE2NAME

Change the name of selected points and plines to match the elevation.

Change the name of selected points and plines to match the elevation.

If the current name is not blank, you can overwrite, prefix or suffix.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 ELEV​ALONGSET

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points within a particular set based on their position along the set with respect to a 3D reference point in that set, and a vertical angle.

If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, Terramodel multiplies the implied slope by the horizontal distance between the points along the set's alignment, and adds the resulting change in elevation to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

This command is similar to ELEVREFPT, except that the distance between the selected point and the reference point is determined along the horizontal alignment of a set within which they are both members.

See also ELEVREFPLANE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Modify\​Elevation\​Along set S  
 ELEV​ATION

Modify the elevation of selected objects.

Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.

Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.

Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.

One way to balance earthwork is to repeatedly change the relative elevation of the design DTM by layer then repeat to project new sideslopes.

Replaced by GCELEV which does the same thing but with better labelled radio buttons.

See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Modify\​Elevation\​Elevation S 9
 ELEV​OBJS

Interpolate elevation of points, text and blocks from a DTM.

Replace the elevation of selected points, text and blocks by interpolating from the DTM.

See also DTMPTS which only adds elevations on 2D points and GCPTSTXT which takes the elevation from the value of the nearest text object.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\​Elevation\​From DTM Geocomp Update or $25 237
 ELEV​REFPLANE

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points by projecting them vertically to an imaginary plane surface.

The plane surface is defined with respect to a 3D reference point by specifying a bearing, and a vertical angle.

The vertical angle is applied in the direction of the indicated bearing, establishing the tilt of the plane surface, which passes through the reference point.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.

See also ELEVREFPT.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Modify\​Elevation\​Reference plane S  
 ELEV​REFPT

Modify the elevation of points along a set using a vertical angle

Modify the elevation of selected points based on their horizontal distance from a 3D reference point and a vertical angle relationship.

If the specified vertical angle is other than a vertical distance, the implied slope will be multiplied by the distance between the points, and the resulting change in elevation will be added to the elevation of the reference point to compute the elevation of the selected point.

If the specified vertical angle is entered as a vertical distance, it will simply be added to the elevation of the reference point to get the elevation of the selected points.

If *
The selected point's elevation will always be set to the computed elevation.
If <
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is less than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
If >
The point's elevation will only be altered if the computed elevation is greater than the point's existing elevation, or if the point is currently a 2D point.
Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Modify\​Elevation\​Reference point S  
 ELFS

Show elevation and grade of a profile at a chainage.

The chainage can be keyed-in or selected graphically in the profile view.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Elevation at chainage U  
 ELLIPSE

Create an ellipse.

Select a pline segment for the major axis, the width of the minor axis and the number of segments in the pline.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Draw\​Pline\​Ellipse Geocomp Update or $25  
 ELTXT

Create points at the insertion point of selected text with elevations from the text.

Create point entities using the insertion point of the text for the coordinates of the point. The text string is the source of the elevation assigned to the point.

See also TEXT2PT for one point at a time and TEXT2PNT which also does blocks.

This feature can be used to convert points on 2D plans, where the elevations are presented as text labels, to 3D.

Since the insertion point of the text will not usually match the point that the text refers to, some bulk shifting or editing may be required.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     U 317
 ELV​PLINE

Average contour elevations.

Modify the elevation of selected plines to the average of the elevations interpolated from the specified DTM at the vertices of each pline.

The elevations are rounded to the nearest interval in the current CONTOURSET command settings. Use ELVPLINE to convert 2D plines to contours when you have the DTM.

See also GCCONTXT and PLTO3D.

TML date MenuSource 
29/10/08   Modify\​Elevation\​Pline elev. from DTM S  
 EMXSALIGN

Import a GeoPak alignment report

Read a specific GeoPak alignment file format.

See also RDSCACALN and RDSGPALIGN.

TML date  Source 
29/10/08     S  
 ERR_ELIP

Define error ellipse attributes

Define attributes on selected points derived from any error ellipse blocks attached to the points.

These points can then be labelled with attributes using EAT TEXT.

RDE can create elliptical blocks indicating the possible error by least squares. These blocks are circles which are scaled by the errors in x and y, then scaled again by 1000 so they are readily visible, then rotated.

Requires the attribute definition file ERR_ELIP.ADF.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 EVALDTM

Evaluate a DTM

Report potential problems with DTM breakline formation.

For each set in a DTM layer, report:

  • Unused segments
  • 2D Points
  • Non-​contourable points
  • Points on different layers

Every straight set segment which connects two 3D contourable points on the same layer is a breakline unless it is crossed by another breakline with a higher record number.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\Evaluate DTM surface Geocomp Update or $100 140
 EXEC

Execute an external program

Use arguments to specify the external program and pass variables. This is often used with ALIAS.

See also RUN.

Command dateGuide SourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help   S 200
 EXIT

Exit Terramodel

Save recent changes to objects, close the current project and exit Terramodel.

If you have made changes to objects since the last save, you will be prompted to save changes. If you have changed project variables only, save changes before exiting.

When you save changes, records are renumbered to remove any gaps in the sequence of record numbers caused by deleting objects.

See also RUN.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\Exit S 0
 EXPLODE

Explode blocks, text and complex linetypes

Explode selected blocks into component parts, and text and complex linetypes into plines.

Optionally, delete the old objects.

The exploded components are created on the current layer only. Use GCEXPLOD instead to explode to the same layer as the block while and retain the elevations and names.

Blocks are exploded into the component plines, text and blocks. Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to explode more blocks.

Text containing EAT codes is exploded into ordinary text. Ordinary text is exploded into plines. Text linked to points, such as dimensions, loses those links.

Sets and plines with complex linetypes are exploded into plines and symbol text. Solid lines are unaffected. If you want to separate a line into segments, use DISJOIN instead.

To select or restrict by Type, such as blocks but not text, use SEARCH settings or Right mouse button Type.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\Explode S  
 EXPLORE

Windows Explorer toolbar button

Open Windows Explorer.

Open Windows Explorer file manager.

Windows Explorer is also known as Explore, My Computer and Computer.

Alias date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Toolbar user definable  
 EXPORT

Export data using scripts.

Using a system of programmable scripts, export to a wide range of file formats. The formats include various data collectors and survey instruments, ASCII, AutoCAD (dwg and .dxf), TDS, Carlson, LandXML, Microstation DGN and Terramodel PRO.

You can also upload the file to some survey instruments.

The Export Script Manager EXPORTSMGR controls the scripts, including which scripts are listed on the menu. See also IMPORT and DFEDIT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Import-​Export Help, UG, FDM UG File\​Export/​Upload S 188,​FC D,​FC I
 EXPORTGC

Export or report cross sections in Geocomp format.

Given a road job surface, create a Geocomp .CES cross section file or a detailed cross section report similar to that produced by Geocomp RDP 482, or both.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $75 402,482
 EXPORT​SMGR

Export script manager.

Open the Export script manager where you can create, edit, and delete export scripts.

You can also run an export script from the script manager by selecting the script and clicking the Run button.

For Help, Press F1 while creating a script.

The scripts are stored as files of the same name in the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​ImportExport\ folder. If the script file name is ticked, the script is visible on the EXPORT menu and the file extension is .xi. If not ticked, it is not visible, and .xi_.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\​Export/​Upload\​Export script manager S  
 EXPORTXS

Export cross section data in Terramodel .XSC format.

Export or list a selected surface from a roadway as cross sections in Terramodel .XSC file format with a chainage range.

Specify Segment 1, unless you are using chainage equations.

The report includes the offset and elevation of each point at each chainage.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     S  
 EXTEND

Extend a line to boundaries or by a distance.

If "To bdy" is ticked, extend a pline or set to the first of the selected boundaries.

If "To bdy" is not ticked, extend by a specified distance.

The end of the line is moved to the new location, with the option of creating a new point at the previous end location.

Spirals and vertical curves cannot be extended.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Edit\​Extend S 276
 FAVORITES

Favourite commands.

Edit a history of up to 30 Terramodel favourite and most recently used commands.

Commands from this history are available by right-​clicking in the graphics area when prompted for a Terramodel command.

Enable command completion to anticipate commands from this history as you type.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\​System configuration\​Favorites S 201
 FBLOCK

Import ASCII points into square regions in separate project files.

Import ASCII points into separate Terramodel project files for each square data region of the nominated size. The input data format is assumed to be E N Z or E,N,Z. Blank lines and lines starting with '#' are ignored.

For example, if the region size is 1000m, all points with X between 0 and 1000 and also Y between 0 and 1000, are added to one Terramodel project, whereas those points with X between 0 and 1000 but Y between 1000 and 2000, would be added to a different Terramodel project file, and so on.

Project Variable MAX_​NUMBER_​OF_​FILES restricts the number of files open. The default is 100.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     S  
 FILLET

Create a curve by radius at the intersection of two set segments or two pline segments.

  1. Select the first segment using the Seg1 locate control.
  2. Select the second segment that intersects the first using the Seg1 locate control.
  3. Input the radius for the arc using the Radius distance control.
  4. Specify whether to trim the two selected line segments using the Trim check box. When the box is checked, the lines are trimmed to the point at which the fillet arc is added. If a radius of 0 is used, the lines will be trimmed to the point at which the lines intersect.
  5. Click OK to create the fillet.
Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Arc\​Fillet S 73
 FILTER

Filter vertices in plines.

Replace selected plines with plines made up of straight segments within a filter "box". This will usually reduce the number of vertices for plines containing straights, such as contours, and increase the vertices for splines, arcs and spirals.

The initial filter box is of the specified length and orientated to the first segment on the pline with width perpendicular to the segment.

FILTER checks for additional vertices that are contained within the limits of the filter box. Any vertices inside the box are discarded. The first vertex found outside the box is kept, and the last discarded vertex inside the box is added back to the pline. The tube is then reoriented based on the last two vertices, and the process is repeated.

See also BLFILTER, GCFILTER and SETFILT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Pline\​Filter S DTM F
 FIXCURVE

Move three-​point-​arc points onto tangents.

Move the end and centre points of three-​point-​arcs onto the line of adjacent straight segments.

In selected sets, for each pair of adjoining arc segments with equal radii, where the first and last surveyed points are approximately tangent points (TPs) and the adjoining set segments are straight, move each "TP" along the adjoining straight until both are exactly tangential and move the centre point so the radii remain equal.

You can also interpolate new elevations along the tangents.

Three-​point arcs are represented by pairs of adjoining arc segments with equal radii. To create a three-point arc, select three points using GC3PTARC, use a POC (point-on-curve) global code in AUTODRAFT or import Geocomp three-​point-​arc strings using GCIMPORT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 FIXDTM

Fix breaklines connected to duplicate points in layer 0.

For each set on the selected DTM layer, wherever the set is connected to a point on layer 0, and there is another point on the selected layer at the same X and Y location, change the set to connect to the point on the DTM layer instead.

For any such points found, P3Pad reports the point numbers and "Swapping point number in set".

When duplicate contourable points are on a layer and any DTM is formed, one of the points is relayered to layer 0. If one of the points is connected to a set, the point in the set is usually changed so to enable the breakline and "Set Node changed" is shown in the message scroll. Use FIXDTM command when the automatic DTM formation does not correct the point number in the set.

GC31 will also fix this problem.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 FIXDYNA

Replace dynaviewed plotboxes with new plotbox records.

Create a new plotbox pline to replace each selected plotbox which has an associated dynaview and change the parent of the dynaview to the new plotbox.

You can also delete the old plotbox and plines and text referring to the plotbox.

Use FIXDYNA when you have many dynaviews, and visibility of objects in some dynaviews is incorrect because you have lost track of object referencing.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 FIXLAYERS

Fix layers.

Repair layers that cannot be used to compute end-area volumes.

When you delete multiple empty layers using LAYERSET in Terramodel 10.20 only, LAYERSET can corrupt a layer attribute in the project so that Terramodel cannot compute volumes by end-area using commands such as AVGEND, EARTHWRK and TEMPLATE, and materials are not shaded in colour.

Fix these layers in the current project by running FIXLAYERS at the Terramodel command line.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     S  
 FLIPDOWN

Copy objects from an elevation view into a plan view.

Copy selected objects from an "Elevation" view into a plan in a selected "Plan" view.

The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes.

See also FLIPUP, BGELEV and GC56.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Cogo\​Flip\​Flip down Geocomp Update or $100  
 FLIPUP

Copy objects from a plan view into an elevation view.

Copy selected objects from a plan view into an "Elevation" drawing in a selected view.

The chainage of the point along the selected baseline determines the x-coordinate, while the elevation of the point determines the y-coordinate position.

The objects maintain the layer, colour and linetype of the original points.

The name of the new object is the original name plus the baseline name and original point number, X, Y and Z.

The objects are referenced to the original object. This enables you to label a point with the original point number, elevation, etc. using EAT codes.

See also FLIPDOWN, BGELEV and GC56.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Cogo\​Flip\​Flip up Geocomp Update or $100  
 FONTCHNG

List or change fonts of selected text.

Report which fonts (typefaces) are used by selected text objects or change all selected of that font to a specified font.

Use this to fix text with incorrect fonts.

The From list shows only fonts used by any of the selected text.

The To list lists alphabetically all fonts which have been loaded into Terramodel or listed in p3server.ini.

If Terramodel cannot find a corresponding FNT file for a font, the font of the text is still changed to that font, but is displayed with the default font, usually TMODELF. To add a new font to the To List, place the FNT file into the fonts folder, specify that font in TEXTMETRICS or STYLESET, then add to the ini file when prompted.

See also LISTFONT and TEXTMETRICS.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Modify\​Text\​Font Geocomp Update or $100  
 FORESTRD

Apply horizontal design to a road alignment.

Select a registered HAL of IPs, check the settings and then press Enter. The result is a road fully designed in horizontal, including fitting of curves, templates, transitions, super­elevation and widening. In conjunction with VAL Editor, design a long road in minutes!

Keep any of your existing curves, superelevation, widening, xlines, and existing profile, or update them.

The settings include design speed, default cross slope, pavement and shoulder width and widening ratio.

Great for forest, haul and mountain roads where the same design criteria apply for most of the length.

Use WALK to get the initial alignment if based on constant grade, otherwise just pick some IPs. Use RDVALEDIT to design the vertical alignment. Then modify your horizontal and vertical design to accommodate variations such as intersections.

FORESTRD and a prototype file are customised according to your requirements which could match those of any road authority. The default is setup for NSW RTA and Forestry Tasmania.

See also FORESTTB.

TML date  Source 
Custom     POA  
 FORESTTB

Report offsets for a forest road

Use with FORESTRD.

TML date  Source 
Custom     POA  
 FRGOUT

Export FM 700 Full Road Geometry (.FRG) file.

Specify the centreline HAL of a road and records to set out and export this to an .FRG file. This file can then be used to store the full road geometry on Nikon DTM-800 series and Zeiss total stations running Fast Map 700 Road Engineer software. This can then be used for checking and setting out complex surfaces and alignments.

FM700 has built-in Quality Assurance. The default HAL is the active alignment, if set. If the VAL is picked, the elevations are the difference between the height of the object and the VAL, otherwise the elevations are from the points.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 F7

Function key F7

Toggle point number labels.

Label points with point numbers. Run F7 again to turn point numbers off.

Replace any point labels placed by F9 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the point numbers toggle and the visibility of the elevation and name labels is unchanged.

Other point symbols and other blocks are unchanged.

The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.

The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.

The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These point labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draft\​Label points with numbers Geocomp Update or $25 F7,136
 F8

Function key F8

Toggle circle symbols.

Label points with circle symbols (symbol 40). Run F8 again to turn circle symbols off.

Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged.

The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.

The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.

The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.

See also F8C which allows you to control the symbol number and size and F8T which places a temporary marker.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Draft\​label points with circles Geocomp Update or $25  
 F8C

Toggle preset symbol.

Label points with preset symbols. Run F8C again to turn preset symbols off.

Blocks, point labels and other symbols are unchanged.

To preset the symbol, use PROJECTV to create or set the Integer project variable "F8C:​Symbol_Number" to the desired symbol. The default symbol is 34 (+).

The symbol size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.

To preset the symbol size, use PROJECTV to create or set the Double project variable "F8C:​Symbol_Height" to the desired height in sheet units. The default height is 0.10.

The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.

The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.

See also F8 which uses symbol 40 (circle) and F8T which places a temporary marker.

To make F8C readily accessible, launch with the F8 function key using an ALIAS from F8C to F8.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 F8T

Place temporary markers on points.

Place temporary markers on all points in visible layers.

The marker size is dependent on the current view scale.

The markers are temporary and disappear after refresh. They are not plotted.

The marker colour is not the same as point colour.

Blocks, symbols and point labels are unchanged.

To make F8T readily accessible, launch with the F8 function key using an ALIAS from F8T to F8.

See also F8 and F8T.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 F8,137
 F9

Function key F9

Toggle elevations.

Label points with elevations. Run F9 again to turn elevations off.

Replace any point labels placed by F7 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the elevations toggle and the visibility of the point number and name labels is unchanged.

Point symbols, blocks and other point labels are unchanged.

The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.

The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.

The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draft\​Label points with elevations Geocomp Update or $25 F9,138
 F11

Function key F11

Toggle names.

Label points with names (descriptions). Run F11 again to turn names off.

Replace any point labels placed by F7, F9 or F11 with different predefined point labels so that the only the names toggle and the visibility of the point number and elevation labels is unchanged.

Point symbols, blocks and other point labels are unchanged.

The size is dependent on the current view scale at time of creation. To change the size, change the view scale with VIEWSET or VIEWSCAL then toggle off then on.

The colour of the label is the same as the point colour.

The point labels are the same as those placed by LABELPOINT. These labels are intended for quick use while editing your data. If you are drafting, use LABPT, BLOCK or AUTODRAFT instead for control over colours, size, layers and so on.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draft\​Label points with names Geocomp Update or $25 F10,110
 FY_ATBED

Edit feature attributes.

Copy feature attributes of a parent object onto selected objects.

If the parent object does not have feature attributes, enter feature attribute names and values using a dialog.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

See also DISPFEAT, FY_ATBEP, FY_ATBEP and FY_ATBOU.

TML date  Source 
28/07/14     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FY_ATBEP

Export feature attributes to CSV.

Export feature attributes of selected objects to a comma-separate values (.CSV) file.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

See also DISPFEAT, FY_ATBED, FY_ATBIN and FY_ATBOU.

TML date  Source 
28/07/14     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FY_ATBIN

Import feature attributes from a Trimble DC file.

Import all feature Attribute codes from a selected Trimble DC points file.

This method allows you to define and import many attributes for each point like a GIS.

The steps are:

  1. Upload a feature code table that uses Feature Attributes to a Trimble survey instrument
  2. Conduct a feature survey using those field attributes
  3. IMPORT the DC file using a script such as "Trimble raw survey data (dc)"
  4. Use FY_ATBIN to import the Feature Attributes from the same DC file onto the corresponding points.

Run FY_ATBIN immediately after you import the DC file and before you do anything that could change point numbers.

This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

See also DISPFEAT, FY_ATBED, FY_ATBEP and FY_ATBOU.

TML date  Source 
28/07/14     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 FY_ATBOU

Export feature attributes to MapInfo files.

Export feature attributes of objects on a selected layer list to a Mapinfo MIF file and a matching MID file.

The attribute names are written to the .MIF file and the corresponding values are written to the .MID file. Elevations can be included.

Feature attributes can be defined with a Name, Value and Date/Time.

This command requires FEATURES.ADF which is also supplied.

See also DISPFEAT, FY_ATBED, FY_ATBEP and FY_ATBIN.

TML date  Source 
28/07/14     Feature Attribute TML bundle @ $400  
 GARMININ

Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

Import a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GARMINOU

Export a Garmin GPS Waypoint (.wpt) file.

 

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC01

Remove characters in a name by a range of character positions.

Nominate the start and end character positions. The range is inclusive.

To remove characters within the range, select Delete.

To retain only those characters within the range, do not select Delete.

The values are stored as project variables.

Note that for text objects, the name is the same as the text value.

See also SNR.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\More...\​Truncate name Geocomp Update or $25 rdes
 GC02

Change the name of selected points to include chainage and offset from HAL.

Optionally include chainage, offset, label HAL Pts and append or replace.

See also NFS for chainage only.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\More...\​Name by Ch+Offset Geocomp Update or $25 176
 GC03

Report chainage and offset from HAL and VAL.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev and Name of selected points, relative to a horizontal and vertical alignment.

You can also

  • List Easting and Northing
  • List vertical differences to a specified Design DTM
  • Extend the alignment past the end of the HAL record

In Settings, you can specify

  • Text for headings (up to five)
  • Text for a footer
  • Whether to create a .CSV file
  • Whether to include Design Easting, Northing and Elevation at the alignments in the .CSV
  • Whether change the Point Names to show the Point number, horizontal offset, and elevation difference.

The report includes any pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

Chainages are measured horizontally. See GC14 to use sloping chainages.

See also GC03A to use a master HAL or GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date MenuSourceGC
06/03/14   Reports\​More...\​Chainage and offset Geocomp Update or $25 122
 GC03A

Report chainage and offset from master HAL.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer.

Specify points, a master HAL and a design Line.

In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets

The report includes pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally.

See also GC03, GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Chainage and offset Geocomp Update or $25 122
 GC03DRN

Report chainage and design offset As-Built report from HAL and VAL.

Report selected points showing Pt Number, Chainage, As-built Offset, Design Offset, As-built Height, Design Height, Height difference from VAL, Design Grade, As-Built Grade, Name, Easting and Northing.

You can select points, a HAL and VAL, and enter the design offset, and tolerances for Horizontal, Vertical and Grade.

See also GC03.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 122
 GC03DUAL

Report chainage and offset from two HAL and VAL pairs.

Report Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Elev, Val difference, Name and optionally, Coordinates, Vertical differences to a design DTM, up to five headings and a footer.

In the Headings dialog, you can "Create CSV file" for use in spreadsheets and specify a secondary HAL and VAL.

The report includes pline vertices.

If the HAL is a 3D set, and you do not select a VAL, the elevation differences will be to the set.

The HAL can be extended past the end of the HAL record. Chainages are measured horizontally. See also GC14 for 3D chainages and GC03DRN for an as-built drain report.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 122
 GC04

Create mid-points on short plines.

Where a two-point pline is less than a minimum length, create a mid-point.

If the mid-point of the next pline is in the same location, the duplicate point is omitted.

A common use is to create a single point on each pair of crossing plines imported from CAD.

See also ILINE to intersect lines, GC31 and DIVIDE command.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 314
 GC05

Calculate the centre of mass between two DTMs.

 

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC06

Round elevations in project file.

Changes elevations to rounded values.

Only use GC06 where you cannot round the displayed values with EAT codes or precision settings.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC07

Helmert transformation.

Using pairs of points, compute a best fit of shift, rotation and scale then transform the selected data.

Objects
Select the objects to be transformed, carefully.
Use Form
Enter up to nine control point/data point pairs into the form by point number or mouse. Give each a weighting of the number of times each pair is to be used. Then Calculate the Rotation, Scale, East Shift and North Shift for each pair. If the reported residuals are acceptable, click Transform Objects. To make the same transformation with different objects, store the Transformation Values as project variables or to a .HMT file.
Use Stored Values
Read transformation values previously stored as project variables using the form and then transform the coordinates of the selected objects.
Hmt
Select a .HMT file containing transformation values previously stored using the form, and then transform the selected objects.
Wld
Read a .WLD file containing coordinate pairs previously created by Arcmap and then compute and report the transformation values. Click Transform Points to transform the selected objects.
Hel
Read a .HEL file containing coordinate pairs previously created by 12D and then compute and report the transformation values. Click Transform Points to transform the selected objects.
Read Control/Data points from a file
Read a .CSV file containing point pairs and weights and then compute and compute the transformation values. Click Transform Points to transform the selected objects.
Transform Points
Transform points using the transformation values read from .WLD, .HEL or .CSV files.

The .HMT file contains three pairs of parameters on one line. The first two combine to store rotation and scale, the second locates the data centroid and the third, locates the control centroid. If a HMT file contains two lines, the first line is a heading displayed in the message scroll and the second line contains the parameters.

.WLD and .HEL files contain pairs of coordinates. New points are created at these locations.

The .CSV format is either Control_Point_number, Data_Point_Number or Control_Point_number, Data_Point_Number, Weight. Use .CSV when you have more than nine point pairs or point pairs are supplied in a spreadsheet.

See also GC38 for Affine transformation, which uses different scale factors in North and East, and GC3DROT and GC3DADJ for 3D transformation.

If shifting, rotating or scaling around a single point, use MOVE, SCALE, ROTATE or RTSCALE.

TML date MenuSourceGC
02/10/13   Modify\​Transform\​Helmert Geocomp Update or $100 37
 GC09

Places blocks or symbols by group.

A mapping file (default = Geocomp.map) determines the block or symbol, the size and scaling behaviour. If the group =0, no symbol is placed.

Most import TMLs written by Geocomp Systems set a group for each object. If you import or create objects in other ways you will need to assign groups to use this function.

GCIMPORT enables this method during the import by selecting "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols". To place the blocks or symbols at a later stage, use GC09 after setting groups where required.

To replace circles with blocks by group (for example tree canopies), use GCIMPORT or GCINSBLK.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 90
 GC10

List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.

For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length and the totals.

Optionally, report areas of closed figures.

No areas are shown for open records, and no slope distance is calculated if any points have no elevations.

Use for estimating kerbs, pipes, paving and so on.

This report is designed to be printed.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Report\More...\​Lengths + areas Geocomp Update or $100 275
 GC100

Report thickness between two DTMs at selected points.

For each selected point, report the Point number, Chainage, Offset, Easting, Northing, Thickness and Name.

The thickness is the interpolated elevation from the Upper DTM less the Lower DTM.

Where the thickness is expressed as a negative value, the Upper DTM is below the Lower DTM.

Where a point is outside either DTM, the thickness is shown as *.

Points outside the selected Roadjob are marked "Outside Roadjob".

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 224
 GC10CSV

List and sum area, 2D length and 3D length.

For each selected pline or set, report the horizontal or slope length, the totals.

Optionally, report areas of closed figures.

No areas are shown for open records, and no slope distance is calculated if any points have no elevations.

Use for estimating kerbs, pipes, paving and so on.

This report is comma-​separated so it can be saved as a CSV file for use in a spreadsheet application.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 275
 GC12DIN

Import 12D ASCII file.

Import 2D, 3D, arc, text and alignment strings from .12DA file.

You can specify user-​defined comma-​separated mapping files for colour, layer name and line styles.

Colour mapping files with extension .CNN are in the format in the format 12DA colour name, Terramodel colour number. Examples are installed in the \Geocomp folder.

The layer name mapping file with extension .LNM is in the format 12DA model name, Terramodel layer number. Terramodel uses the first matching case in the file. If you select an .LNM file, any new model names in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file. Layer names that are longer than 16 characters are shortened to fit.

If you select an .LSM file, any new line styles in the .12DA file are added to the end of the file.

If you leave an .LNM or .LSM mapping file field blank, you are prompted to create a new one using suggested values adopted for records found in the 12DA file.

Horizontal, vertical and slope alignments from super alignment strings are imported as plines and registered.

You can chose to ignore hidden segments in the 12DA file.

Arc centres are hidden. They can be made visible afterwards by ARCENTRE.

Each model is imported onto one Terramodel layer, even if it comprises more than one triangulated irregular network (TIN). You have the option to create set boundaries along the edge of each imported TIN. This can take a long time but once created you can select the the points and sets within the boundaries for use with EARTHWORK, RELAYER, GCCOPY, GCMERGE, GCGTRACE and so on.

See also GC12DOUT.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/11/13   File\Misc. import\12DA Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC12DOUT

Export 12D ASCII file.

Export selected objects and a DTM layer to a .12DA file for use with 12D software.

You can specify a colour map, a layer name map or a line style map.

Triangles inside dead regions defined by SETSMOOTH are omitted from the exported DTM.

See also GC12DIN which can import .12DA files and create the mapping files.

TML date MenuSource 
13/09/13   File\Misc. export\12DA Geocomp Update or $250  
 GC14

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL.

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from Vertical Alignment, 3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/​name.

See also GC03.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC14R

Report chainage and offset in TMS ProFit XY format.

This .DAT file is used for processing tunnel as-built reports in TMS ProFit software by Amberg Technologies.

See also GC14.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 GC14S

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along HAL and VAL, sorted by chainage and offset.

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from Vertical Alignment, 3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/​name.

See also GC14.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC14SET

Report the chainage and offset of points measured along alignment set.

Report selected objects showing Pt Number, Chainage, Offset, Height, Height difference from set3D chainage, 3D offset, Distance travelled and Description/​name.

See also GC03.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC15

Delete selected plines and sets with total length inside a specified range.

Prompt for records, minimum and maximum total length.

Points will also be deleted with sets.

GC15 is useful for cleaning up lines of unwanted hatching or symbols from imported data.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC16

Change line colour and linetype based upon group.

Modify the line colour and linetype of selected objects according the group number of each object using a mapping file such as GEOCOMP.CLT.

See also GC16ADC, COLRLINE, GCIMPORT and GCCSVIN.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 90
 GC16ADC

Modify colour based upon AutoDraft report.

Modify the colours of selected objects by layer to match the colours they would have if set by AutoDraft.

GC16ADC requires an ADC report file which you can create in AUTODRAFT by selecting the Full Report.

Blocks names are also changed to match.

See also GC16.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC17

Calculate where points on a set intersect a nominated DTM layer given bearing and slope.

 

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC18

Report chainage and elevation along a VAL.

 

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 412
 GC20

Compute the cut and fills volumes of selected boundaries and report to P3Pad.

Compute the cut and fill volume for selected set or pline boundaries and the totals.

The report also shows the horizontal and surface areas of the cut and fill.

You have options to exclude dead regions from the area and volume calculation and to report Additional Surface Info including the DTM coordinate ranges.

To define a dead region, see SETSMOOTH.

EARTHWORK is a faster alternative which does not report dead, cut or fill areas.

TML date  SourceGC
26/09/13     Geocomp Update or $500 DTM 3
 GC21

Change the default Callout Style.

Change or establish the current callout style recorded in tmodwin.ini.

For example, GC21 Date to set the current callout style to Date.

Use with an alias or toolbar.

See CALLOUT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 90
 GC22

Check DTM Edge and design boundaries.

Relayer all contourable 3D points outside the boundary set from the DTM layer to another layer.

Report which points are relayered.

Check boundary for closure and usage of all boundary points and segments.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\More...\​Check DTM edge Geocomp Update or $100 197
 GC23

Create a set where slopes from points intersect a DTM.

See also DTMSHOT, SIDESLOPE and SLICE.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 DTM C
 GC24

Bowditch adjustment of a lot or traverse.

Adjusts heights if present on points. Puts the adjusted set on layer "ADJUSTED".

Optionally, specify a closing point.

Only works with sets, not plines.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 62
 GC25

Compute a single isopach from two DTMs.

Compute a temporary DTM surface of the elevation difference from two DTMs then from that surface interpolate isopachs. These isopachs represent the locations where the elevation differences between the surfaces are equal to the nominated value.

Use the isopach elevation of 0.00 to create cut/fill lines. Cut/fill lines indicate where the DTMs intersect and thus the boundary between cut and fill areas.

Select whether to create a 2D pline or 3D set.

The name of the new pline or set is "Cut/Fill Line".

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\More...\​Cut/fill line from DTMs Geocomp Update or $100 DTM C
 GC25MULT

Compute multiple isopachs between two DTMs.

Create pline isopachs between two DTMs at a specified interval and range and inside specified boundaries.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC26

Create attribute records for an object.

Create up to four new attribute records for an object: two alphanumeric names, one integer and one double precision real number and save them to the attribute definition file geocomp.adf.

GC26 is mainly used to demonstrate attributes in Terramodel.

You can also delete all attributes, or just new ones.

CALLOUT and other EAT code functions can label objects with the new attributes.

See also DUMPATT to list attributes on an object. See RMGC as an example of a golf course tree database using attributes.

Contact Geocomp Systems if you need commands which use new attributes.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC26GIS

Create attribute database records for an object.

Create one or two attribute records in a MS Access database.

GC26GIS requires the attribute file TMGIS.ADF. Contact Geocomp Systems if you need Terramodel to link to a database.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 GC27

Place chainage labels on xlines.

Label all xlines with text on the current layer with chainage values parallel to all xlines which refer to the alignment and are within the chainage range, even xlines which are invisble or are on other layers.

Select an alignment with xlines and select a text style.

You can

  • Create the label on the left, right or centre
  • Delete old chainage labels
  • Prefix the label with with "Ch "
  • Place block GC27 instead of text

Xlines on exact metre chainages are shown with no decimal point and no training zeros. Other chainages are labelled to the number of decimal places in UNITSSET Precision.

If you "Use Blk", create or edit your own block GC27 which includes EAT text.

See also GCXLINES, LABELHAL, LABELPI and GCLABELIP.

TML date MenuSourceGC
06/08/13   Draft\​Label Xlines Geocomp Update or $50 93
 GC28

Create 3D points along HAL and VAL with chainage in name.

The points are placed within the chainage range, at the nominated interval, xlines or VAL IPs.

The elevation is interpolated from the VAL.

The name is made up from the nominated name plus the computed chainage indicated by specified text characters.

Specify whether or not to join the points with a set.

3D is a similar command with options for offsets and a chainage range.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\​Point\​Along HAL Geocomp Update or $25 77
 GC28A

Create 3D points along HAL & VAL.

The points are placed at the nominated interval with the nominated name.

The elevation is interpolated from the VAL.

See also 3D which creates sets at offsets.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 77
 GC29

Compute distance and direction with 3D components.

In the plan view, report the bearing and distance between two locations.

If you select two points, or a set segment, and both points have elevations, you will also get the height difference, vertical angle and slope distance. If the segment is an arc, show the arc length and radius.

If you select a free location, the elevation will be interpolated from the current DTM layer, if possible.

In section views, show the horizontal distance, slope distance and grade.

Enter "GC29 segment" at the command line, to start in segment mode.

See also DISTANCE which reports bearing and horizontal distance only and GEOMINQ which reports bearing, horizontal distance, and zenith angle and arc properties where appropriate.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Report\​Distance 3D Geocomp Update or $25 17
 GC29UTM

Compute and label ellipsoidal distance and direction.

In the plan view only, report the ellipsoidal distance, plane distance, line scale factor, grid bearings (forward and back) and arc to chord between two locations.

Using the Settings, you can also label the bearings and distances with specified layer, text style and colours.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 UTM 10
 GC30

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM.

Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, vertical elevation difference and name.

The average vertical elevation difference, and RMS, is included.

You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH.

TML date MenuSourceGC
25/09/13   Reports\​More...\​Vertical differences Geocomp Update or $25 236
 GC30A

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured vertically to DTM, with Horizontal alignment.

Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, vertical elevation difference and name.

The average vertical elevation difference, and RMS, is included.

You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.

You can also create text objects showing the difference in metres or millimetres.

TML date  SourceGC
17/12/13     Geocomp Update or $25 236
 GC30PERP

Report coordinates and elevation difference measured perpendicular to DTM.

Report for each selected point, the point number, easting, northing, point elevation, DTM elevation, elevation difference perpendicular to DTM and name.

The average elevation difference perpendicular to the DTM, and RMS, is included.

You can choose a tolerance range, a stripping depth and the sign convention for the difference in elevation.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC31

Duplicate point removal on a layer with tolerances.

Specify tolerances in Easting, Northing and Elevation. One point is retained and the others are moved to layer 0.

Select Report to generate a report while the duplicate points are removed.

Choose "Mean Pts" to create the remaining point with coordinates at the mean of the points, or retain the point with the highest or lowest elevation. If none of the options are selected, the remaining point is the lowest point number within tolerance. If the Elevation tolerance is *, all points within the Easting and Northing tolerance are considered; duplicate points with no elevation are relayered to layer 0.

Hints

  • DTM formation, which occurs whenever a DTM is required, automatically and rapidly removes duplicate points in the DTM layer to layer 0 to tolerances of approximately 1 mm.
  • Reserve Layer 0 for "junk" objects such as duplicate points so you can safely delete objects points on layer.
  • CONVERT can take a long time to convert a lot of plines to sets, if "Dup pts ok" is OFF. It is much faster to CONVERT with this ON, or use a GCCONVRT, then use DTM formation or GC31 to remove duplicate points afterwards.
  • Duplicate points are removed while importing DWG or DXF files unless there is a Terramodel layer called DXF_PT_CHK. Adding this layer can speed up the DWG import while retaining the duplicate points for potential removal later.
  • If you use GC58 to remove duplicate sets, plines and text, consider carefully whether to remove duplicate points before or afterwards.
  • GC92 reports duplicate points within 1 mm regardless of layer, with an option to move them slightly.
TML date MenuSourceGC
23/01/14   Edit\More...\​Duplicate points Geocomp Update or $25 170
 GC32

Report visible layers in layerlists.

List the visibility status of each layer in each layerlist.

The list includes the colour, linetype and number of objects for each layer.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 86
 GC33

Create a DTM from the upper or lower regions of two DTMs.

Create a DTM on the selected Higher DTM or Lower DTM layer from those all the regions of the two selected DTM layers.

The new DTM covers the extent of both DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". For best results, the clip dist should be around 0.01 metres.

Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut/fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.

GC33 is great for use with complex cut and fill volume estimation.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\More...\​Upper or lower of 2DTMs Geocomp Update or $100 240
 GC33MULT

Create a DTM from the upper (or lower) components of multiple DTMs.

Select a starting DTM, typically the largest, and a layer list of the other DTM layers.

Nominate the name of the final higher or lower DTM layer.

A new surface is created from the starting DTM and the first DTM in the layer list. That surface is then compared with the next DTM in the layer list, and so on in alphabetical order, which can be also date order in a suitable layer naming convention.

The new DTM covers the extent of all selected DTMs, with small gaps at the transitions to avoid overlaps. Points are omitted from the new layer within a narrow band the width of the entered "Clip Dist". For best results, the clip dist should be around 0.01 metres.

Breaklines interpolated by draping from the original surfaces are created in the new surface half way between the band edges and the cut/fill lines. The gap between the new breaklines is therefore half the clip distance.

GC33MULT is great for use with complex cut/fill volume estimation.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC34

Find and report a nominated point by number.

Type in or pick a point then either highlight with concentric circles, recentre the display or recentre the display and zoom by 10x.

The message scroll also reports the point number, easting, northing, elevation, name, layer, view, group, colour, contourability, set and whether an arc centre.

See also RECENTER which recentres the display where you pick.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Mark\Find point Geocomp Update or $25 299
 GC35

Create points at centroids of plines and sets.

The centroids can be of any closed shapes including circles.

The elevation is derived from the pline or, if a set, the mean elevation of the points.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Point\At centroids Geocomp Update or $25 181
 GC36

Move points onto a HAL or line.

Move selected points perpendicular to (or square off) the HAL or line until the offset is zero.

Choose two points or a HAL.

See also GC86 to move the points by a distance.

TML date MenuSourceGC
2/04/14   Modify\More...\​Move points onto alignment Geocomp Update or $25 120
 GC37

Create and report cross sections at strings intersecting xlines.

Create and report cross sections by intersecting selected sets and plines with xlines of a nominated alignment without reference to any DTM.

Control the output by selecting one of more of these tick boxes:

Create points
Create points on the current layer at the intersections of the sets and xlines. The point name is derived from the intersecting set.
Create CES
Export the cross section as a Geocomp Cross section (.CES) file. This .CES file can be imported into Terramodel (see below) or other applications such as Geocomp Road Design or Geocomp Spatial Data System.
Sort offsets
Select "Sort offsets" to sort on offet from left to right, when you want to form a DTM such as a roadway surface. Do not select, to sort on record number, when you want to allow for overlaps such as in a tunnel.
Report
Report the Chainage, Offset, Elevation, (optionally) Grade and set/pline at the intersections to P3Pad.
Show Grade
Select "Show grade" to report the grades between adjacent strings with elevations.

If you have a road defined by sets along string lines, to make a roadway in Terramodel:

  • Use GC37 to create a .CES file
  • Register roadway alignment, create roadjob surfaces, and so on
  • IMPORTXS the model into a roadway specifying Geocomp Existing as the format

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Export Geocomp cross sections Geocomp Update or $50 80
 GC37CSV

Create cross sections in a .CSV file at strings intersecting xlines.

Create cross sections by intersecting selected sets and plines with xlines of a nominated alignment without reference to any DTM.

The sections are written to a comma-​separated .CSV file.

The file format is Chainage, Offset, Elevation, Grade, String Description, [all fields except the chainage are repeated on the same line for every intersecting string].

TML date  Source 
26/03/14     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC38

Affine Transformation.

Using up to 10 Control Point/Data Point pairs, compute a best fit of shift, rotation, north scale and east scale and then transform the selected data, and report the residuals.

Text and blocks are shifted, rotated and scaled, but not skewed with the rest of the data. To skew text or blocks too, explode first.

See also GC07 for Helmert transformation, which computes a single scale factor.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\​Transform\​Affine Geocomp Update or $100 161
 GC39

Move intersection point and update Xlines.

Delete the Xlines on the main registered HAL of a roadway and place new Xlines at alignment points and at the nominated interval.

If you pick the main registered hal, you can move the nearest intersection point to a new location.

The new Xlines will all have the left and right extents of the first of the original Xlines.

Use GCXLINES to create new xlines including hal points or to change offsets.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Move IPs and update Xlines Geocomp Update or $100 84
 GC3DADJ

3D Conformal adjustment.

Transform selected points, text and blocks in 3D, maintaining the shape but applying 3D scaling, rotation and shift.

Use up to 10 control/data point pairs.

To keep the points at the current 3D distances, fix the scale factor to 1.0.

Check the report for Sigma Zero value and other potential problems before completing the transformation.

2D points can be transformed using a default elevation. Plines are not transformed.

Possible uses

  • Adjust heights along long straight traverses.
  • Confirm that a beam will fit between abutments. Fix the scale factor to 1.0.

See also GC3DROT for incremental rotation about 0,0,0, GC07 for Helmert transformation, which transforms in plan using a single scale computed factor and ROT3D which transforms in 3D space using exactly 3 control/data point pairs.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Modify\​Transform\​3D conformal Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC3DROT

Rotate points in 3D around 0,0,0 in increments.

Rotate selected points, text and blocks around 0,0,0, in radian increments. The default is 0.1 radians.

Use buttons to zoom in, zoom out and fit to display.

You can use GC3DROT to see how something will look if rotated, or to create isometric views.

Because the coordinates of the points are modified, we suggest that you GCREVIEW the objects into View 6, without deleting the old objects.

See also ROT3D and GC3DADJ.

TML date  Source 
07/05/12     POA  
 GC3DSETS

Find the closest 3D distance between two sets.

The closest distance in 3D is displayed in the message scroll.

You can also create the points and a joining set on a specified layer.

Useful for determining whether sets meet minimum 3D distance requirements. If you need to check the clearance from the outside of pipes, trenches or holes, you may need to create multiple 3D sets at offsets to work with.

See also GC75 for instantaneous horizontal distance perpendicular to an alignment.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Closest 3D distance Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC3PTARC

Create a two-arc set through three points.

Create sets consisting of two arcs connecting three points in a nominated order.

THREEPC is similar, but the middle point is not part of the single-arc set.

The difference is most noticeable when all three points have elevations, and you are using functions that interpolate elevations along sets. For example, if the middle point is a low or high point in a kerb or channel, a correct DTM requires ARCBL to take the elevation of the middle point into account, which can only happen if the middle point is included in the set.

See also FIXCURVE, BFITCURV, ARC,ARC2P and ARC2PSET.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Cogo\​Curves\​3 points Geocomp Update or $125 46
 GC40

Compare points in two layers by coordinates.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison and point comparison tolerances (in x, y and z).

The standard report is in the format:

Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2

The Expanded report format is:

Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth

See also GC40A and GC40M.

Points which are reported as "No match" become the current selection set so they can be readily selected by another command with right-​mouse-​button Previous.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Compare layers Geocomp Update or $25 182
 GC40A

Compare points in two layers by coordinates using search ranges.

Compare points in two nominated layers using search ranges and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z) and point tolerances in plan and elevation.

The Basic report format is:

Point Point Bearing Distance DEast DNorth DElev Name_Pt1 Name_Pt2

The Expanded report format is:

Point East North Elev Name Point East North Elev Name DEast DNorth DElev

See also GC40 and GC40M.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 182
 GC40M

Compare points in two layers by coordinates using alignment.

Compare points in two nominated layers and list the differences in easting, northing and elevation.

Settings include minimum distance for comparison, point comparison search ranges (in x, y and z), point tolerances in plan and elevation and whether to report as comma separated values.

The Basic report format is:

Number East North Elev DEast DNorth DElev Name

The Expanded report format is:

Chainage Offset Elev Elev DElev Name

See also GC40 and GC40A

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC40PILE

Pile Report

Report piles using points in two nominated layers.

Compare points in two layers representing piles.

The report can include vectors and either coordinates or chainages and offsets from the active alignment.

You can configure the search ranges, tolerance, headings and footer.

TML date  Source 
20/09/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC40RAKE

Pile rake report

Report pile rakes using points at top and bottom of the piles in two nominated layers.

20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC40TEXT

Label points in two layers with differences.

Label points in two nominated layers with differences in easting, northing and elevation.

See also GC40 and GC40A

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 332
 GC41

Show obstructions in profile view.

Create and label points where the specified HAL crosses selected objects or passes near selected points. This clearly shows where an alignment is relative to a pipe network.

The obstructions are labelled in the profile view with circles and text.

The circle plines have diameters equal to the specified Obs Ht with another circle drawn inside. If obvert is selected, the top of the circle is placed at the elevation. If invert, the bottom of the circle. The circle will appear as an ellipse if the profile view has a vertical exaggeration other than 1.0 in VIEWSET.

You can Add Plan Pts to the CLASH POINTS layer.

See also XSLABEL to add obstructions to cross section plots, SET2PRFL to draw pipes in Profile and TP41 to use an obstruction layerlist.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Cogo\​Streets\​Profile obstructions Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC42

Report point elevation minus roadway elevation.

The design elevations are calculated from the roadway, not just the cross sections. Where no elevation difference can be determined, the points are marked with *.

The basic report shows the chainage, offset, elevation difference and point name.

The extended report shows the point number, chainage, offset, elevation, design elevation, elevation difference and point name.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\​Reports\​Compare points Geocomp Update or $100 429
 GC42AB

As-built roadway report.

Compare points from an as-built roadway survey with the roadway design.

The design elevations are calculated from the roadway, not just the cross sections. Where no elevation difference can be determined, the points are marked with *.

Nominate a roadway, horizontal offset, depth, tolerances and whether to compare with the design pavement or batter.

The heading shows the roadway name and description, the desired depth of the layer of material (default = 0) and the tolerances above and below that depth.

The pavement report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name and, optionally, design and as-built slopes. The pavement difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured vertically.

The batter report shows point number, chainage, offset, design elevation, surveyed elevation, difference, an indication when out of tolerance, point name and, optionally, design and as-built slopes. The batter difference is the surveyed elevation minus design elevation in mm measured perpendicular to the design at depth. You are prompted whether to report the horizontal offset to the batter.

If the Section Tolerance is positive, the results are sorted by offset within chainage bands. If zero or negative, they are sorted by chainage only. If *, they are not sorted.

The horizontal offset and depth are adjusted by the values you enter.

The end of the report shows the number of points, mean of differences, mean of positive differences, mean of negative differences, standard deviation and the proportion of points above, below and within tolerance.

You have the option of also writing the report to a CSV file.

TML date MenuSourceGC
27/08/14   Roads\​Reports\​Compare as-built Geocomp Update or $100 435
 GC42ABS

Select as-built points within tolerance of roadway design.

Selects points within tolerance of roadway.

Use Previous to reselect the points in another command.

Nominate roadway, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC42DTM

Compare DTM triangles within tolerance of roadway design.

Compares DTM points, triangle centroids and link midpoints to a roadway.

Nominate roadway, DTM layer, depth, tolerances, and whether to compare against the design pavement or batter.

See also DESIGNELEV, GC42 and GC42AB.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Roads\​Reports\​Compare DTM Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC42HAL

Compare as-built points with HAL in selected Roadway.

Compare as-built points with the horizontal alignment in a selected roadjob.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC42KB

Compare as-built points with HAL and design kerb set.

Compare surveyed points with a design set, such as a kerb.

Report chainage and offset from selected alignment, offset difference and height difference from set, Easting, Northing, Height, Design Height and Name.

Select Inside/Outside and chainage range and tolerance.

To get chainage, offset, offset difference and height difference from a set, use the same object for both the set and the alignment.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC42VAL

Compare as-built points with VAL in selected Roadway.

Compare as-built points with the vertical alignment in a selected roadjob.

TML date  Source 
30/08/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC43

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob.

Estimate approximate areas quickly.

This report is presented in chainage ranges. The length of shape is reported for each chainage.

Assumptions

  • Shapes are used only once in a subgrade. If a shape is used more than once, the calculated areas include the shape each time. This could overestimate the area of a shape.
  • The roadway is straight. Because no curve correction is applied, this may over or underestimate the area.

See also GC43S and GC43CSV

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\​Reports\​Surface area of shapes Geocomp Update or $250 475
 GC43CSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-​delimited file.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, to a comma-​delimited file.

See also GC43 GC43SCSV.

TML date  Source 
11/12/13     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43MCSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, for multiple surfaces, to a comma-​delimited file.

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, for multiple surfaces, to a comma-​delimited file.

See also GC43CSV.

TML date  Source 
11/12/13     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43S

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials.

Compute areas within a selected surface material.

TML date  Source 
11/12/13     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC43SCSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of shapes in a roadjob based on chainages, within surface materials to a CSV.

Compute areas within a selected surface material.

TML date  Source 
11/12/13     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC44

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages.

Check the centroid of each triangle for limits of chainage range, boundary and corridor width and then calculated and report the horizontal or surface areas of all selected triangles, including parts of triangles outside the limits.

  • Choose either the maximum slope of the triangle or the crossfall at right angles to the HAL.
  • Limit the triangle by a boundary and left and right offsets or both.
  • Create points in the current layer of the triangle centroids used in the calculation.
  • Enter a report heading.
  • Results are reported in Slope ranges from the SlopeTable Section of the Tmodwin.ini. For example:
    [SlopeTable]
    TableSize=3
    0=200.0
    1=100.0
    2=50.0

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH.

See also GC44S and GC44CSV.

TML date MenuSourceGC
07/10/13   Roads\​Reports\​Surface areas by chainage Geocomp Update or $250 117
 GC44CSV

Report surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages, to a comma-​delimited file.

GC44CSV is similar to GC44 except it creates a CSV file.

TML date  SourceGC
07/10/13     Geocomp Update or $275 117
 GC44S

Calculate surface or horizontal areas of a DTM based on chainages, within surface materials.

This is similar to GC44, except it only computes the values where the centroid is within a selected surface material.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $275  
 GC45

Create points along a HAL or VAL at incremental distances.

Create points along a pline or set a nominated interval.

In the profile view, the distances are measured along on the pline.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Point\Along HAL Geocomp Update or $50 28
 GC46

Compute cut volumes between surfaces within blocks.

This is ideal for computing excavation volumes in pits, mines and quarries, where there are large numbers of layers of material. Triangles are used, rather than grids, which increases accuracy.

Set up the surfaces using Surface Manager. The Finish Surface, which represents the design limit of excavation, needs to cover the extent of the other surfaces. You can also nominate multiple boundaries in plan (="blocks"), an elevation range, and a report style. If a .CSV report style is selected, the resulting comma-​separated variable (.CSV) file can be imported into a spreadsheet application for further computation.

If a depth surface is nominated an elevation surface is created then deleted.

TML date  SourceGC
04/10/13     Geocomp Update or $75 247
 GC47

Road resheet profiles.

Create profiles to use for road resheet design.

The selected points in the existing surface are compared against the centreline and templates in the roadjob.

A profile is created along the road centreline such that the nominated minimum cover is obtained at the selected points. Two other profiles are also created allowing for variations in the template crossfalls. These three profiles can then be used to help you create the final design vertical alignment.

You must have a road job with a hal, val and templates. It is easier to understand if you initially keep the Min% and Max% as 0.00.

Select the points in the existing pavement under the proposed road pavement.

The command takes each of these points, computes their offsets from the hal, then given the crossfall from the Roadway template, (e.g. 3%), computes a proposed design elevation which is the original elevation plus the crossfall times the offset, adds the Min Cover (e.g. 0.2) to this elevation, then plots a pline in the profile view (and reports to P3Pad).

If you then manually draw a Design Vertical Alignment as a pline in the Profile view, which is just above the proposed elevations, then you are always guaranteed a Min Cover of 0.2.

If you use Min% and Max% that are not 0.00, then you get 2 additional plines in the profile view that use the crossfall from the Roadway template e.g. 3% AND then adds and subtracts the Min% and Max% values to the 3% so you can see the tolerance as you go.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 118
 GC48

Create profiles from shapes in a roadway.

Select a roadway, chainage range and interval, and selected shapes.

The created profiles are ideal for checking grades on kerblines, edge of pavement, and so on.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 253,450
 GC49

Create a point on a line at an elevation.

Create a point on the line between two points, at a location such that the new point has the specified elevation.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\​Point\​On line at elevation Geocomp Update or $25 260
 GC50

Interpolate or extrapolate elevations on 2D points based on 3D points in the same set.

See also INT3DSET, INTERP3D and GCRIVER.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\​Elevation\​From points in sets Geocomp Update or $25 185
 GC51

Intersection Design.

Design vertical alignments in intersections. A limit of nine alignments allows for four kerb returns, four splitter islands and a roundabout.

This simplifies a process which would otherwise require repeated use of profile editing, 3D, DTM creation, etc.

Before running this function, design the intersection in 2D and tile plan and profile views so that you can see the updated intersection contours immediately the vertical profiles are edited.

To use this function:

  • Select Settings to nominate up to nine HAL/VAL pairs.
  • Select Recompute to create 3D points along the alignments (on the nominated layer using the 3D settings), regenerate a DTM of the intersection and show updated quick contours.
  • Selecting the radio button for a pair, makes that alignment active, highlights the alignment and its direction in the plan view, and fits the profile view showing only referenced profiles.
  • To edit profiles, make the desired alignment active with the radio button, exit the Settings dialog, pick the design profile then locate the point in the profile to edit.
TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Cogo\​Streets\​Intersection design Geocomp Update or $200 492+77+254
 GC52

Change the group of selected objects.

See also SGRP which has a dialog for keeping track of used groups and SETGRP which sets to the next group.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\Group Geocomp Update or $25 40
 GC53

Create, list or highlight contourable or non-​contourable points.

Make, list or highlight contourable or non-contourable points.

Non-​contourable points are excluded from a DTM, even 3D points on the correct layer.

This command can also relink all DTM layers so you can see how changing contourability affected the links.

Points imported from Civilcad ASC files using CVDIMPT retain their contourability status.

See also 3DFILTER which filters points from a DTM by making them non-​contourable.

Set this attribute for single points using "include in DTM" in EDIT.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\More...\​Include or exclude points Geocomp Update or $25 257
 GC54

Apply Geoid-​Ellipsoid or Geoid-​Spheroid correction.

Interpolate the separation from a suitable DTM, and subtract this value from the ellipse height points.

For example, subtract N-Values imported from an AUSGEOID98 DAT file.

See also AUSGEOID.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC55

Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades along perpendicular bisectors.

For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between the 3D sets, along the perpendicular bisector.

Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.

If one of the sets is a DTM edge, and the other draped onto the DTM parallel to and inside the edge, this TML can be used to extend a DTM outwards at approximately the same grade. Alternatively use GC90 or GC91.

See also GC55HAL.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 81
 GC55HAL

Extrapolate or interpolate heights from two 3D sets onto points in a 2D set using grades perpendicular to HAL.

For each point on the 2D set, the new elevation is on the grade between 3D sets, perpendicular to the selected HAL.

Construction plines on the current layer can show where the grades were measured.

See also GC55.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\​Elevation\​From two sets Geocomp Update or $50 81
 GC56

Swap in X,Y or Z.

Swap either X with Y, X with Z or Y with Z.

Alternatively, mirror around X or Y axes.

Adjust for coordinates the wrong way around, contour walls using terrestrial photogrammetry, move or rotate structures in 3D, etc.

Handles points, plines, blocks and text.

Functions that may be useful in conjunction: SCALEELV, RTSCALE, MIRROR, GC07, GC38.

See also ROT3D, GC3DROT, BGELEV and FLIPUP.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Modify\​Transform\​Swap X Y Z Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC57

Create 3D points from cross sections

Cross sections must be selected in the Xsect View. They may include points.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 157
 GC58

Remove duplicate sets, plines and text from a layer.

Compare objects in a layer and move duplicates to layer 0.

Use this to remove redundant objects that have been imported multiple times. You might want to remove duplicate points first. See GC31 and GC92.

Duplicate sets must join identical point numbers but can be reversed.

Duplicate plines must have all identical vertex coordinates, elevation, colour, spline type, etc. but can be reversed.

Duplicate text must have the same insertion point coordinates (within a tolerance), characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Edit\More...\​Duplicate sets and plines Geocomp Update or $50 154
 GC58

Remove selected duplicate sets, plines and text.

Compare selected objects and move duplicates to layer 0.

Use this to remove redundant objects that have been imported multiple times. You might want to remove duplicate points first. See GC31 and GC92.

Duplicate sets must join identical point numbers and have identical layer names but can be reversed.

Duplicate plines must have all identical layer names, vertices, elevation, colour, spline type, etc. but can be reversed.

Duplicate text must have the same layer name, insertion point coordinates, characters, layer, colour, slant, height, rotation, aspect, font, orientation, horizontal justification and vertical justification.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 154
 GC59

Quality Assurance report from Geodimeter as-built survey

Read a Geodimeter job file from an as-built survey, compare with a HAL and report. The job file must include the setout points and the corresponding picked-up points.

The report includes Design Chainage, Design Offset, Design Elevation, Setout Chainage, Setout Offset, Setout Elevation, Chainage Difference, Offset Difference and Elevation Difference.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC60

Radial setout report

  1. Pick a layer containing the station points from which you are setting out
  2. Select the points to set out
  3. Specify a limiting radial distance

For each station in turn, all points within the limit are listed. The report shows the station point, setout point, bearing, horizontal distance, elevation difference and name.

Use this report in the field to set out points by theodolite or level, where you do not have the ability to upload the station and setout points into a total station.

See also STAKE.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Radial setout Geocomp Update or $50 41
 GC61

Create a point at a distance along a line between two points

Nominate two points, and a horizontal or slope distance along the line from the first point to the second point.

Once the first point is created, the default distance is the last distance entered. The message scroll keeps track of the total distance entered.

Choose whether to measure the distance from previous point or the first point.

To extrapolate, enter a negative distance or a total distance greater than the distance between the points.

If the points have elevations, the elevation is interpolated.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\​Point\​On line at distance Geocomp Update or $50 28
 GC63

Intersect batter defined by two sets with DTM

For each Xline, the grade between the sets is extended until it meets the DTM. The created points are joined to create the intersection between the batter and the DTM.

A vertical or perpendicular offset (negative for down) can be applied to the batter.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC64

Intersect two slopes each defined by two sets

Create points on the slope between two sets where it meets the slope between another two sets.

The created points are placed at each xline of the selected HAL. The xline must extend past the intersection. The points are then joined to create a set at the intersection of the two slopes.

One pair of sets is the "design" and the other is the "batter".

For example, the "design" sets may be on the bottom of subgrade and the "batter" sets may be on a batter. You can also use this to find the low point of a median strip with the "design" being the right batter of a left carriageway and the "batter" being the left batter of a right carriageway.

Vertical or perpendicular offsets (negative for down) can be applied to both slopes.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC64BIT

Fix initialisation to suit 64-bit or 32-bit Windows.

Correct the TSP, macro, menu and callout folders in a tmodwin.ini file copied from another computer to suit the current version of Windows 64-bit or 32-bit Windows and add Geocomp Update to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP).

If you copy tmodwin.ini from a computer with 32-bit Windows to one with 64-bit Windows, or vice versa, the path for the Geocomp Update, macro, menu and loaded callout styles will be incorrect. When you next start Terramodel, your toolbar may have grey buttons, your menu may be different and commands with names starting with GC are not found. When this happens, type GC64BIT at the command line to update the TSP, macro and menu folders then restart Terramodel.

The Terramodel initialisation file tmodwin.ini contains the configuration of the Terramodel user interface including the display colours of objects, background, cursor and highlighting, plotters and printers, workspace, toolbar, menu, search path, reports, favourites, view labels, callouts and coordinate scroll. P3server.ini contains settings for maximum number of objects, and the names of fonts, point labels and your prototype project file.

Tmodwin.ini is installed into C:\Program files\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Locale\​English on 32-bit Windows or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\​Terramodel\​Locale\​English on 64-bit Windows if you select British English. If you select a different language or custom folder during installation, the folder is different, for example ..\English (US). The true location can be elsewhere if Terramodel is not running As Administrator. GCHELP displays the location of the tmodwin.ini and TSP in use. In the same way, p3server.ini can be in C:\Program files\​Trimble\​Shared\​Locale\​English or C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\​Shared\​Locale\​English.

Terramodel searches the TSP for many user-​editable files including the prototype project, workspace, toolbar buttons, TML commands and aliases. The Geocomp Update adds C:\Program files (x86)\Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp or C:\Program files\Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp to the front of the Terramodel Search Path so Terramodel can find the files added by the Geocomp Update. You can also add your own custom folder to the TSP. TSP displays the files found in the TSP.

To copy your configuration from your old computer to a new computer, copy your tmodwin.ini, p3server.ini, prototype file and custom folder if you have one then run GC64BIT if, after restarting Terramodel, the menu buttons are incorrect.

GC64BIT.TML is installed into \Terramodel\TMLs folder so it can always be found. GC64BIT replaces GCTSP.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update  
 GC65

Create points by chainage, offset and elevation.

If a VAL is selected, enter the elevation difference if any.

If VAL is not selected, enter the elevation, or leave it blank for no elevation.

Optionally, enter a group. If left blank, the group is 0.

Similar to the Ground option of PSTATION. See also

See also GC65FILE.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Point\By Ch+Offset+Elev Geocomp Update or $50 344
 GC65FILE

Import points by chainage, offset and elevation.

The file is assumed to be a CSV with chainage, offset, elevation or chainage, offset, elevation, name on each line.

If a VAL is selected, enter the elevation difference if any.

If VAL is not selected, the elevation is used. Blank elevation records are assigned no elevation.

Station values can include + characters.

See also GC65 to type in values, IMPORTXS to import cross sections into a roadway, ALIGNIMP to import alignments only and ALIGNOFF to import alignment offsets.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Import chainage offset elevation Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC66

Create breaklines at ridges, valleys or changes of grade, in the specified DTM layer.

Ridges are triangle edges where both triangles slope down, valleys are where both triangles slope up and changes of grade are where the grade difference is larger than nominated.

This is useful for interpreting and refining DTMs made up from point data.

The breaklines are created in the nominated colour on the DTM layer.

You have the option of ignoring existing breaklines or creating new breaklines only where there isn't already a breakline.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   DTM\More...\​Create ridges and valleys Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC67

Move points onto nearest perpendicular Xlines.

For each Xline in turn, find the chainage where the xline crosses the HAL, then find all points within both the specified "Chainage tolerance" distance value and the extent of the Xline, then move each point to the chainage of the Xline while maintaining the offset from the hal.

If the Xlines are perpendicular to the hal, and the chainage tolerance is less than half the spacing between the Xlines, this has the same effect as moving points onto the nearest Xline.

If "Create XSects" is ticked, the 3D points within the Ch Tol. are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. Cross sections are not sorted on offset.

GC67 is useful when working with surveyed cross section point data.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 66
 GC67A

Move points onto nearest skewed Xlines.

For each Xline in turn, find all points within the specified "Sect Tol." distance perpendicular to the xline then move each point to the nearest location on the Xline.

If "Create XSects" is ticked, 3D points within the Sect Tol. of the chainage where the Xline crosses the alignment are used to create cross sections in the XSect view. The cross sections are not sorted on offset and do not follow skewed cross sections.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC68

Add points into sets based on maximum horizontal distance.

In selected sets, for each segment longer than the specified maximum horizontal distance, insert new points and create new segments. The new segments may be the exact distance in length or shortened so each new segment is equal length.

New arc segments are created using arc lengths.

If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations are interpolated onto the new points.

Use GC68 where points are too far apart for commands like SIDESLOPE and DESIGN to work properly.

Use GC682SET to create breaklines linking two sets and GCPTDIST to check whether any segment has less than a minimum length.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC682SET

Add points into two sets with linking breaklines.

Add points to achieve a minimum number of segments in two selected sets then link the sets with breaklines.

For each set, insert new points where the segment length is greater than the set length divided by the minumum number of segments.

If both the start and end points of the original segment are 3D, elevations are interpolated onto the new points.

"Connect Pts" to create breaklines linking pairs of new points in the new sets.

Use GC682SET to create extra breaklines for a smooth transition surface between sets.

See also GC68 and GCPTDIST.

TML date  Source 
05/03/14     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC69

Change zero elevations (Z = 0) to no elevation (Z = *).

2D points are often stored in DWG and DXF files as 3D points with elevations equal to zero. Because these elevations are retained when imported into Terramodel, they interfere with DTM formation.

Be careful, as there are cases where zero elevations are correct, especially near coastlines.

See also GCNOELEV to select all 2D points, GC53 to retain elevations but exclude them from DTM and ELEVATION to change elevations.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\​Elevation\​0.00 to * Geocomp Update or $50 333
 GC70

Combine elevation of point and DTM.

Compares the elevation of each point with the elevation interpolated from the DTM layer and changes the elevation. The options are: DTM, DTM - Z, DTM + Z, Z - DTM, -Z - DTM, DTM * Z and DTM / Z.

For example, use this to convert drill hole depths to absolute elevations.

You have the "* Outside DTM" option to remove the elevations of points outside the extent of the DTM, or leave the elevations of those points unchanged.

See also DTMPTS which modifies the elevations of 2D points only.

See also DTMMATH and ELEVOBJS.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Modify\​Elevation\​Combine with DTM Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC71

Solid hatch along lines.

Create parallel plines on either side of each selected pline or set, close the ends then solid hatch each closed pline.

Parallel lines are offset by half the nominated width in plan units. The pline and hatch are created in the specified layer. To create dashed solid lines, specify a gap and length.

One application is to show line marking.

The hatch is SOLID pattern with spacing = 1. Chose a suitable hatch scale so that you appear to have solid thick lines, independent of view scale and smooth around bends without using a complex linetype.

The line will be plotted wider on paper by the width of the pen assigned to its colour, so use a thin pen.

If the plines to be selected include splines, despline or FILTER a copy first.

GC71 can also be used to create boundaries that follow alignments for use with volumes and dynaimages.

TML date MenuSourceGC
08/08/13   Draw\Hatch\Along lines Geocomp Update or $50 510
 GC72

Report satellite horizon curtain.

Compute the vertical angle from selected points to visible sky at a nominated bearing interval.

Useful for entry into GPS satellite visibility software.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GC73

Interpolate elevation from VAL.

For each selected point, find the chainage along a HAL, interpolate the elevation from a VAL at that chainage, and modify the elevation of the point.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\​Elevation\​From VAL Geocomp Update or $25 77
 GC74

Set start chainage for multiple HALs.

See also SETSTA and CHAINAGE/​STATION.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 252
 GC75

Show distance and grade between sets or plines at cursor.

Display the chainage, horizontal difference, vertical difference and grade between the sets or plines, perpendicular to the selected HAL, in the message scroll area.

The HAL may be one of the sets or plines.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Distance between sets Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC76

Report on Geodimeter job file.

 

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC77

Change elevation of text to match subject.

Text objects have an elevation of 0.00 by default, even if created by labelling a point with text. Use GC77 to change the elevation of text to the elevation of the subject point. Now when you export to CAD the text will appear at the same height as the point.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\​Elevation\​From subject Geocomp Update or $25 92
 GC78

Import profile into profile view.

Read a chainage, elevation .CSV file.

Alternatively, IMPORT the profile into the plan view then REVIEW.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Import profile Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC79

Renumber points to match their point names.

Renumber points to match their point names.

If the names are alphanumeric, use SYSTEM to set Max Alpha Points high enough.

See also PTS2NAME.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC80

Compare sum of lot areas against boundary.

Report the area of each selected set, and compares the area of the largest set against the sum of all the others.

In a subdivision, the area of the boundary lot should equal the sum of the areas of all the other lots. If the difference is the size of a lot, look for omitted or duplicated lots of that size. If the difference is smaller, look for incorrectly drawn lots.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 75
 GC81

Report alignment.

Report coordinates along an alignment.

Report curve details and coordinates along a selected alignment at a nominated interval.

The curve summary lists the hal record, radius, tangent length, arc length, deflection angle and coordinates of the intersection point, start, centre and end.

At the nominated interval, report the chainage, bearing, easting and northing.

The coordinates of the start and end chainage are also listed.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GC82

Compute DTM areas by slope ranges within boundaries.

Report, within selected boundaries, the planimetric (horizontal) and surface areas of the DTM, in plan units and percentage, within predefined slope ranges.

The default layer is the current DTM layer. To set the current DTM layer, see DTMCH.

The slope ranges are defined in the [Slope Table] section of the TMODWIN.INI file.

This table can be manually edited to configure a maximum of 100 slope ranges (by default 16).

To set the number of slope ranges, edit the TableSize=# variable. The lines in tmodwin.ini following TableSize define each slope range with boundaries defined by decreasing percentage slope.

GC82 creates temporary DTMs from those parts of the DTM within each boundary. Those temporary DTMs must be able to form networks of triangles using LINKSET Settings. To separate networks of triangles, separate the boundaries.

See also DTMAREA, SLOPE, GC20 and GC44.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Areas by slope with boundaries Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC83

Select objects less than or greater than specified length.

Select objects with length less than or greater than a nominated Max Length, from selected sets, plines and text.

Objects equal to the length are also selected.

The selected objects can then be selected by the next command using Right-​mouse-​button Previous.

For example, to delete all plines less than or equal to 10.0m, first use GC83 to select objects less than or equal to 10.0m long from within a selection of objects of Type Pline. Then DELETE the selected objects using Right-​mouse-​button and Previous.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GC84

Join multiple plines.

Join multiple consecutive plines if the locations of the ends match. See also JOIN and DISJOIN.

TML date  Source 
24/01/14     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC86

Move points relative to alignment.

Move points towards or away from an alignment by a nominated amount.

Enter a positive offset distance to move the selected points away from the alignment, or negative to move towards. Points closer to the alignment than the negative offset will be moved across the alignment. Points exactly on the alignment, will be moved to the right of the alignment.

Use GC86 to move vertical walls by at least 2mm so they can be modelled.

Use GC36 to move points exactly onto the alignment.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC87

Create an elevation DTM from another elevation DTM and a difference DTM.

Select and existing surface DTM layer, a depth layer and the DTM layer for the new elevations.

See also ADDISO, GC54 and EARTHWORK.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC88

Clip or extend a pline to a defined length.

See also CLIP and EXTEND.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC89

Create a DTM layer parallel to another DTM.

Create new DTM points at the specified distance parallel to the selected DTM.

The distances are measured perpendicular to the mean of the slopes of the triangles on each point.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC90

Extend DTM to point.

Create a new point on a DTM layer with elevation extrapolated along the slope of the closest DTM triangle.

See also GC91.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC91

Extend DTM by a horizontal distance.

Create points on a DTM layer at a nominated distance along the perpendicular bisectors from each point on the edge of the DTM.

The shortest distance from the new point to the existing DTM will be no more than the nominated distance.

The elevation on the new point is the average of the elevations extrapolated along the slopes of the two triangles adjacent to the DTM edge point.

The new points are assigned the name "Extend Bdy".

You may want to create a new DTM edge.

If the new point would fall inside the old DTM, it is not created.

See also GC90 and GC55.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   DTM\More...\​Extend by horizontal distance Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC92

Report or move duplicate points.

For all selected points, report which points are within 1 mm horizontal distance and have different elevations, with the option to move those points apart.

As Terramodel forms any DTM, wherever there is more than one point with a horizontal proximity of approximately 0.001 ground units (metres or feet), one of those points is left on the DTM layer and the duplicates are relayered to layer 0.

If the layer contains string lines that should really be on separate layers, such as top and bottom of kerb, or the layer contains "triangles" created in an application with a proximity tolerance tighter than 1mm, you may not get the desired DTM surface. For this reason, anytime you import data that you intend to contour, from files such as DWG, GENIO or 12DA, you should run GC92 to report the duplicate points before running any command that forms a DTM (such as CONTOUR , QPROFILE or TVLITE). If you notice problems in your contours before running GC92, delete the data, reimport and run GC92 immediately.

The GC92 report shows which selected points have vertical elevation differences. Points which have separate layers, no elevation difference or are not contourable, will not affect the DTM. Where the report shows points which will affect the DTM significantly, and you can separate the points by properties such as colour, elevation, "of line" or name, you can use commands to move, delete, relayer or change elevations before forming a DTM.

The duplicate points can now be selected with Right-​mouse-​button Previous in subsequent commands.

You can also use GC92 to move duplicate points. Where the horizontal distance to a second point is less than 0.0011, the second point is moved in that direction to 0.0011.

If you select Repeat, the whole selection set is checked again and remaining duplicates are moved in a different direction this time.

You can restrict the movement to along sets such as kerbs.

You can include points with the same elevation in the report.

See also GC31 which relayers points on a layer that are within a configurable tolerance and GC86 which moves selected points relative to an alignment.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Duplicate points Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC93

Mirror or rotate point labels.

For all selected points, mirror or rotate point labels.

The text on the mirrored point remains legible.

The text rotation can be set to any increment of 22.5°.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Draft\Rotate or mirror point labels Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC94

Report crossfall between two 3D sets.

Report crossfall at xlines between two selected 3D sets.

The report optionally includes the chainage, offset and elevation of both sets.

You can also create points on the current layer at the intersection of the xlines and the sets.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC95

Delete set segments greater than a nominated length.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC96

Select points between two DTM layers.

Find those points above one DTM and below another, within the extent of both DTMs.

For each point in the new selection set, the colour is modified, the group is set to the next group number and the report shows the point number, easting, northing, elevation and the elevation of the two DTMs.

You can also select just one DTM.

20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GC99

Create sets parallel to an alignment using a table of offsets.

Create sets parallel to the main alignment of a selected roadjob joining points at offsets along each xline within a chainage range. Any horizontal or vertical alignment offsets defined in the alignment managers are applied first.

In Settings, specify up to nine offset strings on each side. For each string you can specify the horizontal and vertical offset, name and colour.

If the road job has a VAL, you have the option to add heights from the VAL.

On each side, you can add rotate the strings about the HAL and VAL by specifying a slope alignment.

The templates can be saved as project variables, or to a template .TEM file.

See also SIDESLOPE and 3D.

TML date MenuSource 
30/08/13   Cogo\​Streets\​Parallel sets Geocomp Update or $100 71
 GCACTIVE

List registered horizontal alignments and select the active alignment or current road job.

List alignments registered in the HALMANAGER, by registered HAL number, registered alignment name, record number, number of alignment offsets and record name.

If there are any road jobs, you have the option to list the registered HAL number, registered alignment name , record number, number of alignment offsets and road job name of only alignments used in roadjobs. The current road job is marked with a *.

The highlighted alignment is the active alignment in the current roadjob, if previously set.

Once you have selected a registered horizontal alignment from the list, you have buttons to:

  • Set the roadjob of the selected alignment as the current road job
  • Pick a pline graphically, and select the HAL if it is registered
  • Make visible only layers with names matching the roadjob name
  • Set the active alignment
  • Reform the design DTM after adding chords along arcs
  • Re-reference all xlines to the selected alignment
  • Clear the active alignment
  • Exit the command

See also GCHALOFF to create a new pline alignment then make that active.

See also ACTIVE, where you need to know the current record number of the alignment, or to switch to the plan view then find the record graphically.

TML date MenuSourceGC
15/11/13   Active alignment from registered HAL Geocomp Update or $200 84
 GCADDLAY

Prefix name with first four characters of layer name.

Change the name of selected objects to the first four characters of the layer name followed by the original object name.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCADJANT

Adjust points for a non-vertical antenna.

Adjust points that have been computed at a fixed height vertically below a target or receiver on a pole, when the pole was actually perpendicular to the surface.

Use GCADJANT to correct points collected by a GPS mounted on a vehicle when the height of the antenna above the surface was not allowed for during GPS installation.

For each point, the true antenna location is determined at the antenna height above the point. By projecting the antenna length from the true antenna location in a direction normal to the average slope of triangles touching the point, a new point is created uphill from the first point, optionally on a new layer.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or POA  
 GCADJDES

Adjust points for new vertical alignment.

Modify the elevations of selected points, by the difference between an old VAL and a new VAL.

Use this to update a design model derived from strings or a DTM, rather than templates

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCANG

Report and label angle-right between locations.

Report the angle-right given locations for backsight, instrument and foresight.

Optionally, label the angle with default text style.

See also ANG and GCLABIP.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCARC

Draw a pline or set arc from any three parameters.

Choose one of 10 Types of arc, for example "Start, Centre, End" or "3 Point".

ARC defaults to the last Type used.

Similar to ARC, except you can specify whether to create a pline or set.

The arc is drawn from the first point to the last point.

If a radius is used, a negative radius will draw the arc on the right-hand side.

See also ARC2P and ARC2PSET.

TML date MenuSource 
30/02/14   Draw\Set\Arc or Draw\Arc\By 3 parameters Geocomp Update or $25  
  GCARCBL

Create breaklines along the arc segments of all sets on a designated DTM layer.

Create points at regular intervals along the arc and connect a set from the existing first TP to each of the new points and finally to the end TP of the arc. The number of chords created is based on a specified maximum middle ordinate (arc-to-chord tolerance) value which indicates the maximum allowable deviation from the true arc for any breakline chord.

The chords may be created invisibly.

The selected tolerance and invisibility become the defaults for this project.

The elevation of each point is interpolated along the arc from the elevations of the points at the arc TPs. If either TP has an undefined elevation, Breaklines will not be formed along that arc, and a warning message will be issued in the message area.

Any objects named SETARCBL are deleted, then the new points and sets are named SETARCBL, and given the current colour, so they can be selected separately from the arcs.

The cut and fill slope values of the chords match the values of the arcs. If slope values have not been edited, the current default slopes from DESIGNSET are used as normal.

See also ARCBREAK which replaces the old arcs, ARCBL which does not allow for invisible chords, GCDTMALL which is equivalent to GCARCBL then DTMALL and BLFILTER which filters out excess breakline points.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCBADEAT

Delete or select text objects containing Bad Rec EAT codes.

Select or delete text records that contain Extended Attribute Text with Bad Record codes.

Bad records occur then the EAT code refers to an object by number that no longer exists.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCBLKPTS

Create points at insertion point of blocks.

Create points at the insertion points of selected 3D blocks, on a specified layer. You have options to include 2D blocks, and to delete the blocks.

See also PTBLKS and TEXT2PNT.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Draw\Point\At blocks Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCBOUND

Match extents of boundaries

For each of two DTM edges, copy the points from the other set which are outside the selected set on to the layer of the selected set, then create a new DTM edge.

The result is two new sets covering the same maximum horizontal extent of the two sets, but with different layers and elevations.

The areas and volumes between the new surfaces are shown in the message scroll area.

Use this to compute volumes between two surfaces where the model is assumed to batter from the extent of one DTM to the other.

TML date  Source 
04/10/13     Geocomp Update or $500  
  GCCHRLIN

Import profile from file of chainage and elevation.

The input file needs to be comma-​delimited in this format:

chainage,elevation
TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
  GCCL

Create PPS Tunnelling System CL file.

Create CL file for PPS Tunneling system from HAL, VAL, Xlines, and chainage range.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
  GCCLIP

Create new DTM surfaces clipped at boundaries.

Use closed pline boundaries to create new surfaces from an existing surface, either inside or outside each polygon. The pline is also draped on the existing surface, the points and sets created are added to each new surface.

This command prepares surfaces for 3d and 4d modelling applications.

  1. Create plines clipping boundaries around design features or regions
  2. Uniquely name each boundary pline.
  3. Run GCCLIP
  4. Nominate the DTM Surface to be clipped
  5. Select the pline boundaries
  6. Select "Keep Inside" or "Keep Outside"
  7. New DTM surfaces are copied from the existing DTM, inside or outside the boundaries.
  8. The new layers have the boundary name suffixed with _IN and _OU.

See also CLIP and GCMERGE.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCCOLCON

Modify colours of positive, zero, and negative objects.

Modify the colours of selected objects according to three elevation ranges: negative, zero and positive.

GCCOLCON easily modifies the colour of labeled isopachs to show cut and fill.

2D objects are not modified.

Use HDMS, TVLITE or COLOURCON if you need to define more colour bands.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\Colour +\- contours Geocomp Update or $25 90
 GCCONCHK

Change elevation of 2D points to match all other points in the set.

Used for fixing up supplied contour data.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 258
 GCCONIN

Import a Geocomp contour (.CON) file.

 

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   File\Misc. Import\Geocomp contour Geocomp Update or $25 166
 GCCONOUT

Export a Geocomp contour (.CON) file.

 

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   File\Misc. Export\Geocomp contour Geocomp Update or $25 105
 GCCONTXT

Set elevations of labelled contours.

Find contours on selected layer near selected text, and change the elevation of the contour pline to match the value of the text.

The text is considered near if the insertion point is within the specified tolerance of the ends of a pline, or within a tolerance equal to the height of the text from the nearest location on the pline.

Convert the plines to sets, and you have created an approximate DTM surface from a labelled 2D contour plan.

If the tolerance is too small, some contours will be missed. If you have only labels on index contours, and the tolerance is too large, some unlabelled contours will be assigned elevations.

By default, plines with elevations already are not changed. To force a change, tick "Do all".

Text containing non-numeric characters will be ignored.

If there are insufficient labels, the other contour elevations can be set manually using GCMULCON, GCONECON or PLTO3D. If there is a DTM, you could interpolate the contour elevations using ELVPLINE or regenerate the contours.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 258
 GCCONVRT

Convert sets to plines and plines to sets.

If all points in a set have the same elevation, the pline is assigned that elevation, otherwise the pline is assigned no elevation (= *).

Zero length plines are converted to points.

GCCONVRT does not remove duplicate points. If you need to remove duplicate points during the conversion use CONVERT.

If you choose to delete the original sets, you can choose to delete the points in those sets.

GCCONVERT converts hidden and visible set segments.

The new objects may have the original or current layer name, and a prefix.

Unlike CONVERT, GCCONVRT retains all attributes and is much faster with large data sets.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 292
 GCCOORD

Coordinate transformation of points, plines, blocks and text.

Use either seven-​parameter transformation, or where possible, the faster and more accurate NTv2 distortion grid method.

The principles and operation are described in detail in Terramodel 10 User's Guide Chapter 13: Using Coordcon.

See also our Nav notes for more background and examples of how to create, set up and use coordinate systems.

GCCOORD as supplied by Geocomp Systems transforms is similar to COORDCON except that, as well as points, GCCOORD also converts sets, plines, blocks and text. GCCOORD also adds Australian and New Zealand Coordinate Systems.

GCLLGRID draws Latitude and Longitude grids and labels using GCCOORD settings.

LLTABLE draws a table of coordinates including Latitudes and Longitudes.

GeoCalc transforms files of points, whereas GCCOORD transforms points in Terramodel projects.

GCCOORD requires COGO module.

Both COORDCON and GCCOORD use the same COORDSYS, DATUMS and ELIPSOID data files in the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​\Shared\​Mentor.dir.

If you are converting between foot and metre coordinate systems, use MEASUNIT to set the project metric conversion factor for International foot (0.3048) or US Survey foot (0.304800609601).

CSMAN and GEOSYS are part of a completely separate Coordinate System Manager for Trimble devices.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Cogo\​Utilities\​Coordinate conversion Geocomp Update or $200 GeoCalc
 GCCOPY

Copy selected objects onto a selected layer.

Copy selected objects onto a selected layer without changing location, colour and so on.

GCCOPY is ideal for creating a single layer DTM from objects on multiple layers. Points in selected sets are copied to the new layer, even if the points are not selected.

GCCOPY retains many object properties such as colour, elevation, colour, linetype, reference, group, visibility and hidden segments. Attributes are not copied.

For any selected objects that have colour = 0 (which means colour ByLayer), you can retain colour = 0, or change the colour of the object to the colour of the layer from which the object is copied.

You have options to select objects by layer list, append the original layer names to the new objects names, delete the old objects and add a difference to the elevations.

See also COPY which can copy objects to a new location while retaining the layers. COPY does not retain as many properties as GCCOPY. For example,COPY can change the colour to match the new layer.

See also GCDTM, LLISTSET, MULTICOPY and Multilayer​DTM.

TML date MenuSourceGC
15/07/14   Modify\Copy to layer Geocomp Update or $25 178
 GCCSVIN

Import and string comma-​delimited ASCII (.csv) coordinate data.

Import CSV data in a common format used by GPS and other data loggers.

The data format is assumed to be Point,x,y,z,​Description or Point,y,x,z,​Description. Additional fields may be used for layers.

Choose the Easting/​Northing order.

If you select a Geocomp Entity file, and your point names (descriptions) have been coded with corresponding feature and string codes, the points will be strung automatically. See GCIMPORT. If you don't select an ENT file during import, you can string later with AUTODRAFT.

You can change colours and linetypes according to a CLT mapping file. See GC16.

You can place blocks or symbols using a MAP file. See GC09 and GCINSBLK.

You can derive the point Name from the Description using Long or Short Names from the ENT file, or retain the original Description.

Choose whether to place the points on the Current Layer or on Separate Layers.

If there are six or more fields in the CSV file, you will be prompted whether to "Use additional fields for Point's Layer". If you answer Yes, the sixth field will be used for the Layer. If you answer No and you have selected Separate Layers, both the Name and the Layer of each point will be combined from the Description and subsequent fields.

Select Original Point Numbers to use the first field, otherwise let GCCSVIN assign new point numbers, for example if the first field has duplicates or blanks.

You can import other commas-separated coordinate files using commands such as GCPTSIN and IMPORT ASCII Points.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCDAMVOL

Compute dam volumes.

Specify a DTM, a high water level, a low water level, a vertical increment and at least one boundary.

Select Water Vols for the volume of water in a depression, or Earth Vols for the volume of material in the wall.

The report shows, for each boundary, the incremental and cumulative volumes as limited by the DTM surface and the high and low water levels. **** indicates that the area is not changing.

You can graph these values in a spreadsheet program.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Dam volumes Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCDCOUT

Export cross sections at intersecting sets to DC file.

Create a roading .DC file from HAL/VAL or roadway from cross sections where Xlines intersect selected 3D sets.

This is useful with Trimble machine control, especially where your data is supplied as strings or if needs cleaning up in Terramodel.

See also GCMULTDC and IMPORT Roading DC files.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   File\Misc. Export\Trimble DC from strings Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCDELSET

Delete sets and points in sets.

Delete selected sets including attached points, without having to select the points.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 60+31
 GCDIMLOT

Label lots with dimensions.

Label multiple closed sets with bearings and distances on the current layer.

The labels are EAT text attached to the points, so the dimensions update as you move the points.

The text is created on the current layer, at the current plan view scale, with the nominated colour and text style.

You can therefore create multiple dimension text layers at different scales for use with different dynaview layerlists.

The lot with the largest area can be dimensioned as a surround lot.

The length suffix is selected from the list defined in UNITSSET Labelling.

See also GCLABLOT and LABELSEG.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\text\Lot dimensions Geocomp Update or $100 75
 GCDTM

Relayer objects into a DTM layer using a .DTP file.

Relayer or copy all objects in the plan view, that have group numbers listed in a selected .DTP file, into a specified DTM layer

Set groups first by a command such as GCIMPORT.

Digital Terrain Parameter (.DTP) files are created by Geocomp during DTM formation.

Optionally, copy the boundary as a breakline.

See also GCCOPY and GCDTMIN.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 43
 GCDTMALL

Create arc breaklines, relink all DTM layers and refresh.

For every layer that has at least three 3D contourable points, create arc breaklines, relink the DTM then refresh the display.

The arc breakline points and sets are created in the DTM layer using the current point and line colours.

The arc-to-chord tolerance and visibility of the chords are as previously set by GCARCBL.

See also DTMALL and DTMUPDT which do not change arc breaklines. DTMUPDT just updates one layer.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 289
 GCDTMGDE

Interpolate super­elevation profiles from DTM.

See also SUPERPLOT, CHEKROAD, GCSUBGDE.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 GCDTMDIF

Report elevation differences between three DTMs at cursor.

Report the interpolated elevation and elevation differences between up to three selected DTM layers at the cursor location to the status line (below the command line).

See also COORDS which enables the coordinate scroll including the elevation of the current DTM layer.

TML date  Source 
13/11/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCDTMIN

Import a Geocomp .DTM file onto a layer.

A Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) is a self-contained file of coordinates, triangles and breaklines, from which Geocomp can extract contours and sections and compute volumes.

Creates a set from each triangle in the DTM file. The sets are created with a group of 1037 on a single nominated layer. The breaklines and boundary are included in the triangle edges.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   File\Misc. Import\Geocomp DTM Geocomp Update or $100 FC D
 GCDTMOUT

Export a layer as a Geocomp .DTM file.

Create a Geocomp Digital Terrain Model (.DTM) from a DTM layer.

To export the whole DTM, do not select a boundary.

To clip the .DTM at an arbitrary pline boundary, you will need SiteDesign module.

The maximum number of DTM points in Geocomp 9 is 32,767 points and in Geocomp 10 is 99,999 points.

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH.

TML date MenuSourceGC
22/08/13   File\Misc. Export\Geocomp DTM Geocomp Update or $100 43 or SDS-DXF
 GCEARTH

Roadway volume report in columns.

Similar to EARTHWRK and XVOLUMES except the report is laid out in columns.

See also AVGEND.

If you get zero volumes when you expect sensible values, see FIXLAYERS.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $125  
 GCELEV

Modify the elevation of selected objects.

Modify the elevation of selected objects to an absolute elevation or relative to the current elevation of the object.

Use the radio buttons to select Absolute or Relative.

Turn 3D points into 2D points by entering an asterisk (*) as the elevation.

GCELEV is similar to ELEVATION but with a clearer dialog.

See also GC69 , GC53, GCNOELEV and CUTFILL.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Modify\​Elevation\​Elevation Geocomp Update or $125 9
 GCESRIIN

Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC DEM grid files.

Import ESRI ArcInfo ARC Digital Elevation Model grid files.

ESRI DEM files are gridded elevation models such as those from LIDAR and Shuttle Radar Topographic Mission CGIAR-CSI.

The ESRI DEM format defines the grid extent with a heading followed by the elevation values like this:

ncols         1100
nrows         1100
xllcorner     520950.0
yllcorner     5257950.0
cellsize      1.0
NODATA_value  -9999
 30.02 29.99 29.95 29.9, and so on. 
  

You can limit the imported points to those inside a boundary pline. You can also define a corridor by specifying a maximum offset from a pline.

See also GCNEDIN for similar Quantm Alignment Planning DEMs.

For ESRI Shape (SHP) files use the ESRI (SHP) IMPORT script.

For US Geological Survey DEM files use the USGS (dem) IMPORT script.

For x,y,z,​intensity LIDAR data try LIDARIN or LIDARGRD.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   File\Misc. Import\ESRI DEM Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCEXPLOD

Explode blocks, text, plines and tables, onto their layers while retaining elevations and names of the original objects.

Explode selected blocks into the contained blocks, plines or text, EAT text into plain text, plain text into plines, complex plines into segments and tables into text and plines, with the same layers as the exploded objects, while retaining the same names and elevations as the original objects.

Optionally, delete the old blocks or text.

Optionally, convert the exploded plines to sets.

GCEXPLOD may be aliased to GCEXPLODE.

If the block or text object has an elevation, the exploded pline retains the elevation. If a block is attached to a point, the elevation of that point is used.

Objects in Terramodel blocks do not contain layer or point information. Even if you create a block from sets on multiple layers, you will have plines on the one layer when you explode it.

Blocks are exploded into the component plines, text and blocks. Because blocks can be nested inside blocks, you may need to explode more blocks. Do not create recursive blocks that contain a block with same name.

Text containing EAT codes is exploded into ordinary text. Ordinary text is exploded into plines. Text linked to points, such as dimensions, loses those links.

Sets and plines with complex linetypes are exploded into plines and symbol text. Solid lines are unaffected.

See also EXPLODE which may be aliased to GCEXPLOD. EXPLODE explodes all selected blocks, text and complex linetypes onto the current layer, not the layers of the selected objects. EXPLODE explodes a label table created by LABELTABLE, whereas GCEXPLOD does not.

To separate pline or set segments, see DISJOIN.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Edit\Explode Geocomp Update or $50  
 GCFALL

Create a pline indicating fall from a location.

Create a pline showing the path of maximum slope down a DTM from a starting location. This approximates the path a liquid such as water might take.

The pline stops when it reaches the edge of the specified DTM, the bottom of a hole or the specified total length.

The pline is created on the current layer in the current line colour with the selected linetype.

Select a suitable linetype that indicates forward direction, such as 142 or TYRE_TRACK_>>>>, and a suitable plan view scale so you can see the symbols in the linetype.

To create a set along the same path, use DRAPE afterwards.

You can create paths from multiple locations before selecting Cancel to complete the command.

At flat spots or ridges with multiple possible paths, only one of the possible routes is created. Water depth is not considered; any rise of any height is an obstacle.

See also Hydrology module, LABGRADE, MG1, LINKSET and WALK.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCFILTER

Filter excess points from straights and arcs in 2D sets.

Filter sets in 2D by offset and radius tolerances.

Multiple arcs with common centres are also filtered.

GCFILTER is excellent for reducing the size of background maps to be uploaded to instruments.

See also BLFILTER, SETFILT and FILTER.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 127
 GCGENGRD

Create points on a grid pattern.

Create points at nominated origin, interval, bearing and number within a boundary on a layer.

See also DTMGRID, GRIDEXPT, GRDPTS, GRIDELEV, GCLABGRD and GRIDMAKE.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draft\​Label grid Geocomp Update or $25 265
 GCGEOIN

Import Leica .GEO coordinate data.

Import points, lines and attributes from Leica .GEO coordinate files. GEO files are part of the Leica SBG Universal Machine Control (UMC) system. .

To export .GEO files, see also GCUMC3D.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCGPXIN

Import GPX GPS data.

Import points from a GPX file and transform from lat/long coordinates to a specified coordinate system.

You can limit to point inside a boundary or close to an alignment.

See The GPS Exchange Format.

See also GPXOUT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCGRDVOL

Compute the cut and fill volumes of regions.

Compute cut and fill volumes between two DTMs for multiple selected regions, report to P3Pad and create text and hatching showing the volumes for each region.

Any closed pline or set of any shape can be used for a region boundary. Create regions on a regular grid or between xlines, or derive regions from other sources such as stockpile boundaries.

A grid of rectangular regions can be used to indicate cut and fill over a wide area. Reports of volumes in regions between xlines are similar in presentation to those from AVGEND average-end-area reports, but with more accurate prismoidal cut and fill volumes.

Create Grids/Regions
Specify the colour and unique layer for new closed abutting plines defining region boundaries. These may be either rectangular grid cells or regions between xlines. Grid cells start at the specified north west corner and are named with rows and columns. Regions between xlines are named with the chainage range. Skip this step if you have previously created region boundaries. If you are working in the same area you only need to create the regions once. You can also use TMXOUT and TMXIN to transfer regions to another project.
Use Shrink/Swell factors
You can apply the shrink and swell factors defined in EARTHWORK Settings.
Settings
  • Label the regions with Cut, Fill and Nett Volumes and Average Depth.
  • Use text styles with different vertical justification to avoid overwriting labels.
  • Place labels on different layers, so they can be selected and displayed easily.
  • Hatch each region to indicate whether the net volume is in cut or fill.
  • Generate a report showing the cut, fill and nett volumes, average depth, cut and fill areas, region boundary areas and topsoil volume for each region and the totals.
  • Delete regions with no included volume.
Compute Volumes
Select existing and proposed DTM layers and region boundaries (typically by layer). Compute Volumes to create the labels and hatching and report the cut and fill volume between the DTMs for each selected region. A limiting DTM boundary is optional. Topsoil volume is approximated multiplying any entered topspoil thickness by the area of cut. The cut volumes are not adjusted for topsoil.

See also EARTHWORK

See also GRIDVOL which is much the same except it does not have the settings button and the xlines option.

See also GC20 which gives a detailed report of volumes within multiple boundaries.

See also MASSHAUL to create a mass haul diagram.

TML date MenuSourceGC
30/04/14   Reports\​More...\​Grid volumes Geocomp Update or $100 222
 GCGSIOUT

Export alignment in Leica RoadPlus GSI format.

Choose from HAL and VAL or Roadjob.

See also GSIDTMOU and GCPTSOUT.

TML date  Source 
20/01/14     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCGT7IN

Import alignment in Topcon/​Civilcad GC7/GTS format.

Import horizontal alignment into the plan view, the vertical alignment into the profile view and the cross sections into the plan view.

The cross section points are strung according to descriptions in the cross section file.

The file names are assumed to have .GT7 file extension, and have the same name except for "- H", "- V" and "- XS" prefixes.

See also GCGTSOUT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCGTSOUT

Export alignment in Topcon/​Civilcad GTS format.

Export horizontal and vertical alignment, and cross sections extracted at xlines, to separate files.

See also GCGT7IN.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCHALADJ

Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets.

Adjust a registered HAL to use offsets from the nominated main HAL instead of the current alignment record.

Offsets are computed at the nominated interval so the adjusted alignment will initially follow approximately same path, but the adjusted alignment will now follow any edits to the main registered alignment.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCHALDEL

Delete selected registered HALs.

Remove selected registered horizontal alignments from the HAL Manager.

The plines are not deleted.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCHALEDT

Edit a registered horizontal alignment graphically.

Edit the main horizontal alignment of a selected roadway graphically.

You can select, delete or insert IPs and change the arc radius, spiral in (back) and spiral out (ahead) lengths.

You can also report the offsets from the design alignment to an as-built set record.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Edit HAL Geocomp Update or $100 84
 GCHALIN

Import Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).

The HAL file is imported as a pline in the plan view.

Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the HAL.

See also GCHALOUT and GCHVERIN.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Import Geocomp HAL Geocomp Update or $25 253
 GCHALOFF

Create a pline HAL from a registered horizontal alignment with offsets.

A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the horizontal alignment manager.

The IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings.

A report is displayed showing each chainage, offset, easting and northing of each IP.

See also GCVALOFF and VARIOFF.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 157
 GCHALOUT

Export Geocomp horizontal alignment (.HAL).

Converts a pline HAL in the plan view consisting of straights, arcs or spirals, but not splines.

The output file name must be six-digits with extension .HAL, for Geocomp to read it.

To extract sections other than to edge of model at 10m intervals, change the interval and offsets in SDS 84.

See also GCHALIN and GCVEROUT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 84
 GCHAULMN

Add Masshaul Import and Export materials from a CSV file.

Add a MASSIMPORT table of import or export material for MASSHAUL.

TML date  Source 
    Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCHELP

Report Geocomp Update version

Report Geocomp Update details.

Report

  • Version numbers
  • Serial/​licence/​dongle number
  • The location of the tmodwin.ini file
  • Terramodel Search Path
  • Name and location of the prototype file
  • The measurement units of the open project

There are also buttons to link to various help and document files.

See also ABOUT, SYSTEM, TSP and GC64BIT.

TML date MenuSource 
06/02/14   Help\GCHelp Geocomp Update  
 GCIDCHN

Display the chainage and offset from a selected alignment at the cursor.

Select a pline or set in the plan view and a location in plan, profile, xsect or super view.

The pline or set is made the active alignment and the location of the cursor is displayed in each view.

Click on Recentre Views to recentre open views at the current location.

If Update Plan View is selected, the centre of the Plan view moves to the location you select

If Update XSect View is selected, the cross section of the nearest xline is made the active chainage.

See also IDSTATION and SUPERVIS.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update  
 GCIMPORT

Geocomp import toolbar button

Import Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) or use the Geocomp Data Collector Interface to import survey data.

Overview

GCIMPORT is installed with Terramodel supplied from Geocomp Systems. GCIMPORT can be launched using a Geocomp button on the toolbar or by typing GCIMPORT.

Using the Geocomp Data Collector Interface, raw data in a number of different data collector formats can be downloaded, converted to a Geocomp Standard Field File (.FLD), converted to Geocomp Points (.PTS) and (Strings (.STR) and then imported into Terramodel, with coding, stringing and symbols all automatically applied.

The Geocomp Data Collector Interface is being phased out because the import component is a DOS application that requires Windows XP. In almost all cases, the raw data files (including FLD files) can be better imported using an Import script with RDE and AUTODRAFT.

Geocomp SDS format records the computed coordinates in a .PTS file and the feature code and stringing in a matching .STR file. The resulting 3D points are assigned block or symbol, layer, name and group according to the feature code. They are strung where required with sets of configurable layer, colour and linetype. Blocks representing tree canopies can be sized by the recorded radius.

See also the Geocomp import-related TMLs GC09, GCHALIN, GCVERIN, GCCONIN, GCDTMIN, GCPLTIN, GCPLFIN, GCCSVIN, GCINSBLK, GCJOINMP, GCJOINPT, PTJOIN and IMPORTGC.

The IMPORT .PTS/.STR dialog

Select "Import .Pts/.Str" button and browse to select a GEOCOMP .PTS file. If other files, such as STR (Strings), ANT (Annotations), DMN (Dimensions), LTO (Lots), HAL (Horizontal Alignments) or VER (Vertical Alignments) with the same name as the PTS file are in the same folder, they will also be imported.

This dialog also allows for selection of the ENT table. This table controls the layer names, descriptions/names, colours, linetypes and symbols according to the Geocomp entity number. If the Geocomp files have been derived from survey, the entity and stringing have been worked out from the feature coding.

The layer name can be the short description, long description or moss string code in the ENT file. The entity number may be added to the front of the layer name.

The record name (sometimes called description) is derived from the Geocomp string description, the short name (alpha-code), the long name or the moss (point or string) code in the ENT file.

The Group is derived from the Geocomp Entity.

Points are initially placed in layer 0. As the strings are imported, the points are relayered to the same layer as their sets. Points with no strings remain in layer 0. If "Copy Points into different layers if Point is in different Entities" is enabled, points used by more than one entity will be copied into each layer. Otherwise, the point will be placed only in the layer of the entity of the last string attached to that point.

If "Map Points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" is selected, blocks or symbols are automatically placed by group. The heading of Geocomp.MAP describes the format of the mapping file. See GC09 and GCINSBLK.

A Geocomp plot parameter file can be used to control text attributes when importing DMN (Dimensions) and ANT (Annotations).

The colour of the points and sets is derived from the GEOCOMP.CLT file in the Terramodel Search Path. If the entity is not in GEOCOMP.CLT, the colours are derived from the colours of the existing layer. If the layer does not exist, it is created, and the colours of the new layer and objects come from the default layer. (See also GC16 which uses the CLT to set the colours without importing the objects).

Configuring the Data Collector Interface

The Geocomp Data Collector Interface is only suitable for use by experienced Geocomp users on Windows XP. It will not run on Window Vista or 7. We recommend that you use the Field Data Module which uses IMPORT Scripts, RDE and AUTODRAFT.

Sufficient environment space and free conventional memory must be made available.

ANSI must be loaded to download from any instrument other than a Geodimeter. See www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​geocomp/​ansi.html .

The default location for these interface files is C:\Program Files\​Trimble\​Shared\​Geocomp. If the software is installed anywhere else, you will need to edit the TM.BAT and the GEOCOMP.PAR files. Contact Contact Geocomp Systems for more information if required.

You also need to select your data collector type, communication parameters and coding character positions. See the Geocomp manuals for an explanation of these settings.

Downloading from the Data Collector or Instrument to Terramodel

  1. Open a new project
  2. Run GCIMPORT
  3. Select Data Collector. This will launch the Data Collector Interface.
  4. From the Data Collector Interface, select 1, New File Number. Assign a unique four-digit job number and a two-digit version number for the survey data. If you don't do this, you will overwrite previous survey files each time.
  5. Select 3, Data Collector Interface
  6. Select 2, Transfer from [currently configured data collector]
  7. Download the file from the data collector. This creates a data file with a six-digit number (with a file extension dependent on the data collector format) in C:\Program Files\Trimble\​Shared\​Geocomp.

    Alternatively, download the data using some other software (e.g. Terramodel Download Script, Geocomp, SokkiaComms, Leica Survey Office, Nikon TransIT or Geodimeter Software Tools) and copy the raw data into the C:\Program Files\Trimble\​Shared\​Geocomp directory with a name six-digit number format.

    If you get a black screen, you have an ANSI problem. See www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​geocomp/​ansi.html . Windows Vista does not support this interface.

  8. Select 3, Create Standard Field File. This is a raw data file in a standard Geocomp format.

    If you need a control point file, create it in advance using GCPTSOUT and a target of Geocomp CRD. The .CRD file name is in the format CONTnn.CRD where nn are digits indicating the control point file number. The character positions of the station description in the name of the point are critical.

  9. Optionally, Select 8 to edit or view the .FLD file, or use any text editor.
  10. Select 4, Reduce Standard Field File. This creates a pair of Geocomp .PTS and .STR files. The .PTS file contains the coordinates and the .STR file contains the stringing and coding information.
  11. From the main Data Collector Interface menu, select 0 then Enter to return to Terramodel GCIMPORT.
  12. Select Import Survey Data in Terramodel to import the survey data into the current plan view.

Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using the Geocomp Data Collector Interface

  1. Create the coordinate file to upload with PTSOUT or GCPTSOUT, selecting the appropriate data collector format as the Target. Save the coordinate file in C:\Program Files\Trimble\Shared\Geocomp. Use a six-digit name with an extension depending on the target.
  2. Run GCIMPORT
  3. Select Data Collector
  4. From the Data Collector Interface, select 1, New File Number. Assign a unique four-digit job number and a two-digit version number for the survey data. If you don't change these values you will overwrite previous survey files each time.
  5. Select 3, Data Collector Interface
  6. Select 6, Transfer to [currently configured data collector]
  7. Upload the file to the data collector.
  8. From the Data Collector Interface menu, select 0 Enter to return to Terramodel GCIMPORT.

Uploading from Terramodel to the Data Collector or Total Station using other uploading software such as Geodimeter Survey Tools or SokkiaComms.

  1. Create the coordinate file to upload with PTSOUT or GCPTSOUT, selecting the appropriate Data Collector format as the Target, or use an alternative method appropriate to your uploading software.
  2. Upload the file according to your software instructions.

Communication between the Trimble Active Control Unit (ACU) or TSCE and Terramodel.

Refer to http://​www.geocomp.com.au/​support/​terramodel/​acu.html.

TML date Guides Menu Source GC
20/06/13 Geocomp 10 User Guide
Geocomp 10 Reference Manual
Geocomp Feature Code Table
The manuals for your total station or data collector
The manuals for your instrument's file transfer software, if used
Toolbar and File\Misc. Import\Geocomp PTS + STR Geocomp Update 30
 GCIN2SET

Insert points into multiple sets.

Insert the selected points into selected sets if the points are within a specified distance of the set.

The entered tolerance is stored as a project variable. The initial value is derived from the SetArcTol value in TMODWIN.INI.

You have the option to replace 2D points with 3D points. For example, if you have been supplied 2D linework as plines, and 3D points at some of the pline vertices, you can GCCONVRT plines to sets then GCIN2SET to add the 3D points to the set.

See also INTOSET which selects one line at a time, GC50 to interpolate elevations from 3D points onto 2D points in the sets and DTMPTS to interpolate elevations from a DTM onto 2D points.

TML date  Source 
07/10/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GCINCTXT

Create text from incrementing numbers.

Create text records at selected locations with values starting at a specified real number and increasing by a specified increment.

Great for house numbers.

You can set a prefix, suffix, current text style, direction and number of decimal places.

You can copy the style, including border style, from a sample text object you first create or edit using TEXT command.

See also INCRTEXT, RENUMLOT, LABELSETS, GCLABLOT and LOTJOIN.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GCINSBLK

Replace circles with trees

Place a symbol or block for each selected circular set, scaled to match the diameter.

The most common use is to place large numbers of tree blocks scaled to fit canopy or trunk diameters.

Delete the original circles if you want.

For a few circles, UNITBLK or BLOCK Insert may be better.

If the circles are plines, CONVERT to a set first, then set the group with GC52 or SGRP.

The block is chosen according to the group of the set, and a mapping file. This is the same mapping file used by GCIMPORT and GC09. See Geocomp.map for an example which includes an explanation of the format.

GCIMPORT can import survey data including circles. If you elect not to "Map points and Circles with Blocks or Symbols" at the time, you can use GCINSBLK to replace the circles later.

Use GC09 to place blocks or symbols on points by group. To create points at centroids of sets or plines, use GC35.

See also LABELSETS.

Tree canopy blocks included with Terramodel include: Tree1 to Tree8, Tree coniferous type 1, Tree deciduous type 1 to 3, GCSYM423, 437, 438, 452 and 453. Symbols 100 to 109 are provided as both symbols and blocks SYM100 to SYM109. DOCUMENTS and Terramodel 10.1 User Guide pages 171 and 200 have block charts.

TML date  SourceGC
24/10/13     Geocomp Update or $50 93
 GCJOINMP

Join points with gaps

Create sets on the current layer between selected points.

Join to nearest point starting from the west, or in point number order with option to only join consecutive points.

Leaves gaps where distance is greater than a specified maximum distance.

See also PTJOIN and GCJOINPT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 15
 GCJOINPT

Create sets from points by feature and string in name.

Create sets by joining points according to the feature code and string data in the name following the conventions of Geocomp software.

Join selected points with sets according to feature codes defined by sequential characters starting from the beginning of each name and immediately after any point code separator characters. The characters from the entity start position to the entity end position are treated as the feature code. The characters from the string start position to the string end position are treated as the string number.

Points and sets can be separated into layers or placed on the current layer.

If you specify a Geocomp ENT file, integer feature codes are matched against the entity field in the first column, and other feature codes are matched against the short description in the second column.

Colours and linetypes are determined by the layer settings, unless you specify a colour and linetype file (CLT) file (see GC16).

Blocks and symbols can be placed according to a MAP file (see GC09).

You can specify that the layer name is derived from the long description in column 7 of the ENT file.

GCJOINPT has been replaced by AUTODRAFT where a Feature Code is called a Field Code, a String Number is called a Feature Instance ID, points with Lines are strung even when the string number is blank, and the ENT, CLT and MAP files have been replaced by the ADC file.

See also GCIMPORT, PTJOIN, GCJOINMP and GCCSVIN.

TML date Guide   Source GC
20/06/13 Geocomp Feature Code Table   Geocomp Update or $50 125
 GCKMLIN

Import points from Google Earth (KML).

Import placemarks and paths from a Google Earth KML file within a selected boundary pline or within a maximum offset of a pline HAL.

The WGS84 latitude and longitude coordinates in the KML are transformed into eastings and northings in the coordinate system you select from a list defined by GCCOORD or COORDCON.

To extract a KML file from a KMZ, simply unzip using a utility like WinZip.

If the KML file has links to camera photos you can create an arrow in the plan view showing the direction of the photo.

To import an image saved from Google Earth, use Terramodel IMAGE Manager.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   File\Misc. Import\Google Earth KML Geocomp Update or $0  
 GCKMLOUT

Link to Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles.

Display aerial or satellite images of the selected location in Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles.

Click on Change CS to select a coordinate system that matches your Terramodel data and browse to select the output file name.

Settings

Google Earth (GE)

Export selected points, sets and plines, launch Google Earth (if installed) then display the points and lines on the Google Earth model.

Specify whether to label points with the point number or point name or both.

Exported points are lines are given the same colours as displayed in Terramodel at the time.

There are Settings for "Absolute Elevation", "Extrude", "Text Scale" and "Line width".

In Google Earth, you can save the current image by selecting File, Save then Save Image, then manually register the image using Terramodel IMAGE Manager. Any changes you make to rotation, tilt, colour, style or visibility will appear in the saved image.

NearMap (NM)

Select "NM" to display an orthorectified image in NearMap with your default internet browser at the extents of the selected pline or set. The pline or set is not displayed.

HyperTiles (HT)

Select "HT" to open HyperTiles (if installed) then display orthorectified images at the polygon defined by the selected set or pline.

To save the images from HyperTiles:

  1. Change the coordinate system in HyperTiles from "WGS84 / Spherical Mercator" to match your coordinate system in Terramodel
  2. Turn on PhotoMaps
  3. Click on the disk icon
  4. Specify the name, path, resolution, etc.
  5. Save

If the list of coordinate systems in HyperTiles does not include your Coordinate System in Terramodel, use GCCOORD to transform a copy of your data to one that is listed.

HyperTiles saves files in a folder of the specified Name under the specified path including a .JPG file and .JGW file for each tile.

In Terramodel IMAGE Manager, add selected .JPG files to register them at the locations specified in the corresponding .JGW files. You can select multiple .JPG files at once.

Notes

  • The coordinate system used by GCKMLOUT is the same as the From system used by GCCOORD and COORDCON.
  • If you are on an arbitrary coordinate system, transform the points onto a listed system, for example by GC3DADJ or GC07.
  • The locations of the selected objects are exported as WGS84 latitudes and longitudes in the Keyhole Markup Language (.KML) format to suit Google Earth, NearMap or HyperTiles.
  • The image quality is only as good as the data source.
  • You will need a broadband internet connection.
  • Any "&" characters in the names of selected objects will be written to the KML file as "+".

TML date MenuSource 
13/08/13   File\Misc. Import\Google Earth KML Geocomp Update or $0  
 GCLABGRD

Label and draw grid in polygons.

Create a north-south/​east-west grid of plines, labels, or both, within multiple bounding plotboxes of any shape.

Select a layer for the grid lines, or select No Grid. The grid can be lines, ticks or dots (short plines)

Select a layer for the labels, or layer 0 for no labels.

Select easting and northing intervals.

If you are labelling, select text styles and whether to label inside or outside the plotbox. You can also prefix and suffix the labels and control the number of spaces from the border. The initial default suffix is derived from the plan view settings.

Gridlines can cross a polygon up to 20 times.

LABELGRID is simpler but only allows for simple rectangular plot boxes, unlike those often created by PLANSET.

You can also make a pline grid with GRIDMAKE or PLANSET.

To make a grid of points, see GCGENGRD, GRIDMAKE and GRIDELEV.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200 93
 GCLABIP

Label intersection points.

Label all intersection points on selected HAL, with IP Chainage, and optionally Delta, Easting and Northing.

Chainages are labelled with "Ch".

The text is placed legibly and perpendicular to the HAL at an offset which you can enter or select graphically.

See also LABELPI, LABELHAL and GC27.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 84
 GCLABLOT

Label closed sets with lot area and lot number text.

Label selected closed sets with EAT text showing the lot numbers and lot area.

The lot numbers are derived from the set names.

The areas up to 10,000 square units are labelled as m². Alternative areas above 10,000 square units are divided by 10,000 and labelled as Ha.

The precision of the basic and alternative areas is controlled by UNITSSET.

If you want feet and acres or other area unit labels, or you don't want to use EAT text, use LABELSETS instead.

You can use commands such as LABELSETS, LOTJOIN, NAME, QSET and RENUMLOT to set the lot numbers as set names.

See also GCDIMLOT which labels dimensions using EAT text and GC80 which reports lot areas.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Text\Lot numbers Geocomp Update or $25 91
 GCLABPEG

Label points in a set with pipeline peg labels.

Create text labels at a specified offset from all points in a selected set, showing the word PEG followed by the point name and chainage.

Tick boxes enable extra labels for delta angle (to minutes or seconds) and coordinates.

Use PROJECTV to control the left/right direction.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCLABPNT

Label multiple points with EAT text, leaderline and border.

Label points with user-​definable text labels at an offset perpendicular to a HAL on a specified layer with rounded rectangle borders and leader lines.

Enter the text and text style in the Settings.

The text can include EAT codes referring to the points. Use \n to indicate new lines of text.

See also CALLOUT to label one point at a time with more options.

For points on a HAL, you can create a temporary HAL to control the side on which to place the labels.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCLINPTS

List points with invalid coordinates.

List points with an undefined easting or northing or both. Points with only undefined elevations (2D points) are not listed.

The report also lists the first available point number, the last point number and the maximum and minimum non-zero values for easting, northing or elevation, if any.

Points with undefined coordinates are most commonly created when RDE cannot compute the coordinates from the available survey information. Such points, and sets connecting them, are not visible but are included in lists when selected by non-graphical means, such as by View or Point number range.

See also GCNOELEV.

TML date   Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCLFAOUT

Export Quantm Alignment Planning linear features .LFA

Quantm Alignment Planning System uses a linear_features.lfa file to define crossing requirements at linear features.

The set name defines the linear feature description and the layer name defines the linear feature label.

Sets must have all 3D points or all 2D points. If you have some 2D points in the set, assign elevations first, for example by DTMPTS or GC50. If a set has all 2D points, Quantm will interpolate from the DTM.

Export special zones using GCSZAOUT.

Export DTM data using GCTMAOUT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $POA  
 GCLLGRID

Draw Latitude and Longitude grids and labels.

Create labelled plines representing latitude and longitude according to the selected Coordinate System.

Settings

The settings provide control over the pline spacing and labelling.

Labels...
Interval
Enter the grid line step. The default step interval is 1. For example, enter a value of 3 to label every third grid line.
Offset
Enter the distance in sheet units for the label offset from the edge of the pline box. The default value is 0.5 cm.
Decimals
Enter the number of decimal places for labels. If the seconds are not selected, this value is used for minutes. If minutes are not selected, degrees. For example, to label in the form DDD MM SS.ss, include seconds in Label Components, and enter a value of 2 seconds. For the form DDD MM.dddd, untick seconds and enter 3 decimal places. For DDD.dddd, untick seconds and minutes and enter 4 decimals.
Textstyle
Select the text style for latitude and Longitude labels. If labels appear to be missing, they may simply be too small or too large. If labels cross the pline box, you may want to edit them.
Label Components
Enter any required prefix or suffix. For example, for a degree sign symbol, enter "\176". For Southern latitudes, use "-" prefix or "S" suffix.
Grids...
Grid interval
Enter the grid interval in seconds of arc. The default interval is 10. For Longitude, one second of arc is approximately 30.9 metres. For Latitude, one second of arc varies from approximately 30.9 metres at the equator to 0 at the poles.
Resolution
Enter the number of pline control points per grid interval. More vertices better approximate the true curve but take longer to compute. For example, with an interval of ten seconds of arc, for a pline segment every two seconds, enter a resolution of five.
Import/​Export
Save the label grid settings to transfer between projects. The same settings are also used by GCCOORD, LLTABLE and LLGRID.

To label grids in multiple boundaries, enter GCLLGRID M at the command line.

TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   HDMS\​Coordinate\​Draw latitude and longitude grid Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCLNGIN

Import Geocomp long section .LNG

Import long section as a pline in the profile view

See also GCVERIN.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 412
 GCLOTCNR

Label lot corners with two elevations

Label points in selected sets with a single text object showing elevations from both an existing DTM and a design DTM

For each point, the text is oriented along the longest of the two connecting segments on the first lot tested.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50  
 GCLPTS

List the coordinates of selected points to report or CSV.

Select Points then List.

Select Options to include any permutation of Point Number, Record Number, Easting, Northing, Elevation, Name, Layer, Colour, View, Symbol Number, Group and General Information and whether to also export to a comma-​separated CSV file.

See also LPOINTS which does not include options for Group or CSV, LPTSRAD which also shows bearing and distance from a stand point and PORTSC1 which reports heights as depths.

TML date MenuSource 
21/01/14   Reports\List [Points] Geocomp Update or $25 26
 GCMAPOUT

Assign unique layers for export to DXF.

Relayer selected objects to new layer names with unique sequential numbers for each object or layer name and create a corresponding map file.

To export object names longer than 16 characters to AutoCAD or similar via DXF into layers:

  1. SAVEAS the project so you have a backup.
  2. GCMAPOUT to relayer selected objects onto layers with sequential names beginning with GC_GG and export a corresponding mapping file.
  3. Export objects to a .DXF file in Release 2000 format.
  4. DXFCHANG to create a new DXF file with layer names corresponding to the original object names according to the map file.

For object names up to 16 characters you could use NAME2LAY instead.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCMATCH

Close gaps in contours.

Create new contour segments across the gaps. Then JOIN to create contiguous contours.

Use GCMATCH to match contours at sheet edges and cross gaps at labels.

Also match sets within a tolerance.

See also DTMMATCH which matches overlapping DTMs.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCMATIN

Import a list of road materials.

Add to or modify the materials in the Road Material Manager MATERIALS. The list is exported by GCMATOUT to transfer materials from one project to another.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCMATOUT

Export a list of road materials.

Export a list of materials from the Road Material Manager MATERIALS.

Each material has a name, shrink/swell factor, colour, and is classed as embankment, unsuitable or neither.

Import into another project using GCMATIN.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCMERGE

Merge multiple regions or DTMs.

Create a final layer by merging multiple regions from layers in a sequential layer list.

The objects on the Initial DTM layer are first copied to the Final DTM layer. Then, for each layer in a layer list in turn, objects in the Final DTM are clipped to boundaries on the listed layer then all the objects from the listed layer are copied into the Final DTM layer. Breaklines are also draped onto the Final DTM 2 mm inside the clipping boundaries. The process is repeated in alphabetical order for each layer in the layer list.

The clipping boundaries are at the "Clip Dist" outside the region boundaries. Make the Clip Dist greater than 3 mm to reduce potential crossing breakline problems.

If "Use DTM Edge" is specified, one region boundary is created for each DTM layer. Otherwise, every closed set with more than three segments is a region boundary.

GCMERGE can be used to merge multiple surveys or design components into big models. If you use GCMERGE to build an end-of-​month DTM, spell layer names so the alphabetical order is also the data order (for example, EOM 09 20090822A).

See also MERGE, GCMATCH and GC33.

TML date  Source 
31/10/13     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCMFI

Import multiple .PTS or CSV files.

Import multiple ASCII coordinate files in common formats.

  1. Specify whether the files is space-separated .PTS or comma-​separated .CSV.
  2. Select a data order from this list: E N Z, N E Z, P E N Z, P N E Z, P E N Z D, P N E Z D, E N Z D or N E Z D.
  3. Next
  4. Browse to select a file to import. If the file extension is not .PTS or .CSV you can select from All files.
  5. Click next again to import another file of the same format
  6. Click Cancel when you have completed importing all the files.

Lines with unexpected data, such as blank fields, letters or spaces, header lines, * for elevations on are skipped.

Deep negative elevations are read as 2D.

See also GCPTSIN, IMPORT, GCCSVIN and so on.

TML dateGuide Source 
20/06/13 in-built help   Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCMULCON

Assign contour elevations to multiple 2D plines.

To use GCMULCON:

  1. Set the contour interval using CONTOURSET
  2. Copy or relayer the contour plines to a single layer
  3. Run GCMULCON
  4. Pick the layer with the contour plines
  5. Pick a starting contour height
  6. Pick two locations to define a line across multiple contour plines
  7. The command computes two possible elevations for the last contour, one for uphill and one for downhill.
  8. Apply one of the two end elevations to all the selected contour plines

GCMULCON correctly allows for the line to cross the same contour multiple times.

This is similar to LABELCONTOURS, except the elevations are assigned rather than read.

See also GCONECON, GCCONTXT, GCMATCH, GCRIVER and PLTO3D.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 258
 GCMULTDC

Export sets to a Trimble Roading DC file.

Create a roading .DC file of alignments for every selected 3D set.

See also GCDCOUT and IMPORT Roading DC files.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCMULTGD

Export multiple alignments to Geodimeter .rln files.

Create one .RLN file for each set containing horizontal and vertical alignment only.

Useful for uploading strings for set-out.

See also GCRLNOUT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCMULXML

Export multiple alignments to a Leica 1200 LandXML file

Create an .xml file of alignments for every selected 3D set.

See also GCXMLOUT and IMPORT LandXML files.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCMULVOL

Compute cut/fill volumes between pairs of DTM surfaces.

Compute cut and fill volumes within boundaries between DTM surfaces listed in a table.

The volumes are computed between each sequential pair of DTM or depth surfaces.

The selected boundary may represent mining "blocks".

Optionally create CSV file.

See also GC46 and XVOLUMES.

TML date  Source 
04/10/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCNAMEPT

Name points sequentially along a set.

Rename points along a set from a starting integer with optional prefix and suffix.

See also GCRENUM.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCNEDIN

Import Quantm grid data.

Import Grid (NED) .asc data created by Quantm Alignment Planning.

GCESRIIN imports similar data files created by other applications.

See also GCTMAIN.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 GCNMEAIN

Import NMEA log data.

Import NMEA strings tagged as $GPGGA´ from GPS receivers.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCNOELEV

Select all points with no elevation.

Select all 2D points from selected points. 2D points have an elevation of *.

Use the Previous selection of the right-​mouse-​button to use these points in another command such as DTMPTS.

You can also use right-​mouse-​button to select objects outside an elevation range by NOT and Elev.

GC69 turns points with elevation = 0 into 2D points with elevation = *.

GC53 retains the elevation on the point but excludes the point from any DTM surface.

GCLINPTS lists points with no easting or no northing.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Select 2D points Geocomp Update or $25 88
 GCOFFELV

Create plines or sets at a horizontal and vertical offset.

Pick the set, offset, elevation difference and side.

See also OFFELEV, GC99, OFFELEVM and SIDESLOPE.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 71
 GCOFLINE

Select all points in selected sets.

Select all points in selected sets.

Use the Previous selection to use these points in another command.

This is similar to selecting points by Ofline in the Right Mouse Button menu, only GCOFLINE allows selection of multiple sets.

See also BDYRELAY.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Reports\​More...\​Select points of line Geocomp Update or $25 60
 GCONECON

Assign elevations to selected contour plines or sets.

To use GCONECON

  1. Set the intended contour interval using CONTOURSET
  2. Copy or relayer the contour plines to a single layer (optional)
  3. Run GCONECON
  4. Enter a contour elevation
  5. Pick a pline or set
    • The elevation is modified
    • The colour is modified
    • The default elevation for the next contour is reset

Note

  • The "contour" can be a pline or set.
  • The colour of the completed contours is always modified to 3.
  • You can specify whether the elevation of the next contour to be selected is Up or Down by the contour interval or the Same.

See also GCMULCON to change multiple contours at once, GCCONTXT to derive elevations from contour label text or PLTO3D if you want to change change the increment or colour as you go or GCRIVER to interpolate elevations onto a digitized river valley.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 258
 GCOUT

Export data to Geocomp .PTS and .STR format.

Geocomp SDS data consists of at least two files with the same name and certain file extensions. The name must be a six-digit integer for Geocomp to read them.

Points
The points file (.PTS) contains the easting, northing, elevation and a standpoint number. The standpoint is 0 when exported from Terramodel. If point has no elevation in Terramodel, the elevation is -9999 in the PTS file, which means no elevation. The point number is derived from the line number.
Strings
The string file (.STR) contains the stringing for those points. The STR file is automatically created with the .PTS file of the same name. Each string has a description (see below) and an entity (see below). The string number is the line number in the string file.
Annotation
The annotation file (.ANT) contains text. This file is only created when text is selected and not exploded. EAT codes in text are replaced with the value. The following characters are substituted to suit Geocomp: ° by ^, " by ~ and new line by two spaces.
Description
The description is the first 20 characters of the name. The following characters are substituted to suit Geocomp: ° by ^, " by ~ and , by ;.
Entity
Geocomp data is divided into entities ranging from 1 to 999. To set the entities, chose from:
  • Match record name with short entity name
  • Match record name with moss code
  • Match record name with long entity name
  • Use group number of record
  • Decode the layer name from the first few characters (e.g. get entity 102 from layer 102_TOP.)

You can choose whether you want to explode blocks, linetypes or text.

The maximum number of points or strings that Geocomp 9.x can read is approximately 32,000. For Geocomp 10.08 and 10.1, the maximum is approximately 132,000.

Other Geocomp data types that can be exported include:

Cross sections CES See EXPORTGC and GC37
Contours CON See GCCONOUT
Digital Terrain Models DTM See GCDTMOUT
Horizontal alignments HAL See GCHALOUT
Vertical Alignments VER See GCVEROUT

 

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   File\Misc. Export\Geocomp PTS + STR Geocomp Update or $25 68
 GCPAD

Place building pads at nominated elevation within a lot.

Create a new set on the current layer, offset from the lot boundary by 0.005 with points at the specified elevation.

Select a free location anywhere inside a lot. Define a standard offset and either a Relative or Absolute Elevation. If an existing set is already offset, then only the Elevation Relative or Absolute values need to be applied.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 283
 GCPAN

Pan by keypad with North = 8.

Pan to the adjacent screen in the direction of the numeric keypad.

As shown in the following table, type in GCPAN, a space and a numeric keypad button indicating the direction.

 
NW = GCPAN 7
 N = GCPAN 8
NE = GCPAN 9
 W = GCPAN 4
 
 E = GCPAN 6
SW = GCPAN 1
 S = GCPAN 2
SE = GCPAN 3
If you want to use a mouse to move to a location, Shift while holding down the middle mouse wheel, or select PAN, RECENTER, GC34 or the VPAN toolbox in the Geocomp workspace.
TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     S 133
 GCPANEL

Create concrete roadway batter panel set out points.

Create points to set out concrete roadway panels given a panel alignment, start chainage, panel gap and hole edge distance.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $500  
 GCPAVSET

Create a CSV file of pavement depths in a format suitable for use in Paveset paving machines.

Specify a roadway, pavement depth, as-built layer, chainage range, offsets (in m) and export CSV file name.

The CSV file includes at the specified offsets, for every xline, the chainage and the difference in mm between design elevations interpolated from the road design and as-built elevations interpolated from the as-built DTM layer.

The optional report also shows the road name and description, layer depth, design elevation and as-built elevations.

If elevations cannot be interpolated from both surfaces at any offset, the output files are deleted with a warning.

You may need to use GC91 or similar to extend the surfaces beyond the as-built points to ensure that elevations can be interpolated. The xlines at the reported offsets should be at the as-built points. The specified chainage range should not exceed the as-built surface.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCPILE

Create pile points along an alignment.

Create points for each pile given alignments, chainage range, spacing, offsets, elevation and pile numbers.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 340
 GCPLFIN

Import HP-GL or HP-GL/2 (.PLF, .HPG, .GL2, .PLT, .000) plot file into sheet view.

Import and edit plot files in HP-GL and HP-GL/2 format then plot to any Windows plotter.

This is useful when your Windows plotter doesn't support HP-GL or HP-GL/2/2, but you have a HP-GL or HP-GL/2 plot file from Geocomp or other software.

Supported plotter commands

Lines
PD, PU, PA, PR
Pen numbers
SP
End of page
PG, NR, Esc%01A
Arcs
AA
Text labels
LB, LO, SI, SL, DI
Page size
PS

These commands make up the bulk of HP-GL and HP-GL/2 plot files which have not been polyline-encoded. PE commands produced by applications including Terramodel are ignored.

PC and PW commands are ignored. Instead specify colour mapping during import. Use the Terramodel pen carousel to define the pen thickness and colour for each pen.

The plot is placed in the current layer in the sheet view in at the specified location.

Dimensions are in sheet units.

Text labels use TMODELF font. You can change these after import using TEXTMETRICS.

Notes

for PDF2CAD users:
  • In PDF2CAD, Options select HP-GL/2 CAD format
  • In GCPLFIN,
    • Browse for file, selecting HPG file as the file type.
    • Everything is imported as plines.
    • Map CAD colours to Terramodel colours during import.
for Geocomp users
  • To import Geocomp .PLT files, see GCPLTIN.
  • Use GCPLFIN rather than GCPLTIN, to closely approximate Geocomp plots.
  • Create a PLF from your PLT with SDS 94, RDP 494, or PU4.
  • Linework and symbols are converted to plines.
  • If the first character in the Geocomp .CMD file is *, text is retained as labels, otherwise text is exploded to plines.
  • While Geocomp can be configured to output PLF files to suit almost any vector plotter, GCPLFIN is optimised to import PLF files in HP-GL format.
  • If you specify the Geocomp pen number to equal the Terramodel colour number, and map the colour number to equal the Terramodel pen number, the selected Terramodel pen carousel will use the same pen numbers as the Geocomp plot.

To use Terramodel as a Windows plotter for Geocomp

  1. In Geocomp
    1. Copy GCPLFIN.CMD from C:\Program Files\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp to C:\GC10\CFG as OTHER.CMD
    2. Configure Geocomp to use OTHER plotter format
    3. Create a PLT, for example using Geocomp command SDS 93
    4. "Send plotter instructions to disk file" using Geocomp command SDS 94 or PU 4.
  2. In Terramodel
    1. Configure a carousel
    2. Add a plotter configuration for your Windows plotter and carousel
    3. Create a new Terramodel project
    4. Open the Sheet view
    5. Set a suitable current layer
    6. Run GCPLFIN command
    7. Edit the plot if required.
    8. Plot at 1:1 scale to your Windows plotter (unless you want to scale it).
TML date MenuSource 
20/06/13   File\Misc. Import\Geocomp HP-GL/2 PLF Geocomp Update or $125  
 GCPLTIN

Import Geocomp .PLT plot file into sheet view.

The Geocomp PLT file format is unique to Geocomp. The font, character height, character width, label origin, orientation and slant are set in the PLT using the entity definition in the Geocomp plot parameter file.

You can modify text by commands including TEXTMETRICS, TEXTSCALE, TEXTALIGN, TEXTCASE, TEXTFIT, GCTXTFIT and ALIGNTXT.

Layer
Layers are determined by the entity of the record and the selected Geocomp entity file.
Font
The Geocomp font is substituted by the Terramodel font used in the text style nominated for that font. Some suggested equivalents:
Geocomp font Terramodel font
0 iso3098b, tmodelp
5 tc-romns
10 tmodelf, tc-mono
98 subdiv
99 iso3098b, tmodelp
Character height
The character height is derived directly from the character height in the PLT file text record.
Aspect ratio and text width.
The aspect ratio in Terramodel is the character width in the PLT file multiplied by the width factor divided by the character height in the Geocomp PLT file [Aspect ratio = width * factor / height]. The width of a text record is dependent on the Terramodel font, character width, width factor and characters used. Leave the width factor as 1.0 unless you want to consistently stretch or compress text from a certain font.
Colours
Select Terramodel colour numbers to substitute for Geocomp pen numbers 1 to 20. Use PLOTSET, PLOTTER​SET and CAROUSEL to control the colours and thicknesses on paper. Use PALETTE to control the display colours.
Linetype
Numbered Geocomp linetypes are substituted by linetypes of the same name, otherwise Solid is used. These linetypes can be loaded from GC9.LIN.
Symbols and blocks
Geocomp symbols are substituted with the closest equivalent Terramodel point symbol, unless "Use Terramodel blocks instead of point symbols" is enabled, in which case the matching Geocomp symbol block is used. For example, Geocomp symbol 68 (+) is labelled with point symbol 34 or block GCSYM068.
File format
To import HP-GL/2 files, see GCPLFIN. Use GCPLTIN rather than GCPLFIN, if you don't want to explode linetypes and text.
TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   File\Misc. Import\Geocomp Plot PLT Geocomp Update or $125 FC D
 GCPRFEDT

Edit profile IPs graphically.

Edit an Intersection Point from a vertical alignment profile in the profile view.

Choose an editing mode such as Drag.

You can set maximum, minimum and increment for grades and whether to display.

See also CURVE to edit the curve details at an IP and RDVALEDIT to use design speed criteria.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Edit VAL Geocomp Update or $250 412
 GCPROFIL

Create profiles from multiple DTMs in a layerlist.

Create profiles along multiple HALs interpolated from DTMs in a layer list.

Each profile is created in the profile view referenced to its HAL.

The pline colour is derived from the DTM layer colour, the linetype from the DTM linetype and both the name and layer name from the DTM layer name.

The pline vertices are created at the DTM break points. The profiles are broken at the edge of the DTM and within dead areas.

You can delete profiles previously created from the same HALs.

See also PROFILE and QPROFILE which use layer masks.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   DTM\​More..\​Profiles from layerlist Geocomp Update or $250 235
 GCPTAIN

Import data from TPSetout/​TPStakeout .PTA survey point file.

See also TPSETOUT for exporting to TPSetout and TPSTKOUT for exporting to TPStakeout.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCPTDIST

Check minimum distances between points on sets.

Report record number, layer name and point numbers for each segment.

Indicates with **** whether any segment is less than a specified maximum distance.

Report average distance between points for each set and overall.

Use GCPTSDIST to prove that you have taken sufficient observations in surveys of linear features such as roads.

Use GC68 to interpolate points at a minimum distance.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCPTSIN

Import points from an ASCII file.

Select from a range of coordinate survey formats.

Formats include:

  • Agtek
  • Civilsoft (1 and 2)
  • Geopak
  • Lewis and Lewis
  • Lietz SDRMap
  • LisCAD
  • TDS
  • Wildsoft
  • Lat-Long
  • Geocomp Control Points (.CRD)
  • Geocomp Field File coordinates .(FLD)
  • Trimble E N D
  • Carlson RW5
  • Trimble Recon LM80 (.TXT)
  • Desc East North Elevation
  • Leica .CST
  • ASCII GPS .ASC
  • Leica GSI16 GPS
  • Geodimeter Area
  • LandXML

PTSIN imports only some of these formats.

See also IMPORT which imports many formats, GCPTSOUT and PTSOUT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCPTSOUT

Output points to an ASCII file.

Select from a range of coordinate survey point formats for uploading into survey instruments for setout.

Formats include

  • CivilSoft 1 and 2
  • Geopak
  • Lewis and Lewis
  • Lietz SDRMap
  • LisCAD
  • TDS ASCII
  • Wildsoft
  • Leica with 8 character descriptions .GRE
  • Leica with 8 character descriptions .GSI
  • Leica with 16 character descriptions .GSI
  • Sokkia SDR2x
  • Sokkia SDR33
  • Geodimeter Area .ARE
  • Nikon 700 series Upload
  • Geocomp Field .FLD
  • Geocomp Control Point .CRD
  • Trimble $PTNL,PJK .TXT
  • Leica 1200 LandXML
  • Trimble Recon LM80

The Job name field is currently only used with Sokkia formats.

Some of the formats have been modified slightly compared with the similar PTSOUT, such as adopting Easting/Northing order.

Points with undefined (*) easting or northing, are not exported. Points with undefined elevation (2D points), may be exported depending on the format. With some formats, you can choose whether to export the point number or the point name.

See also EXPORT and PTS2TEXT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 188
 GCPTSTXT

Change elevation or name of points on layer by the nearest selected text within tolerance.

Change the elevations or names of points imported from 2D CAD drawings where the points are labelled with text objects.

Select the text objects, a layer of points and a tolerance.

Select whether to replace all elevations or names, or just those which don't already have elevations or names.

Select whether to delete text objects for those points which have been changed.

Select whether to replace the point elevations or the point names.

Select whether the tolerance is to be measured from the points to the insertion points of the text or to the centroids of the text boxes.

If you don't have points, use TEXT2PNT to create points at the insertion point of the text.

See also DTMPTS and GCCONTXT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCQA

Report chainage, offset and elevation difference to DTM.

Compare points in a survey against a design DTM.

The report shows the chainage, offset, design DTM elevation (=rl), point elevation (=fl) and elevation difference (dz) for each selected point.

You have the option to ignore points outside the DTM extent and specify a stripping depth.

The chainage and offset is computed relative to the active alignment.

See also GC30.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCQP

Interactive quick profile.

Display a profile interpolated from a DTM layer between two locations in the Plan view.

The second location can be dragged by mouse. In Shift mode, the first location is moved with it. In Rotate mode, the first location is fixed.

The quick profile is displayed in the Xsect view, but no object is created.

See also QPROFILE which is not interactive, but allows for multiple layers.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCQV

Move a HAL IP and recompute roadway volume.

Move a selected point of intersection along a horizontal alignment to a new location and calculate the resulting cut and fill roadway quantities.

QV Options

ROAD
Terramodel will display the current road in this control. If you have more than one road in your project file, open the drop-down list box to select a different road.
ALIGN
Select the HAL whose alignment you want to modify from this locate control.
LOC
Enter the IP you want to relocate in this point control. Selecting the HAL along a curve or tangent causes Terramodel to locate the closest point of intersection to the location you picked.
CALC
This command button calculates the new cut and fill quantities from the modified HAL, the original vertical alignment, and the stored templates and displays it in the Message scroll.
Tips
  • You must have used the ROADS module to store a road job, shapes, templates, horizontal alignment and vertical alignment in your Terramodel project file before executing GCQV.
  • Execute Undo after each IP modification to return the alignment to its previous form.
  • GCQV is an improved version of QV.
TML dateGuide Source 
20/06/13 RG 1244   Geocomp Update or $50  
 GCREDRAW

gcredraw toolbar button

Redraw all views and set scale for point labels.

Redraw all view modes.

If the current view is the Plan view, the plan view scale is also set so that point labels are a consistent, small but legible height.

GCREDRAW is similar to the VIEWSCAL Default for Pt Labels button followed by REDRAW.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Toolbar and View\Redraw for labels Geocomp Update or $100 132
 GCRENUM

Renumber points in set order.

Sequentially renumber points in selected sets, starting at the highest point number in the project plus one.

See also RENUM, RENUMBER, REVERSE and GCNAMEPT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 129
 GCREPORT

Start a new report in P3Pad editor.

Start a new report in P3Pad editor by clearing any current report or opening a new P3Pad report window.

Any new report created by a Terramodel command, will replace any currently open report. To keep a report, select File from the P3Pad menu then Save As...

Editor features include Text formatting, Print Preview, Find and Replace, Insert Date and Time and Embed or Insert objects such as images.

The P3Pad report editor can be used to edit Terramodel reports, or write new text. The reports can be Saved and Opened in Text or Rich Text (RTF) formats. Use TXT format to reuse in software such as TEXT or TXTIN.

Changes to page setup, typeface or font size for new reports take effect only after you restart the report editor. Use a font such as Courier New which is fixed width and displays m² correctly.

If you want to use a different editor, simply copy the text and paste into that other editor such as WORDPAD or NOTEPAD.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 201
 GCREVIEW

Move or copy objects from one view to another.

The only attribute that is changed is the View mode. The coordinates are retained.

The objects are removed from the original view, unless you do not "Delete Old".

Examples

Review a point from Plan to XSect
A point in the PLAN View with Easting X = 1000, Northing Y = 2000 and Elevation Z = 100 when reviewed to the XSECT view becomes Offset X = 1000, Elevation Y = 2000 and Chainage Z = 100.
Import profile
If you have an ASCII file of a profile in the format "Chainage,Elevation" you could IMPORTinto the PLAN view then review to the PROFILE view.
Rotate a copy in 3D
Review objects from the Plan view to View 8, without deleting them. Then use GC3DROT to rotate the copied objects.

See also REVIEW which always deletes the objects from the original view.

TML date Guide Menu Source  
20/06/13 RG 1246 Modify/​ReView Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCRIVER

Interpolate elevations onto a digitised river.

Create a point wherever a 2D "river" pline crosses a pline representing a contour, with the elevation of the contour pline then create a set along the path of the river pline and interpolate elevations along the set.

For best results, remove flat triangles in LINKSET before forming the terrain model.

See also GC50, GCONECON, GCMULCON GCCONTXT and ELVPLINE .

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100 185
 GCRLNOUT

Create Geodimeter Roadline3D Files from sets

Cross sections are created by intersecting sets at Xlines along the alignment.

The HAL, VAL, "roadway templates", and "side templates" are exported to an .RLN file suitable for uploading to Geodimeter Program 39 using Geodimeter Software Tools or the Upload Script.

Selecting "Use names" includes names in the .RLN file. Select "Limit 12 Pts" if uploading, as only 12 points can be uploaded for each side template. Alternatively, if the file is to be imported using the Import script for editing as a Terramodel Roadway, the limit is not required.

The details of each computed point are reported.

See also P39 and See also GCMULTGD.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCSDROUT

Export alignment in Sokkia SDR format.

Use a Roadjob, HAL/VAL or intersect 3D sets.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCSKIPMN

Replace skip ranges by CSV or pline boxes.

Replace skip ranges from skips defined in a CSV file or by pline boxes.

Use GCSKIPMN when you have too many skip ranges to manage by manual editing with SKIP.

You can add or replace skip ranges from a file which you have previously created in a spreadsheet application.

You can also create pline boxes at the current skip ranges in both the plan and profile views, centred on the road alignment. After editing these boxes for position and range and updating the alignments, Create Skips from selected boxes.

Options

Roadjob
Select the roadjob
Sort
Sort the skip ranges in chainage order
Report
Report the skip ranges
Import
Import skip ranges from a CSV file with start chainage, end chainage, skip name
Box Width
Specify a width in m for pline box
Create boxes
Create pline boxes at skips
Create skips
Create skips at selected pline boxes
TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $200  
 GCSPELL

Check spelling of text.

Check spelling of words in selected text objects against a dictionary.

You can select from Options and Dictionaries.

TML dateGuide Source 
29/10/13 built-in   $200  
 GCSTRATA

Create points at strata from table of materials and depths.

Create multiple points with the same coordinates as selected points, with layer names and elevations derived from a CSV file.

To use GCSTRATA

  1. Relayer the points according zones of typical strata as suggested by a geologist.
  2. Create a CSV file with rows for new layers and columns of depths for each zone.
  3. Run GCSTRATA.
  4. Select the points.
  5. Choose whether to compute elevations or depths.
  6. Select the CSV file.
  7. Choose whether to delete the original points.
  8. Create a new point with a new elevation on the layer in the left column for each point with layer name matching the first row.

For example, using this table, and selecting depths, for each point on layer B4, create a point on each of the six listed layers with the same easting and northing. The elevation of the new point on layer 1_topsoil is 0.1, on layer 2_alluvium is 0.3, etc.

Layer,        A,    B1,    B2,   B3,    B4,    

1_topsoil,   0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   0.2,  0.1,   

2_alluvium,  0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   2.5,  0.3,   

3_colluvium, 0.2,  0.2,   0.2,   2.5,  0.5,  

4_RS,        4.8,  2.3,   3.7,   4.7,  1.5,    

5_XW,       12.8,  3.6,  12.8,   9.1,  4.1,   

6_MW,       13.6,   20,  22.7,  20.1,   28,    
  

If the points are to be used for depth surfaces, select depths so the Z value is derived from the table. If for elevation surfaces, the value in the table is subtracted from the elevation of the original point.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCSUBDTM

Create a subgrade DTM from depth boundaries.

Create a DTM surface for use as a Subgrade below selected boundaries representing depths of material.

Create a DTM of a subgrade below an Initial DTM by depth boundaries.

GCSUBDTM copies the Initial DTM onto a new DTM, drapes the first boundary onto the new DTM, clips the new DTM inside the boundary, creates a new set inside the boundary at a horizontal offset (=Clip Dist) and vertical offset (=elevation of pline) then copies that part of the initial DTM that is within the inside boundary to the new DTM layer.

The process is repeated for all closed plines with elevations on layers in the specified layer list in alphabetical order of layer name until the Final DTM is created.

You can create a single DTM that is the underside of many subgrade layers each defined by a boundary and a depth below the previous subgrade.

This Final DTM could then be a sliced DTM in ROADWAY, a termination surface in SIDESLOPE, a surface for volumes or exported to machine control.

See also ROADDTM.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCSUBGDE

Create plines to transition to subgrade templates.

Create plines to transition to subgrade templates.

See also CHEKROAD and GCDTMGDE.

TML date  Source 
15/11/13     Geocomp Update or $250  
 GCSZAOUT

Export Quantm special zones .SZA

Quantm Alignment Planning allows you to specify zones that require special treatment such as cost and crossing requirements.

Select zones by closed plines or sets (or blocks containing closed plines or sets) to export to the special_zones.sza file.

The name of the pline or set (or subject of the block) defines the zone description. The layer name defines the zone label.

Export linear features using GCLFAOUT.

Export terrain data using GCTMAOUT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 GCTADPOL

Label batter with block showing direction of slope.

Place user-​definabled "tadpole" blocks between two sets representing the top and toe of a batter.

Each block is placed at the specified spacing from from the set joining points of higher elevation to the lower set. The blocks can therefore swap direction at transitions between cut and fill. It doesn't matter which you pick as "Top" and "Toe" unless you are drafting in 2D.

Blocks are scaled to just less than the horizontal distance between the sets. Blocks which exceed the specified maximum length are not placed. Tadpole blocks one unit long are placed with a small gap at the lower end.

Typical tadpole blocks are GCTADPOL, TADPOLE TYPE 1 and TADPOLE TYPE 2.

To create your own tadpole block, draw plines so that the location for the higher batter string is at 0,0 and the lower is at 0,1. Then use BLOCK to Create the block from the plines with the origin at 0,0.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCTMAIN

Import Quantm terrain data.

Use GCTMAIN to verify your TMA file before submitting it to Quantm Alignment Planning System.

Use MOSSIN to transfer proposed alignments in GENIO format from Quantm to Terramodel.

See GCTMAOUT.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 GCTMAOUT

Export Quantm terrain data.

Create a .TMA file for submission to the Quantm Alignment Planning System for route optimization. The TMA file is a grid of points interpolated from a DTM within a boundary.

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH.

Check your .TMA file by reimporting it using GCTMAIN.

Export Special Zones using GCSZAOUT.

Export Linear Features using GCLFAOUT.

TML date  Source 
25/09/13     POA  
 GCTRACE

Define a region by tracing inside multiple selected plines, sets or text.

Report the area and show the extent of the region enclosed within multiple boundaries around a location by creating a new set, pline or 'ing on the current layer in any view.

Create a new closed set or pline, or hatching, or both or, if you just want the area, neither. You can continue to select locations Inside to define more regions from the same selected boundaries.

If you want the hatch and boundary to have different colours or layers, run GCTRACE twice or modify later.

You can name the new boundary set or pline with an incrementing integer "lot" number. Gaps less than the maximum Snap Distance are crossed automatically. Duplicate points can be removed from the new set.

To hatch, select a hatch pattern from a list and a scale. If you don't want to hatch, select [None]. See also HATCHPAT.

If your pline boundaries are splines, select only a few at a time. Check the view resolution interval in DISPLAYSET.

The Basic Area, Alt Area and accumulated Alt Area are shown in the message scroll with units and rounding according to the MEASUNIT and UNITSSET settings.

Typical applications for GCTRACE include reporting areas, hatching regions and creating closed figures from messy linework. GCTRACE combines the features of TRACEBDY command which creates internal boundaries with a fixed maximum snap distance and HATCHENC command which reports areas and creates hatching within internal and external boundaries.

See also LOTJOIN to create multiple sets from multiple centres, AUTOSET to create a clockwise set from points and QSET to quickly key in a lot boundary and HATCHPAT and HATCHUSER to hatch closed figures.

Some examples:

Quickly compute areas of many regions

  1. Specify a new current layer
  2. Specify a suitable hatch and scale
  3. Specify None for the new boundary
  4. Select all the sets, plines and text that you want to limit the boundaries
  5. Click the Inside field
  6. Choose a region by clicking a location
  7. The region enclosed by the selected boundaries is hatched and the basic and alternative areas are written to the message scroll.
  8. Change colour or hatch pattern or current layer
  9. Click another location
  10. Another region is hatched and the areas are accumulated.

Close subdivision lots

  1. Specify a new current layer
  2. Specify a snap dist of say 0.005m
  3. Specify to create sets
  4. Specify an initial lot number
  5. Optionally, specify a hatch and scale so you can see where you have been
  6. Select all the sets and plines, but no text, to limit the lots
  7. Click inside the first lot
  8. The closed set for the first lot is created with the lot number for the set name
  9. The next lot number increments by 1
  10. Click inside the second lot, etc. till all lots are defined
  11. If you hatched, delete or relayer the hatching
  12. See also LABELSETS, GCLABLOT, GC80 and LOTJOIN.

Determine a complex boundary for a volume

  1. Specify a new current layer
  2. Specify a snap dist to suit the job
  3. Specify to create plines
  4. Optionally, specify a hatch and scale so you can see where you have been
  5. Select all the sets and plines, but no text, to limit the region. These can include boundaries that look closed but have overlaps or small gaps.
  6. Click inside the region
  7. If you hatched, delete or relayer the hatching

Determine an area excluding voids

  1. Specify a new current layer
  2. Specify a snap dist to suit the job
  3. Specify to create plines
  4. Specify a hatch and scale
  5. Select all the sets or plines limiting the region making sure that the internal boundaries do not intersect the external boundaries
  6. Click a location inside the external boundaries and outside the internal boundaries
  7. The hatching confirms region for which the area is reported
  8. You can delete the hatching and use the plines in other commands such as HATCH, SHADEISO or GCGRNGRD.

Hatch except where there is text

  1. Show text boxes using Quick text in Display Settings
  2. Specify a new current layer
  3. Specify a hatch and scale
  4. Select all the sets and plines and text
  5. Click a location inside the boundary lines and outside the text boxes

Hatch closed contours or isopachs

  1. In CONTOURSET, don't spline, clip lines or label
  2. Generate CONTOUR plines
  3. In GCTRACE, specify a hatch and scale
  4. Select the contours by layers
  5. Click locations inside the closed boundaries.

TML date MenuSource 
13/01/14   Draw\​Set\​Trace enclosing boundary and Draw\​Hatch\​Within multiple lines Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCTSP

Add Geocomp Update to Terramodel Search Path.

If you manually replace the Terramodel initialisation file tmodwin.ini with one from another computer where the Geocomp Update has not been installed, run GC64BIT from the command line to fix tmodwin.ini. If GC64BIT will not run, try typing GCTSP at the command line to add the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​\Terramodel\​Geocomp folder to the Terramodel Search Path (TSP), restart Terramodel then try GC64BIT again.

GCTSP.TML must be in the ...\Terramodel\​TMLs folder so it can be found.

GCTSP is aliased to GC64BIT so typing GCTSP at the command line will fix the paths in tmodwin.ini files copied from 32-bit Windows, unless the Geocomp Update is not found, in which case GCTSP will add the Geocomp folder so you can then run GC64BIT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update CG 9
 GCTSTYLE

Set current text style.

Usage: GCTSTYLE textstyle. For example, type GCTSTYLE seg_label to change the current text style to seg_label.

Use in combination with toolbars, aliases or macros. For example, the following macro sets the current text style to tmodelf_50 then prompts for text:

Start Macro
gctstyle tmodelf_50
stext
End Macro
TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCTTAOUT

Export a set to Trimble .tta and .ttx.

For newer Trimble instruments, replaced by EXPORT Trimble Roading 3D (DC) export using DC file, GCDCOUT or GCMULTDC.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCTUNNEL

Export LandXML for Leica RoadRunner Tunnel.

Export LandXML for Leica RoadRunner Tunnel.

See also ROAD_RUN.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     POA  
 GCTXTFIT

Adjust text aspect to right alignment.

Adjust the aspect ratio of selected text so the selected text aligns to a selected location.

For each selected text object with left or centre horizontal justification, modify the aspect so that the right hand edge of the text box lines up vertically with the X coordinate of the selected location.

Text is not modified where the difference in aspect is more than 25% or the text has left horizontal justification.

See also TEXTFIT.

TML date  Source 
08/10/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCTURN

Compute the swept path of a vehicle.

Create plines showing the swept path of a vehicle.

Place vehicle outlines at intervals along the path.

Store dimensions and layers for a single vehicle or a prime-mover and one or two trailers.

For simple cases, GCTURN can be used in place of AutoTURN and AutoTrack.

Watch a short demonstration (.wmv).

TML dateGuide Source 
20/06/13 GCTURN vehicle dimensions   $250  
 GCMC3D

Export files to Leica UMC 3D Machine Control.

Export the centreline, coordinate, profile and triangle files required for any equipment fitted with current versions of Leica Geosystems Universal Machine Control 3D.

Define an alignment using a road job, then select plines or sets to export as a GEO file or a selected DTM to export as an XML.

Click on Create Files to be prompted for Arc-to-Chord tolerances and the LIN output file name. Then click OK to create the files.

Road job
The main alignment of the selected roadjob is exported as centreline (.LIN) and profile (.PRF) files.
GEO (3D Lines):
If you select any points, sets or plines, a .GEO file is created.
DTM:
Specify a DTM layer to be exported as a LandXML file. You can limit the DTM to a boundary.

 

Settings
Arc to Chord
Wherever the plines or sets contain arcs or spirals, additional coordinates are written to the .LIN, PRF, or .GEO files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances.
Generate Report
You can report to P3Pad every record written to the LIN, PRF, GEO or XML files.
Export Filename:
Specify the location and name of the .LIN file. Any PRF, .GEO or .XML file names will match.
Create Files
Write .LIN and .PRF files then any .GEO or .XML files

Then load the files onto a current version of Leica UMC 3D Machine Control.

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH.

See also GCGEOIN, POWERGDE, GRADESMT and DTM2XML.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13   Geocomp Update or $250 
 GCUNJOIN

Break sets and plines into segments.

This is different to EXPLODE, which explodes only sets and plines with complex linetypes.

GCUNJOIN does not break plines containing curves.

DISJOIN is aliased to GCUNJOIN.

See also JOIN.

TML date  Source 
15/11/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCUPJ

Part of the 10.61J Geocomp Update.

GCUPJ.TML is required for TMLs issued with the Terramodel 10.60J Geocomp Update. It is not a command by itself.

If you get a message mentioning GCUPJ that you don't understand, please advise Geocomp Systems of the complete message.

The equivalent file in 10.60G, 10.61G and 10.61H is GCUPDATE.TML.

 GCVALDEL

Delete selected registered VALs.

Delete registered Vertical alignments from the VAL Manager while retaining the pline records.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCVALOFF

Create a pline VAL from a registered vertical alignment with offsets.

A pline is created along a registered alignment defined by offsets in the vertical alignment manager.

The vertical IPs are created at the chainage interval in the Settings.

A report is displayed showing each chainage, vertical offset and elevation of each IP.

See also GCHALOFF.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 450+412
 GCVERIN

Import Geocomp vertical alignment (.VER).

The .VER file is imported as a pline in the profile view.

Use GCIMPORT if you want the SDS data with the VER.

See also GCLNGIN, GCHALIN and GCVEROUT.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Import Geocomp VER Geocomp Update or $25 77,252
 GCVEROUT

Export Geocomp vertical alignment (.VER).

Convert a pline in the profile view consisting of straights and parabolic curves.

For circular curves, only the IP is converted.

See also GCVERIN and GCHALOUT.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 412
 GCWRAP

Change tunnel wrap status of a layer.

Change wrap status of a DTM layer to "wrapped" or "unwrapped", without transforming the points.

Use this when you have "unwrapped" data on a "wrapped" layer, or vice versa.

See TUNNELDTM.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GCXLINES

Create or replace xlines with chainage labels on a roadway.

Create or replace xlines along the horizontal alignment of a selected roadway with nominated offsets at nominated intervals on the nominated layer.

You can add xlines at HAL points, VAL points and skips.

Use the Settings to limit the chainage range or to label the xlines perpendicular to the alignment with chainages, HAL point labels and optionally road name.

The initial default xlines layer is stored in a project variable. Once xlines have been created, the default xlines layer is the layer of the first xline on the alignment.

If there are old xlines, they are deleted and you are prompted whether to reuse the extents of the existing xlines to clip the new xlines. If they are labelled you are prompted whether to delete the text labels.

The default left and right extents also limit the extents of roadways in commands such as ROADSPOT and GC42AB.

The message scroll reports the main alignment name and description for the current road and default xlines layer.

See also RDXLINES to create xlines at single points, chainages or plines, GC39 to recreate xlines after moving intersection points and XLINES to create xlines without a roadway.

See also GC27 to label xlines.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Roads\More...\​Xlines from road Geocomp Update or $25 84
 GCXMLIN

Import LandXML points within boundaries.

Import points from a LandXML file that fall within a closed pline or within an offset from an open pline.

Use where the input file has very long lines of data.

See also LandXML IMPORT script and GCPTSIN.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GCXMLOUT

Export roadjob in LandXML format.

Export roadjob strings at xlines in LandXML cross section format.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GDMDIR

List Geodimeter directory and delete files.

List files on a Geodimeter data collector with option to delete.

After requesting the Geodimeter instrument type and some communication parameters, open the Instrument Directory dialog box, which displays the Area and Job files that are currently stored in the Geodimeter instrument or data collector.

You can use GDMDIR to:

  • Determine the current contents of the collector before going into the field.
  • Delete files on the collector using the computer
  • Confirm serial communication before configuring import or export scripts.

To download Geodimeter survey files see, IMPORT. To edit, see GFE and RDE.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\​Geodimeter\​Geodimeter directory/​delete files... S GST
 GEOC_PAL

Add GeoNav palettes.

Modifies tmodwin.ini to include GeoNav and Geocomp64 Palettes and one-to-one64 colourmap.

TML date  Source 
30/09/08     Included with HDMS  
 GEOMINQ

Measure bearing and distance.

Report bearing and slope distance between two locations to message scroll.

In Points mode, select two points Points or two locations. In Segment mode, select a set segment.

For two locations, or a pline segment, the show the bearing and horizontal distance.

For two points or a straight set segment, the show the point numbers, bearing, horizontal distance, and zenith angle if the points have elevations.

For an set arc segment, show the point numbers, radius, chord length, arc length, tangent, EX and delta angle.

See also DISTANCE which shows the horizontal distance project units and sheet units at the current view scale, with the option to accumulate.

See also GC29 which shows point numbers, bearing, horizontal distance, dE, dN, vertical angle, slope distance and grade.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Reports/Geometry inquiry S 17
 GEOMRPTS

Report measured values from objects.

Select objects and print a report of selected objects.

TML date Guide Menu Source GC
20/06/13 RG 429 Reports\​Geometry/​Stakeout S 17,41
 GEOSYS

Establish the GPS geodetic system.

Use this to define your local grid before importing Trimble GPS Real-Time Kinetic (RTK) data to compute with RDE.

Establish a geodetic system for the project to which any imported GPS (WGS84-based) data will be converted. This geodetic system cannot be modified after a point is created.

Do not perform geodetic corrections (i.e. "Flat Earth")
Ignore any data that requires geodetic corrections and do not import it. If an imported DC file contains an embedded coordinate system, that coordinate system becomes the current geodetic system.
Use local projection
Use Easting and Northing settings in the RDE\Computation Settings and Tolerances\General Settings tab to create a non-standard geodetic system.
Use current geodetic system
Use the geodetic system currently displayed in the following list box as the "local" geodetic system. When GPS (WGS84-based) data is imported, coordinates are converted to the geodetic system set by this command. To import a DC file with an embedded coordinate system, the two coordinate systems must be the same. The WGS84-based data is not stored; however the geodetic system is stored so that the original data can be re-created if necessary.
Select new geodetic system
Set a different project geodetic system and geoid model before any points are created within the project. Choose from
  • Coordinate System and Zone
  • Calibrated Site
  • Default projection (Transverse Mercator) (or enter your own projection parameters)

GEOSYS uses the Trimble Coordinate System Manager (CSMAN).

COORDCON and GCCOORD use a different coordinate system library unrelated to GEOSYS.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​GPS Geodetic System... S  
 GFE

Geodimeter File Editor.

Edit Geodimeter format files including RAW, JOB, UDS, ARE, PTS and PCO.

GFE column headings can be configured. For example, if GFE displays PTS with Easting\Northing, but the PTS file contains Northing\Easting, the data will appear to be incorrect when the GFE headings that are the real problem.

GFE is part of Field Data Module, so no key is required.

See also Geodimeter System Tools (GST), GDMDIR.

Use IMPORT to import Geodimeter survey files.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 GFE Help File\​Geodimeter\​Geodimeter File Editor... S GST
 GM1

Limit the slope of triangles.

Raise the lowest point in affected triangles in a DTM surface by 1 mm until no triangle has a slope greater than the nominated value.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GOLFAREA

Report areas of golf course fairways, greens, bunkers and tees.

Report, sum and label the area of each selected closed set or pline representing a fairway, green, bunker or tee.

The areas of all greens, bunkers and tees with centroids inside a fairway are subtracted from the area of that fairway.

The fairways are selected by record. The greens, bunkers and tees are selected by layer.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GPXOUT

Export points to Topografix/Mapsource GPS eXchange Format (.GPX).

Export selected points to a .GPX file optimised for reading into Garmin Mapsource software.

Use Settings to choose the coordinate system from which your coordinates will be converted to latitude and longitude on WGS84.

The waypoint name is derived from either the Terramodel point number or name.

See also GCGPXIN and GARMINOU.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 GRADESMT

Export files to Leica GradeSmart 3D Machine Control for graders and dozers.

Export the centreline, plan, layer and triangle files required for dozers or graders fitted with Leica Geosystems GradeSmart 3D Machine Control.

GRADESMT writes coordinates computed along selected strings to 0.0001m precision using specified tolerances in Carlson .CL, .PLN and .LAY file formats. A DTM can also be exported as a Leica TPStakeout TSB file.

Road job
The exported centreline (.CL) file contains coordinates at chainages along the main alignment of the selected roadjob. Each record in the .CL file is in the format 0,​chainage,​L,​northing,​easting. Create one roadjob for each centreline.
2D (PLN):
Select sets or plines to export as a .PLN file for export as a Plan or background map. Each selected set or pline is written to the .PLN as a POLYLINE with the colour number and name followed by coordinates as easting,​northing. If you want hatching, blocks or text in the Plan, explode them to plines first.
3D (LAY):
Select sets joining 3D points to export as a .LAY file for export as a Layer of strings. Each selected set is written to the .LAY as a POLYLINE with the colour number and name followed by coordinates as easting,​northing,​elevation.
DTM:
Specify a DTM layer to be exported to the Leica TPStakeout ASCII triangle file (.TSA) and binary triangle file (.TSB).
Settings
Chainage Range
Limit the exported coordinates to within a chainage range. The initial default values are derived from the selected roadjob. If you change the alignment, reset the start and end chainages.
Triangles per grid (BinTri):
As this integer value for triangle density increases, the grid squares increase in size and reduce in number. This value is a trade-off between the precision and file size of the TSB file. The initial default value is 20.
Arc to Chord
Wherever the strings contain arcs, the additional coordinates are written to the .CL, .PLN and .LAY files using the specified arc-to-chord tolerances, in another trade-off between precision and file size. The same tolerances are also approximated along spirals, combining curves and splines.
Generate Report
If enabled, every record written to the CL, PLN, LAY and TSA files is also reported to P3Pad.
Export Filename:
Specify the location and name of the .CL file, and thus the .PLN, LAY, .TSA and .TSB files.
Create Files
Write a .CL file, then PLN and LAY files if objects were selected. Then, if the DTM layer is not 0, and you confirm that you want to Export triangles, the TSA file is exported and a separate command window opens to run the Leica program BinTri.Exe which converts the TSA file into a TSB. You will need to press any key when prompted, twice.

If you have multiple alignments, repeat with a different roadjob. These files can be combined into a .PRJ project file using Leica GradeSmart software.

To verify elevations at locations in the .TSB, use Leica TPStakeout software on a Leica survey instrument.

See also TPSTKOUT which can export to other TPStakeout file formats.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $500  
 GRDPTS

Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid.

The grid is rounded to the nearest interval (unless rows cross the DTM edge multiple times).

Very large grids can be created, limited by disk space not project file size. The generic X,Y,Z file format can be read into many applications including Spreadsheets.

See also GRIDEXPT which keeps to grid even when rows cross the DTM edge multiple times and can optionally not round the coordinates to the nominated interval.

Dead regions can be defined by SETSMOOTH.

DTMGRID is similar, except points are created in the project.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     S 221+​224+​188
 GRIDELEV

Generate a grid of points, interpolate elevations from a DTM and generate a report.

Generate a grid of points
The Grid Layout dialog allows for control of the number of rows and columns, the start location, the rotation and the layer on which the grid points are generated. The grid starts in the top left hand corner, goes across then down. If any points already exist on this layer you will be prompted for the option of deleting any existing points. Thus it is important to have each set of grid points on a unique layer.
Interpolate elevations onto the grid points
This function calls DTMPTS command. Select the DTM layer from which to interpolate the heights and the grid points (by the layer on which you created the grid points).
M.A.D. Report
Generate a report in Mile-a-Day format.
The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as an .ELE file.
L.F. Report
Generate a report in Landform format.
The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as a .TXT file.
C.A.G Report
Generate a report for Comput-A-Grade irrigation software by Merrilees.
The report is displayed in the Terramodel P3Pad report viewer and saved as an .FRL file.

For all reports, the heading is derived from layer name of the grid points. The report lists only the number of points specified when creating the grid earlier. If you have manually inserted or removed points then this report will be wrong.

See also GRIDVOL and IR_BAY.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 221
 GRIDEXPT

Interpolate an ASCII X,Y,Z file from a DTM and grid.

Round the coordinates to the nominated interval or increment from the lower left corner of the box.

Very large grids can be created, limited by disk space and not project size. The generic X,Y,Z file format can be read into many applications including spreadsheets.

DTMGRID is similar, except points are created in the project.

See also GRDPTS.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $50 221+244+188
 GRIDMAKE

Create a grid of points or plines using grid settings.

Create a grid of points or plines then label them like this:

  1. Use SNAPSET to set the grid origin and bearing
  2. Use GRIDSET to define the grid spacing and type
  3. Use GRIDSET to turn the grid on
  4. Use BOX to create a limiting pline
  5. Use GRIDMAKE, create the points or plines
  6. Use GCLABGRD or LABELGRID to label the grid.

See also DTMGRID and GCGENGRD.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\Pline\Grid S 265
 GRIDSET

Configure current grid settings.

Configure the colour, type, spacing and visibility of a display grid for each view mode.

The Grid on tick box, makes the grid visible unless the interval is too close to display or no grid line passes though the display.

Set the Horizontal and Vertical distance between grid intervals, in ground units, for the horizontal and vertical directions. For the Plan, Sheet, and Xsect view modes, the vertical control is dimmed and the vertical spacing is set equal to the horizontal spacing.

Set the grid type to Dots, Ticks or Lines. When the Ticks option is selected, you can enter the horizontal and vertical length of the tick marks in sheet units.

To create a grid of points or plines, use GRIDMAKE or GCGENGRD.

To snap to the grid, use SNAPSET to set a similar snap interval to the grid interval.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Settings\​Grid settings... S 93
 GRIDVOL

Compute the cut and fill volume in selected grid cells.

Reporte volumes and create text showing the values in each region. Selecte regions defined by closed plines of any shape or create rectangular grid cells.

Generate grid
Create regular grid cells as a series of abutting rectangular plines.
Single
Compute the cut & fill volume for a single selected region.
Multiple
Compute the cut & fill volumes for selected grid cells. Report result for the individual cells and the total cut & fill volumes.

Place the generated cells and subcells on different layers, so they can be selected or displayed easily.

If you label the cells with text, use vertical justification in the styles to prevent overwriting.

Regions can be any shape, including stockpile boundaries.

See also GCGRDVOL which also controls boundaries, reports, text layers, style and hatching and can create regions between xlines.

Command date MenuSourceGC
29/10/08   Reports\​More...\​Grid volumes S 222
 GRP2NAME

Change the name of each object to match its group.

This can be helpful where you want to use groups with a function that uses names. For example, where you want to export to a format that includes a name or description field.

You may then want to use DESC to change numeric names to alphanumeric.

See also REGROUP which changes the group to match the layer and LAY2NAME which changes the name of each object to match its layer.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 76
 GSIDTMOU

Export a layer in Leica DTM Stakeout GSI format.

The DTM can be uploaded into Leica Total Stations that include DTM stakeout software, such as TC1100.

Choose between 8-character and 16-character GSI format. Coordinate shift values are set where the coordinates are 1000000 or above.

DTM Layer Name, JobID and export file name.

Export all triangles in the DTM or only DTM triangles entirely inside a pline boundary.

Depending on the software installed on the Leica total station, you may be able to also export triangles by TPSTKOUT or EXPORT LandXML or DXF 3DFaces.

See also GCGSIOUT and EXPORT LandXML for alignments and GCPTSOUT for points.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 GSSWP

Geocomp Systems Support web page.

Type GSSWP at the command line to launch your default web browser and start a new window for the Geocomp Systems Support web page http://​www.geocomp.com.au/​support/.

See also RUN, TMLLIST and TMLLISTL.

 GST

Geodimeter Software Tools.

Geodimeter Software Tools (or GST) is a stand-alone application for communication with Geodimeter survey instruments.

While Geodimeter Software Tools 2.02 is included on some Terramodel installation CDs including 9.8, but is largely replaced in later releases of Terramodel by other functions including GFE, RDE, IMPORT, EXPORT, Remote Device Manager and Trimble Data Transfer.

GST is not installed automatically. After installing, (by default to C:\​Trimble\​GST\​Geotool.exe), run GST and check that the Settings are correct for your conventions. Note especially that the default angle units are Grads so you may want to change them to DMS.

GST can be executed from a Terramodel command prompt using an ALIAS.

GST is not secured to a key. If the related Geodimeter application GEOMODEL is installed and run and no key is found, Geodimeter GEOTOOL, which is similar to GST, will run instead. If GEOMODEL finds any Terramodel key, neither GEOTOOL nor GEOMODEL will run (unless the key has the Geotool module) so use GST or IMPORT and EXPORT for communication and CONTOUR for contouring.

 HALDATA

Create a horizontal alignment by entering curves into a table.

Create or edit a horizontal alignment through entry of intersection point coordinates and curve data into a table.

The curve types are

POB
Point Of Beginning: Enter the starting coordinates of the alignment
ARC
A circular curve: Enter the IP and radius
COMBINING
A spiral/arc/spiral/arc/spiral combination. Enter the IP, two radii, three spiral lengths and a % delta angle (or the arc length as a negative) for the first arc.
POINT
Intersection point with no curve: Enter the IP coordinates only.
SPIRAL
A curve with one circular arc and two clothoid spirals: Enter IP, radius and two spiral lengths.

See also CURVE.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Roads\​Alignments\​HAL data entry S  
 HALMANAGER

Manage registered horizontal alignments.

Register horizontal alignments, chainage equations and horizontal offsets.

Horizontal alignments are used to designate the path that the design will follow, and to control the way in which features are transitioned.

HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT
Change the record number of the alignment associated with the HAL. You can register the same set or pline with more than one HAL.
Name
Change the name of the registered alignment selected in the list of HALs below.
HAL
Enter or pick the set or pline to be registered as the HAL.
NEW ALIGNMENT
Add a horizontal alignment to the list of HALs
Chainage (Station) equations
Display a list of the chainage equations for the HAL and add or delete chainage equations.
ALIGNMENT OFFSETS
Define an alignment in terms of offsets to a main alignment.
DELETE
Delete the highlighted HAL from the list.

See also GCACTIVE, VALMANAGER and HORIZALIGN.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Roads\​Alignments\​HAL manager S  
 HALVALRP

Report horizontal and vertical alignments.

At xlines along selected HAL, design VAL and Existing VAL, report chainage, easting, northing, design elevation, existing elevation, elevation difference and grade.

You can consider skips from the current road job.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25  
 HAREAB

Basin area.

Calculate the area of a set or polyline and store it as an attribute of a basin.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Basin\​basin area S  
 HATCH

Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries.

Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines.

Select Pattern to hatch with a predefined hatch pattern using HATCHPAT.

Select User to hatch at a user-​defined angle and spacing using HATCHUSER.

Command dateGuideMenuSource277
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Hatch\​With selected pattern and Draw\​Hatch\​With User-​defined pattern S 277
 HATCHENC

Hatch the region enclosed by selected objects.

Create a single block by hatching within a single region defined by multiple boundary lines.

Select a predefined hatch pattern, a scale and a location inside the boundary lines.

The block boundary is defined by tracing inside selected boundaries.

The hatch patterns can be selected from a list controlled by HATCHPAT.

The hatch scale is stored as a project variable.

HATCHENC has been replaced by GCTRACE which can also create plines or sets, control the maximum snap distance and report Basic and Alt areas.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\​Hatch\​Within multiple lines Geocomp Update or $25 277
 HATCHPAT

hatch pattern toolbar

Hatch a region within a closed boundary with a pre-defined hatch pattern.

Create a single internal block by hatching within a closed boundary using a predefined hatch pattern and scale in sheet units.

The selection of hatch patterns is defined in the first TMODEL.PAT found in the Terramodel Search Path, which are typoically in a custom folder, C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Terramodel\​Geocomp, C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​Shared\​Locale\​English\ or C:\Program files\Trimble\​Shared\​Locale\​English\. Copy and paste the patterns into TMODEL.PAT.

The default pattern is the first in TMODEL.PAT. The default scale is derived from the plan view scale and the sheet units.

The Hatch toolbox is included in the Geocomp.ws workspace.

You can define your own hatch patterns in TMODEL.PAT, or copy from some other source, as long as they are in the AutoCAD hatch pattern format.

The selection dialog includes a button to load hatch patterns from any PAT file, for that Terramodel session only. The hatch blocks are stored in project, but the patterns are not, so to create new hatch blocks of the same pattern in a new Terramodel session, you need to reload the pattern, unless they are in the default hatch pattern definition file TMODEL.PAT.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 UG Draw\​Hatch\​With selected pattern S 277
 HATCHUSER

Hatch regions enclosed by boundaries with a user-​defined hatch pattern.

Create a single block from hatching plines within selected boundary lines using a hatch angle, space and scale.

The spacing and scale are in sheet units.

Command dateGuideMenuSource278
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Hatch\​With user-​defined pattern S 278
 HBLIST

List basin hydrograph.

List summary information and hydrographs for a specified basin.

TML dateGuideMenuSourceGC
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Basin\​List basin summary info S  
 HCCN

Calculate curve number.

Calculate a weighted coefficient or curve number given the area and C/CN value.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Basin\​Curve Number /C factor S  
 HCOVER

Hydrology cover sheet.

Create a cover sheet containing company and project information.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\Create cover sheet... S  
 HDEFS

Hydrology defaults.

Hydrology default settings.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Hydro defaults... S  
 HDMS

HDMS toolbox

Hydrographic Data Management System.

A suite of tools for processing hydrographic data.

HDMS can be tailored to suit your hydrographic software and instrumentation.

Available in customised versions for several hydrographic systems including Geocomp Systems' GeoNav, Trimble HYDROpro and Reson.

Depth labels can be applied, formatted and weeded.

Depths, points and contours can be coloured by depth ranges.

See also:

  • Terramodel HDMS
  • GCCOORD: Coordinate System Transformation within Terramodel
  • LLGRID: Create a labelled pline grid of latitudes and longitude
  • LLTABLE: Create table of coordinates including latitudes and longitudes
  • GeoCalc: Coordinate System Transformation - stand alone
  • Nav Notes: Related notes and links
  • GCGeocode: Select, transform or filter millions of points
TML dateGuideMenuSource 
03/09/08 hdms.pdf HDMS POA  
 HDMS​DCLBLK

Create a grid of blocks coloured by depth.

Add blocks to depth points and colour the blocks using a DCL file.

To run the example:

  1. Copy hdmsdclblk test.pro, a sample Terramodel project file containing a 5 x 5m grid of depths, from the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​\Terramodel\​Geocomp\​Docs folder to a data folder.
  2. Start Terramodel.
  3. Open the project file hdmsdclblk test.pro.
  4. If you haven't a HDMS menu, use MENUCFG to select the menu geocomp+.m from the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​\Terramodel\​Geocomp folder.
  5. From the HDMS Menu, select Colour by depth then Colour blocks.
  6. Select some Depth Records.
  7. Select Layer on which to place the Blocks.
  8. Click [Next>>].
  9. Select HDMS​DCLBLK-1x1 from the list (If HDMS​DCLBLK-1x1 is not on the list, Browse to select it from the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​\Terramodel\​Geocomp folder.)
  10. Tick Map colour so each block is displayed with the block colour (otherwise you will display the colour of the objects in the block.)
  11. In the Scale box, enter 5.0 or use the mouse to measure some other grid size. (The depths in hdmsdclblk test.pro are in a 5 x 5m grid, so a scale option of 5.0 will scale the 1 x 1m block to 5 x 5m.)
  12. In the Rotation box, leave the value as 0.0 degrees. (If you depth grid is rotated, enter the rotation in degrees from north.)
  13. Leave the Create new Layer for each Level option un-ticked. (Selected if separate layers for each DCL level are required for export.)
  14. Click [Browse...] to select the example file Outer Hbr Blue.DCL from the C:\Program files (x86)\​Trimble\​\Terramodel\​Geocomp folder.
  15. Click [Edit] to view or edit this DCL file. (HDMS must be installed to enable this option.)
  16. Click [Ok] to create a grid of blocks coloured according to the depth of the points. (To colour the points, use HDMSCOL.)

Previously created blocks are not removed; another block is added each time you run HDMS​DCLBLK.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
20/06/13 in-built help HDMS\Create blocks by DCL Geocomp Update or $250  
 HDRAW

Draw hydrographs.

Draw hydrographs in the sheet view.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Hydrographs\​Draw hydrograph S  
 HECIN

Import a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 ADD 9.7 347 File\Misc. Import/​Export\​HEC-RAS Import S  
 HECOUT

Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

 

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 ADD 9.7 347 File\Misc. Import/​Export\​HEC-RAS Export S  
 HECOUTGC

Export a HEC-RAS Geometry file.

Improved version of HECOUT.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
20/06/13 ADD 9.7 347 File/ Misc. Import/​Export/​HEC-RAS Export Geocomp Update or $25  
 HELP

Function key F1

Terramodel Help.

Open the Welcome page of Terramodel Help where you can select the main Terramodel Help, Import-Export Help or RDEHelp.

Terramodel Help details the features of Terramodel commands that are included in the standard Terramodel release.

Press F1 while using standard commands to open the relevant help page.

?, CONTENT, CONTENTS, HELPEXPORT, HELPGFE, HELPTOOLBOX, HELPIMPORT, HELPRDE, HELPTV, HLP and MAN each open a particular help file using an ALIAS.

If you get the Windows message "Why can't I get Help from this program?", please go to How to install Windows Help.

See also ABOUT, GCHELP, and DOCUMENTS.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Welcome page Help\Contents S  
 HGEN

Generate basin hydrographs.

Generate hydrographs for a specified basin point.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Hydrographs\​Generate hydrograph S  
 HIDE

Hide a set segment.

Hide a single segment of a set.

To reveal a single hidden set segment, use HIDE again as a toggle. To reveal all segments for selected sets, use REVEAL.

To display all segments, use Ignore Hide in DISPLAYSET.

Hidden segments can be labeled with LABELSEG.

You can HIDE a breakline or closed set segment for plotting purposes. You can also avoid plotting a whole set by using a colour mapped to pen 0 by PLOTSET or giving it a pen-up linetype.

Revealed segments which are OFF or on invisible layers remain hidden.

You cannot HIDE pline segments.

Command dateGuideMenuSourceGC
12/03/09Terramodel Help Draw\​Set\​Hide segment or Modify\​On/Off\​Hide set segment S 49
 HLIST

List hydrographs.

List hydrographs in detail.

TML date MenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Basin\​List hydrograph S  
 HORIZ​ALIGN

Register one horizontal alignment.

Register a pline or set as a horizontal alignment with a name.

Use registered alignments with commands such as GCACTIVE and ROADJOB.

See also HAL​MANAGER to create and delete registered alignments, add chainage equations or enter alignment offsets.

Command dateGuide Source 
12/03/09Terramodel Help   S  
 HRLIST

List reach hydrographs.

List inflow and outflow hydrographs for a reach.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Hydrographs\​Inflow/Outflow hydrographs S  
 HROUT

Route hydrographs through a pond.

Route the basin and reach hydrographs through a pond.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Routing\​Pond routing S  
 HROUTR

Route hydrographs through a reach.

Route the basin and reach hydrographs through a reach.

TML dateGuideMenuSource 
29/10/08 UG 405 Hydro\​Routing\​Reach routing S  
 ID

Report properties of the selected object.

Report or edit properties such as object type, point numbers, north and east coordinates, elevation, name, record number, reference record number, CAD properties, layer name, colour number and linetype.

See EDIT for more details of the properties.

See also GC34 to find a point.

Command dateGuideMenuSource72
12/03/09Terramodel Help Reports\Identify object S 72
 IDANGLE

Report angle within two lines or three points.

If three point, nominate a pivot point, an ahead bearing and a deflection bearing.

See also ANG and LABELANG.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Reports\Identify angle S  
 ID​STATION

Display the chainage and offset.

Display the chainage and offset at the cursor from a selected set or pline.

Select an alignment set or pline. The ACTIVE alignment is the default, unless no active alignment has been set.

For Point, select a location. A rubber band is drawn from the cursor to the lowest chainage perpendicular to the alignment. Chainage and offset are shown in the coordinate scroll. The rubber band and coordinate scroll are updated as the cursor moves.

A negative offset is to the left of the alignment (looking in the direction of increasing chainage).

If the US English language version is installed, Terramodel dialogs and menus refer to Station. If British English, the dialogs refer to Chainage. The Terramodel Help refers to Station. This TML List refers to Chainage.

See also GCIDCHN, CENVIEW and GC03.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Reports\Identify station or Reports\Identify chainage S  
 IGRP

Display only objects in the same group.

Turn all objects in the same group as the selected object on, and all other objects off.

See also QISOLATE, LAYERSET, OFF, OFFALL, ON, ONALL, ONGRP and SETGRP.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     U 47
 ILINE

Create points at intersections of selected lines.

Choose the layer for the new points and the order of point creation.

In the version supplied by Geocomp Systems, sets as well as plines are supported, and elevations are interpolated. If the elevation cannot be interpolated from the line with the lowest record number, ILINE interpolates from the other record, where possible.

TML date MenuSourceGC
20/06/13   Draw\Point\At intersections S 303
 IMAGE

Image manager.

Position, display, plot, and modify BMP, DCX, DIB, GIF, JPEG, PCX, PICT, TIFF, TGA, WMF, and WPG raster images in your project.

The image list shows the image classification; view; name, draw state; and approximate ground coverage (size) in project units for the view. Images are initially ordered by date. Newer images are at the top of the image list. Use the Image Up/Image Down buttons to move an image within the stack.

All images are reloaded each time an image is added or revised.

If you open a project file that is linked to missing images, you are prompted to browse for the image files. Select Yes, to browse for an image, No to postpone browsing for that image or Cancel to postpone browsing for any image.

Info
Display more detailed information about an image
Add
Add an image to your project.
Detach
Remove a link to an image from your project
Modify, register, or clip an image
Click the image name, then click the corresponding option button
Dynaimage
Associate an image with a dynaview
Display image
Toggle the display of the image. Images are memory intensive. Only display images that are necessary for your work. Images do not use system memory when they are not displayed.
Draft Mode
Display the image in draft mode
Slider controls
Adjust image brightness, contrast and fade
Keeper
Save any derived image (the result of registering, clipping or associating with a dynaview)
Done
Display the images as you have specified.

REDRAW to redisplay the images, ADDIMAGE to add an image to multiple plotboxes and IMAGEPTH to change the image paths to a new location.

Refer to Terramodel help for more information.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help File\Image manager S  
 IMAGEPTH

Change file locations for IMAGE manager.

Change the path of all images in a project to the single location of a selected image.

Use IMAGEPTH when you are supplied a project file and images by someone who places images in a different location.

Restart Terramodel to see the new images.

The visibility and location of each image is retained.

TML date  Source 
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $100  
 IMANAGER

Island manager.

Create, copy and delete traffic island templates and assign templates to road jobs.

The Island Manager has similar features to the finish and subgrade template managers.

The chainage list box shows all of the currently defined templates for the specified roadway, including the station at which the template starts, its name, and the number of shapes it contains on the each side.

Command dateGuideMenuSource 
12/03/09Terramodel Help Roads\Road design\Island manager S  
 IMPORT

Import data using scripts.

Using a system of programmable scripts, import from to a wide range of file formats. The formats include various data collectors and survey instruments, ASCII, AutoCAD dwg, dxf, TDS, Microstation .dgn, Terramodel .pro and LandXML.

You can also download the file from some survey instruments using the Remote Device Manager.

IMPORTSMGR controls and edits the scripts, including which scripts are listed on the menu. See also EXPORT and DFEDIT.

Terramodel can take a long time to IMPORT a DXF or DWG file if it has to remove duplicate points as it goes. If there is a layer called DXF_PT_CHK at the time of import, the duplicate points are not removed. Then use GC92 to check the data before using DTM formation or GC31 to remove duplicate points.

Command dateGuidesMenuSourceGC
12/03/09 Import-​Export Help, UG & FDM UG File\​Download/Import S 293, FC A, FC D, FC I, FC T
 IMPORTGC

Import Geocomp Cross Sections (.CES).

Select the Road job and specify the import file type "Geocomp Existing", or "Geocomp Design" depending on the desired surface in the .CES file.

IMPORTGC is an alias to IMPORTXS.

IMPORTGC.TML enables IMPORTXS to import Geocomp .CES format files.

GC37 creates .CES files.

TML date  SourceGC
20/06/13     Geocomp Update or $25 157